Unigraphics NX Student Manual

UNIGRAPHICS
PRACTICAL APPLICATIONS
OF UNIGRAPHICS
STUDENT MANUAL
September 2002
MT10050 - Unigraphics NX
EDS Inc.
Proprietary & Restricted Rights Notices
Copyright
Proprietary right of Unigraphics Solutions Inc., its subcontractors, or its suppliers are included in this
software, in the data, documentation, or firmware related thereto, and in information disclosed
therein. Neither this software, regardless of the form in which it exists, nor such data, information, or
firmware may be used or disclosed to others for any purpose except as specifically authorized in writing
by Unigraphics Solutions Inc. Recipient by accepting this document or utilizing this software agrees
that neither this document nor the information disclosed herein nor any part thereof shall be
reproduced or transferred to other documents or used or disclosed to others for manufacturing or any
other purpose except as specifically authorized in writing by Unigraphics Solutions Inc.
2002 Electronic Data Systems Corporation. All rights reserved.
Restricted Rights Legend
The commercial computer software and related documentation are provided with restricted rights.
Use, duplication or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to the protections and restrictions as
set forth in the Unigraphics Solutions Inc. commercial license for the software and/or documentation
as prescribed in DOD FAR 227-7202-3(a), or for Civilian Agencies, in FAR 27.404(b)(2)(i), and any
successor or similar regulation, as applicable. Unigraphics Solutions Inc., 10824 Hope Street, Cypress,
CA 90630.
Warranties and Liabilities
All warranties and limitations thereof given by Unigraphics Solutions Inc. are set forth in the license
agreement under which the software and/or documentation were provided. Nothing contained within
or implied by the language of this document shall be considered to be a modification of such warranties.
The information and the software that are the subject of this document are subject to change without
notice and should not be considered commitments by Unigraphics Solutions Inc.. Unigraphics
Solutions Inc. assumes no responsibility for any errors that may be contained within this document.
The software discussed within this document is furnished under separate license agreement and is
subject to use only in accordance with the licensing terms and conditions contained therein.
Trademarks
EDS, the EDS logo, UNIGRAPHICS SOLUTIONS, UNIGRAPHICS, GRIP, PARASOLID,

UG, UG/..., UG SOLUTIONS, iMAN are trademarks or registered trademarks of Electronic
Data Systems Corporation or its subsidiaries. All other logos or trademarks used herein are the
property of their respective owners.
Practical Application of Unigraphics Student Manual Publication History:
Version 15.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . February 1999

Version 16.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . January 2000
Version 17.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . December 2000
Version 18.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . September 2001
Unigraphics NX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . September 2002
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Course Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -1
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -1
Course Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -1
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -1
How to Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -2
Classroom System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -2
Class Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -3
About Part File Naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -3
Class Part File Naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -4
Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -4
Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -5
Seed Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -5
Definition of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -6
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Starting Unigraphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Unigraphics Site Specific Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Unigraphics Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
The Gateway Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Cue/Status line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Menu bar pull down menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Platform Specific Dialog Box Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Shared Features of Windows File Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . 1-7
Activity 1 - Creating a New Part file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Opening Multiple Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
To Change The Displayed Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Activity 2 - Open an Existing Part File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Mouse Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Mouse PopĆup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Selection Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Preselection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Multiple Selection Candidates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Layer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Layers and Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Model Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
EDS
All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of i
Unigraphics Student Manual
Table of Contents
Drafting Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34

Engineering Disciplines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Moving Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Class Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Class Selection Filter Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Activity 3 - Save Part As (Copying a Part File) . . . . . . . . 1-39
Activity 4 - Closing Part Files and Exiting Unigraphics . 1-41
Activity 5 - Establish Toolbar Environment in Modeling 1-43
Introduction to Solid Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Coordinate Systems in Unigraphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Absolute Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Work Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Manipulating the WCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Dynamic WCS Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Defining Points for Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Utility Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Activity 1 - Manipulating the WCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Origin, Edge Lengths Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Activity 2 - Additional Toolbars in Modeling Application 2-20
Activity 3 - Creating a Primitive Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Defining Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Diameter, Height Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Activity 1 - Creating a Primitive Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
The Placement Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
The Horizontal and Vertical Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Feature Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Positioning Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Positioning Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Positioning Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Examples of Horizontal, Vertical and Angular Positioning
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Hole Creation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Activity 1 - Creating Hole Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
ii Practical Applications of EDS Unigraphics NX

Unigraphics Student Manual All Rights Reserved
Table of Contents
Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Activity 2 - Creating Slot Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Rectangular Pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Activity 3 - Creating Pocket Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Boss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Activity 4 - Creating Boss Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Rectangular Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Activity 5 - Creating and Positioning a Pad . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Understanding Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Creating and Editing Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Creating Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Editing Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Using Information"Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Used by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Activity 1 - Getting Familiar with Expressions . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Face Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Face Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Hollow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Wall Thickness Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Activity 1 - Performing a Hollow Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Activity 2 - Hollow and Selection Practice . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Activity 3 - Creating a Hollow Feature with an Offset . . . 5-9
Edge Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Edge Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Edge Blend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Edge Blends Using Dynamic Input Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Activity 1 - Creating Edge Blends with Dynamic
Input Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Single Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Double Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Offset Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Activity 2 - Performing a Chamfer Operation . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Model Construction Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Visually Inspect the Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
EDS
All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of iii
Table of Contents
Inspect the Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Model Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Information"Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Information"Expression"List All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Information"Expression"List All by Reference . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Playback & Suppress/Unsuppress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Expression Used by option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Analysis Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Start Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Activity 1 - Model Construction Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Introduction to Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Definitions and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
SubĆAssembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Component Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Component Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
General Assembly Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
TopĆDown Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
BottomĆUp Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Combining Both Approaches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Designing in Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Bottom Up Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Introduction to Load Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Load Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Load States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Fully Loaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Partially Loaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Unloaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Load Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Component Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
The Displayed Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
The Work Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Make Work Part icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Repositioning Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Dragging Components Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
LeftĆRight UpĆDown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
iv Practical Applications of EDS Unigraphics NX

Table of Contents
Dragging along an axis of the coordinate system . . . . . . . . 8-20

Rotation about an axis of the coordinate system . . . . . . . . 8-21
Point to Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Translate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Rotate About a Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Rotate About a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Saving the Work Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Activity 1 - Adding and Repositioning a Component . . . . 8-25
The Master Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
The Assembly Modeler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
The Master Model Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Master Model Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Master Model Drawing Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Activity 1 - Exploring a Master Model Assembly . . . . . . . 9-6
Activity 2 - Creating a Master Model Assembly . . . . . . . . 9-12
Introduction to Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Uses of the Drafting Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Drawing Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Editing a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Activity 1 - Editing a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Adding a View to a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Create Centerline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Removing Views From a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Activity 2 - Adding a View to a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Setting the View Display Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Button Specific Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
View Option Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Activity 3 - Setting View Display Preferences . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Creating Utility Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Automatic Centerline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Associativity of Utility Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Deleting a Utility Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Creating a Cylindrical Centerline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Activity 4 - Creating a Cylindrical Centerline . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Dimension Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Vector Definition for Angular Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Line and Point Definition for Cylindrical Dimensions . . . 10-32
Dimension Local Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Appended Text Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
EDS
All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of v
Table of Contents
Precision Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Tolerance Type and Tolerance Value Options . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Tolerance Value Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Placement Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Arrow Line and Extension Line Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Leader Direction Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Text Justification Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Activity 5 - Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Annotation Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
The Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Placing the Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Creating text Without a Leader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Creating Text with a Leader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Editing Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Editing Existing Dimension Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Activity 6 - Using the Annotation Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Datum Plane Reference Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Reference Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Datum Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Relative Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Creating Datum Planes by Inferred Selection . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Datum Plane User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Dual Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Datum Plane Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Offset Datum Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Center Datum Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Datum Plane Through Cylindrical Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Datum Plane at an Angle Through a Cylindrical Axis . . . 11-9
Datum Plane at an Angle to a Face or Datum Plane
Through an Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Datum Plane Tangent to a Cylindrical Face . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Datum Plane Through Three Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Datum Plane Defined by Point and Direction . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Activity 1 - Creating Relative Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Selecting and Using Datums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
Editing Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
Deleting Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
Activity 2 - Cylindrical Faces and Datum Planes . . . . . . . 11-21
Activity 3 - Feature on a Relative Datum Plane . . . . . . . . 11-27
Activity 4 - Creating a Hole Corner to Corner . . . . . . . . . 11-33
Datum Axis Reference Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Datum Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
vi Practical Applications of EDS Unigraphics NX

Table of Contents
User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3

Relative Datum Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Datum Axis Through Two Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Datum Axis Through an Edge or Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Datum Axis Through a Cylindrical face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Datum Axis Through the Intersection of two Faces . . . . . 12-8
Editing Datum Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Deleting Datum Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Activity 1 - Constraining Locations using Datums . . . . . 12-10
Activity 2 - Relative Datum Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
Sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
What is a sketch? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Why sketch? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
When should a sketch be used? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Sketches and the Model Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Sketches and Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Creating a New Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
The Sketch Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Sketch to Define the Base Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Sketch Associative to Existing Base Feature . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Defining the Reference Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Naming a Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
The Active Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Sketch Creation Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Sketch for a Base Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Sketch on an Existing Face or Datum Plane . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Activity 1 - Sketch Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Sketch Curve Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
Sketch Curve Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
Infer Constraints Setting Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
Locking a Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
Snap Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
The Infer Point Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
Alignment Lines While Creating Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24
Profile Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24
Creating Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26
Creating Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27
Creating Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28
Activity 2- Using the Sketch Profile Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30
Creating Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-39
EDS
All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of vii
Table of Contents
Quick Trim and Quick Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-40

Quick Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-40
Quick Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-42
Activity 3 - Creating Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-43
Activity 4 - Sketching a Gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-48
Activity 5 - Using Quick Trim and Quick Extend . . . . . . 13-55
Sketch Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-59
DegreeĆofĆFreedom Arrows (DOF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-59
Constraining Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-61
Design Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-61
The Sketch Constraints Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-61
Creating Dimensional Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-61
Text Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-64
Dimensional Constraint Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-64
Editing Dimensional Constraints` . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-67
Delay Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-68
Evaluate Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-68
Update Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-68
Creating Geometric Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-69
Displaying Constraint Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-70
Show/Remove Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-73
Constraint Interrogation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-74
Constraint Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-74
Constraint Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-75
Listing Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-75
Removing Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-75
Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-76
Dragging Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-76
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-76
Constraint Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-76
Constraining Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-78
Activity 6 - Constraining a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-80
Activity 7 - Constraining the Gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-89
Convert To/From Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-100
Activity 8 - Constraint Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-101
Swept Features and Boolean Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Types of Swept Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Creating Swept Features from Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Extrude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Rules for Extruding Section String Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
viii Practical Applications of EDS Unigraphics NX

Table of Contents
Extrusion Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4

Activity 1 - Swept Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Boolean Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Defining Target and Tool Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Unite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
Subtract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Swept Feature Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Rules for Extruding With Taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Extruding With Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Activity 2 - Extruding with Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Sweep along Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
Rules for Sweeping Section String Objects Along a Guide 14-19
Guide Strings Containing Sharp Corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
Activity 3 - Sweeping Along a Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21
Defining a Sweep Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23
Activity 4 - Defining a Sweep Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24
Revolve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26
Rules for Revolving Section String Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26
Body of Revolution Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26
Activity 5 - Creating a Body of Revolution . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27
Activity 6 - Adding a Body of Revolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-32
Trimming Face Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-34
Activity 7 - Revolving and Trimming to a Face . . . . . . . . . 14-35
Activity 8 - Extruding to a Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-39
Editing the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

Common Features of the Edit PullĆDown Menu . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Edit Feature Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Delayed Update on Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Editing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Edit Feature Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Edit Feature PullĆDown Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Suppress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Unsuppress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
Delta X, Y, Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
To a Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
Rotate Between Two Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
CSYS to CSYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
EDS
All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of ix
Table of Contents
Deleting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9

Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
Update Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
Activity 1 - Playback, Move & Delete Features . . . . . . . . . 15-17
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-27
Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-28
Add Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-29
Edit Dimension Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-30
Delete Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-30
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-30
Activity 2 - Edit Features and Positioning Dimensions . . 15-31
Activity 3 - Using the Update Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-35
Model Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-38
Display Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-39
Show/Hide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-40
Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-40
Make Current Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-40
Edit Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-41
Edit Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-41
Suppress and Unsuppress Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-41
Reorder Before/After . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-41
Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-41
Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-42
Rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-42
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-42
Object Dependency Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-42
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-42
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-43
Activity 4 - Reordering with the Model Navigator . . . . . . 15-44
Reattaching a Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-46
Using the Reattach Menu dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-46
Reattach Menu dialog box Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-48
Activity 5 - Reattaching a Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-50
Instance Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
Rectangular Instance Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Circular Instance Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
Activity 1 - Rectangular Instance Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
x Practical Applications of EDS Unigraphics NX

Table of Contents
Activity 2 - Circular Instance Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11

Design Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11
Additional Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Project 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Project 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Project 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Project 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Project 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Project 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Project 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Project 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
Project 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Project 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
Project 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
Project 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
Project 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
Project 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26
Project 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28
Project 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
Project 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32
Project 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
Point Constructor Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Creating Points vs. Specifying Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Icon Methods To Specify a Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Inferred Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Cursor Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Existing Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
End Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Control Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Intersection Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Angle on Arc/Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Quadrant Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
Choosing a Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
Rectangular Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
Cylindrical Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
Spherical Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14
Vector Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14
EDS
All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of xi
Table of Contents
Offset Along Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
Transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Transformation Options Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Translate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Rotate About a Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
Mirror Through a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
Rotate About a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
Using Transformations for Symmetrical Geometry . . . . . . C-13
Curve Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

Explicit Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
The Work Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
Basic Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
The Dialog Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
PreĆSelection Highlighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Control Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Inferred Point Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Status Line Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Inferred Selection Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
General Curve Creation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
Point Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
String Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
Line Creation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
Between Two Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
Through a Point and Horizontal or Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
Through a Point and at an Angle to the XC Axis . . . . . . . D-11
Through a Point and Parallel, Perpendicular, or at an
Angle to an Existing Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
Parallel to An Existing Line at a Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13
Through a Point and Tangent or Perpendicular to a Curve D-14
Tangent to a Curve and Tangent or Perpendicular to
Another Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15
Tangent to a Curve and Parallel, Perpendicular, or at an
Angle to an Existing Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-16
Line Creation Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-17
Activity 1 - Creating Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18
Creating Arcs and Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-26
Creating Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-27
Creation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-27
xii Practical Applications of EDS Unigraphics NX

Table of Contents
Dialog Bar Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-27

Creating Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-28
Center Point, Point on Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-28
Activity 2 - Creating Arcs and Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-29
Arc/Circle Creation Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-32
Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-33
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-34
Simple Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-35
2 Curve Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-36
3 Curve Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-37
Fillet Creation Methods Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-40
Activity 3 - Creating Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-41
Editing Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-45
Edit Curve Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-46
Editing a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-46
Editing an Arc or Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-47
Moving an Arc or Circle to a New Location . . . . . . . . . . . . D-47
Using Parameters Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-47
Using Dragging Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-48
Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-49
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-49
Activity 4 - Trimming Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-50
WCS Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1

Defining Points for Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GL-1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN-1
EDS
All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of xiii
Table of Contents
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
xiv Practical Applications of EDS Unigraphics NX

Course Overview
Course Overview
Intended Audience
This course is suited for designers, engineers, manufacturing engineers,

application programmers, NC programmers, CAD/CAM managers, and system
managers who have a need for understanding and using Unigraphics software.
Course Objectives
After successfully completing this course, the student should be able to:
Apply the standards used in class.

Demonstrate knowledge of CAD/CAM theory.
Open and examine models.
Create and edit parametric solid models.
Create and modify basic assembly structures.
Create and modify simple drawings.
Modify existing geometry.
Prerequisites
There are no prerequisites for this class.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of
-1
Course Overview
How to Use This Manual

It is important that you use the Student Manual in the sequence presented
because later lessons assume you have learned concepts and techniques taught
in an earlier lesson. If necessary, you can always refer to any previous activity
where a method or technique was originally taught.
The format of the activities is consistent throughout this manual. Steps are
labeled and specify what will be accomplished at any given point in the activity.
Below each step are action boxes which emphasize the individual actions that
must be taken to accomplish the step. As your knowledge of Unigraphics
increases, the action boxes will seem redundant as the step text becomes all that
is needed to accomplish a given task.
Step 1 Open part file pau_topic_1.
From the menu bar, select File
Choose Open.
Double-click on the parts sub-directory.
Select the file pau_topic_1 and choose OK.
Classroom System Information
Your instructor will provide you with the following items for working in the
classroom:
Student Login: Username:
Password:
Home Directory:
Parts Directory:
Instructor:
Date:
EDS Unigraphics NX
-2 Practical Applications of
Course Overview
Class Standards
The following standards will be used in this class. Standardization allows users
to work with and predict the organization of parts created by others . All work
should be performed in accordance with these standards.
About Part File Naming
In order to facilitate the identification of design models without requiring the

user to open a part file, the user community must establish standard names for
the various files associated with the part definition. The following is a sample
usage of a filenaming standard:
part name revision

(25 characters) (4 characters)
xxx_xxxxxxxxxxxx_xxxx_xxxx•prt
identifier configuration extension

(3 characters) (4 characters) (4 characters)
TIP Currently up to 128 characters are valid for file names. A four
character extension (.prt) is automatically added to define the file
type. This means the maximum number of user defined characters for
the file name is actually 124.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
-3
Course Overview
Class Part File Naming
This course utilizes the following filenaming standard:
underscore unique identifier number

part name
delimiter
pau_ x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x _ x • p r t
course identifier underscore delimiter extension

(3 characters) (4 characters)
Where the student is requested to save a part file for later use, the initials of
the student's given name, middle name, and surname replace the course
identifier pau" in the new filename with the remainder of the filename
matching the original.
Expressions
The student will notice that there is a standard set of expressions resident in
each of the part files as follows:
Expression Name Intended Use

bend_r=.5 identifies bend radius for sheet metal parts
dia=.5 identifies diameter
h=1 identifies height
l=1 identifies length
out_r=.625 identifies the outside radius for sheet metal
parts
rad=.25 identifies Radius
thk=.06 identifies thickness
w=1 identifies width
These expressions could be entered by the user in each file or could be a

standard expression file that could be imported into the part file by the user.
Expression files that are valid for importing carry the file extension of .exp. The
total number of characters allowed in an expression is 132.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Course Overview
Colors
The following colors are preset to indicate different object types:
Object Valid colors

Bodies
Solid Green
Sheet Yellow
Generating Curves (nonĆsketch)
Lines and Arcs Orange
Conics and Splines Blue
Sketches
Sketch Curves Cyan
Reference Curves Gray
Datum Features Aquamarine
Points and Coordinate Systems White
System Display Color Red
Seed Part
Seed parts are an effective tool for establishing customer defaults or any
settings that are partĆdependent (saved with the part file). This may include
nonĆgeometric data such as:
Preferences
Commonly used expressions
Layer categories
UserĆdefined views and layouts
Part attributes
TIP Once a seed part is established, it should be writeĆprotected to avoid

accidental modification of the seed part.
Two seed part files are available for use in this course, pau_seedpart_in for inch
parts and pau_seedpart_mm for metric parts. These files incorporate the
standards described above, and include the TFRĆTRI view as the default view.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
-5
Course Overview
Definition of Terms
Explicit Modeling
Explicit modeling is modeling that is not parametric. Objects are created
relative to model space, not each other. Changes to one or more objects do not
necessarily affect other objects or the finished model. Examples of explicit
modeling include creating a line between two existing points, or creating an arc
through three existing points. If one of the existing points were moved, the
line/arc would not change.
Parametric Modeling
A parametric model is one in which the values (parameters) used for the
definition of the model are stored with the model for future editing. Parameters
may reference each other to establish relationships between the various
features of the model. Examples include the diameter and depth of a hole, or
the length, width, and height of a rectangular pad. The designer's intent may be
that the hole is always as deep as the pad is high. Linking these parameters
together may achieve the desired results. This is not easily accomplished with
an explicit model.
ConstraintĆbased Modeling
A constraint-based model is one in which the geometry of the model is driven,
or solved, from a set of design rules applied to the geometry defining the model
as constraints. These constraints might be dimensional constraints (such as
sketch dimensions or positioning dimensions) or geometric constraints (such as
parallelism or tangency). Examples include a line tangent to an arc, where the
designer intends for that tangent condition to be maintained even though the
angle of the line may change, or a perpendicular condition being maintained as
angles are modified.
Hybrid Modeling
Hybrid modeling refers to the selectively combined use of the three types of
modeling described above. Hybrid modelers allow designers to use parametric
modeling where needed, without requiring that the entire model be constrained
before proceeding. Because of this, designers have more flexibility in modeling
techniques. The Unigraphics hybrid modeler supports traditional explicit
geometric modeling along with constraintĆbased sketching and parametric
feature modeling. All tools are integrated so they can be used in combination.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
Getting Started ÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉ
Lesson 1
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
PURPOSE This lesson is a fundamental introduction to the Unigraphics

User Interface. Subsequent lessons will reinforce and extend the student's
understanding.
OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Start Unigraphics.
Locate the Cue/Status line.
Execute Menu Bar Pull Down Menus.
Create a New Part File.
Dock and Undock Toolbars.
Open a Part File.
Work with Layers
Copy a Part File.
Close a Part File and Exit Unigraphics.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
1-1
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ Starting Unigraphics

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ Unigraphics
The first step in working in Unigraphics is to log on to a workstation and start a
process. Because this procedure varies from company to company,
and platform to platform, consult the system administrator for a site specific
procedure to follow. The Unigraphics NX Activity Menu shown below will not
be displayed on Windows workstations, and may or may not be displayed at
Unix workstations. It is shown here to describe the options available in case this
is the normal start dialog box at your site.
Unigraphics Site Specific Startup
Unigraphics NX Activity Menu Version
Select xwi" to enable

the display of curve
widths
Select Starbase" to
enable rotatable
shaded images
Select once to start

Unigraphics
EDS Unigraphics NX
1-2 Practical Applications of
Getting Started
Unigraphics Windows ÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉ
No Part ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
The graphic below shows the No Part" Unigraphics interface. This interface
only allows the user to adjust default options, open an existing part or create a
new part in which to work.
Menu bar:Ă Minimize

Use the first mouse button to
select an option from the Help
Internet Explorer &
pullĆdown menu
History
Cue line Status line
EDS
All Rights Reserved
1-3
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ The Gateway Application

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
Upon opening an existing part or creating a new part in Unigraphics the
Gateway application is entered. Gateway allows the review of existing part files
and the ability to get information on those files. To create or edit objects within
a file, one of the other applications such as Modeling must be entered.
Work and Graphics Window

displayed part Restore Down
names
Resource Bars
Graphics area
Cue line: Status line:

displays user Displays informational
prompts messages
EDS Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
Cue/Status line ÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉ
The Cue/Status line appears at the bottom of the main application window. The ÉÉÉ
1
purpose of the Cue line is to prompt for user interaction. The purpose of the
Status line is to give the user feedback about system activity.
ÉÉÉ
NOTE: In a Windows environment the Cue line can be relocated to
the top of the user interface.
Menu bar pull down menus
The Menu Bar offers a number of options from which to choose. These options
have pullĆdown menus associated with them that allow access to areas of
functionality. Holding the first mouse button down over a Menu Bar option
causes the pullĆdown menu to display. Arrows to the right of the pullĆdown
listing indicate that further cascading options are available.
Cascade Menu
Menu Bar
PullĆDown
Menu
EDS
All Rights Reserved
1-5
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ Platform Specific Dialog Box Variance

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
Most interaction with dialog boxes is the same on the Windows platform and
the Unix platform. The appearance of some of the controls is slightly different
as shown in the example below. Notice the variance in the display of the slider
bars, check boxes, option menus, etc..
UNIX Windows 2000
Graphics shown in this text are from a Windows workstation, some of the dialog
boxes at your classroom workstation may differ slightly from those shown.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
Shared Features of Windows File Dialog Boxes ÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉ
The New Part File, Open Part File, and Save Part File As dialog boxes have
some very useful common features.
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
The Look in: option menu shows the name of the current selected drive or
directory. Selecting the arrow on the right side of the box (or anywhere within
the box) will list a hierarchy of the available folders and drives.
Choosing anywhere away from the list of the available folders and drives will
dismiss the listing without selecting another folder or drive.
The list in the window below the Look In: box shows the available folders and
files in the currently selected directory. The folder symbol represents a
subĆdirectory, Unigraphics part files have the .prt extension.
The Up One Level button works with the Look in: option menu to
traverse back up through the directory hierarchy.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
1-7
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ The Create New Folder button allows new subĆfolders to be created in
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
the current directory.
The View Menu pulldown button allows the appearance of the listing in
the window to be modified. The default listing is that of a List. Selecting the
Details button will display a more detailed listing of the files and folders
including Name, Size, Type, last Modified date and time, and any Attributes
that may apply to the file. Other options include; Large Icons, Small Icons and
Thumbnails.
Properties can be
accessed by
selected mouse
button three while
in the Details"
view mode
The ? button at the top right of the dialog box changes the cursor to
and allows selection of any of the controls in the dialog box for a short
description of its function.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
Activity 1 - Creating a New Part file ÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉ
This activity demonstrates how to create a new part file.
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
Step 1 Create a new part file.
Choose the New icon.
The New Part File dialog box appears as shown.
Shaded radio"
button indicates
selected option Current
directory path
and file
extension
Step 2 Specify the units of measure for the new part file.
Choose the Millimeters radio button.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
1-9
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ Step 3 Enter a new part file name.

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
File names are governed by the naming conventions established for the
operating system of the computer. In addition, standards set up by the company
or project will affect naming conventions. Contact the system administrator for
specific information on the number and types of characters for a valid file
name.
With mouse button 1, click in the File name field.
Key in ***_new_1, where *** represent your initials. This

will be a standard practice for this class to insure that the
user at each workstation will be able to save his or her own
part files.
Ensure the directory is set to your home" directory. This

will also be a standard practice for this class. Any part that
you create should be saved in a directory that you have
permissions to.
Choose OK. The system processes the information and the

part file is created and is loaded" into the current
Unigraphics session. On Windows workstations the dialog
box shown below will be displayed while the processing takes
place.
The creator of a file has read and write access, which means they may modify
the file and save the changes.
Step 4 Save the part.
Choose the Save icon.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
Toolbars ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
The Unigraphics user interface supports the use of Toolbars to allow quick
access to most of the available functionality via logical groupings of common ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
functionality displayed as Icons. Each application has a set of toolbars which
support functions within that application. In turn, each application can also
have toolbars and icons displayed which allow access to functions which are
most commonly accessed for the specific application (e.g. Modeling vs.
Drafting)
NOTE: When the Unigraphics session is exited, the state of the

Toolbars is saved, this will be the state displayed when the same user
restarts Unigraphics. This is controlled by the Save layout at exit option
under the General tab in the Preferences→User Interface dialog box.
Toolbars may be in one of two states. The first is undocked where they are free
floating on the screen. The graphic below shows three toolbars in an undocked
state, located randomly by the user on the screen. These toolbars are shown
within the Unigraphics window, but may be located outside the window
depending on screen setup.
Undocked
Toolbars
EDS
All Rights Reserved
1-11
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ The second state that Toolbars may be in is docked, where they anchor to the
ÉÉÉ main Unigraphics window, either horizontally or vertically. The graphic below
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
shows several toolbars. The Standard, View and Layer toolbars are docked
horizontally just below the Menu Bar, while some Modeling application
toolbars are docked vertically on the right and left side of the Unigraphics
window. Docked toolbars are always within the Unigraphics window.
Docked Toolbar (Vertical)
Docked
Toolbars
(Horizontal)
Control of Toolbar display may be accessed from one of 3 places:
Choose Tools"Customize from the main menu.

Choose View"Toolbars from the main menu.
Use the Third Mouse Button within the Unigraphics window, outside the
Graphics window.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
The display of each toolbar, as well as each element of each toolbar, is user
ÉÉÉ
customizable. To turn ON or OFF the display of a toolbar choose
ÉÉÉ
Tools"Customize or click MB3 in the toolbar area and select Customize.
Placing a check in the box next to the toolbar name will instantly display the ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
toolbar in the graphics area.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
1-13
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ To turn ON or OFF the display of a toolbar element choose the Commands tab.
ÉÉÉ Placing a check in the box next to the toolbar command will instantly display
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
the command in the appropriate toolbar. Removing the check turns off the
display.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
Opening Multiple Parts ÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉ
More than one part file may be loaded at any time. This means that several ÉÉÉ
1
parts may be worked on interchangeably. There are two designations for loaded ÉÉÉ
part files:
Displayed - The part file is displayed in the graphics area.

Work - The part file is accessible for creation and editing operations.
In most cases the displayed part and the work part are the same. There are
times when working in an assembly when it is advantageous that the work part
be other than the displayed part.
To Change The Displayed Part
Unigraphics allows multiple part files to be open in the same session. These
parts may have been loaded explicitly or implicitly, as a result of being
referenced by a loaded assembly. The Window option works in two ways:
In the first method, an option for More Parts is selected. This displays the
Change Displayed Part dialog box and lists all parts being referenced in the
current session, excluding the current displayed part. This listing will include all
components in an assembly structure as well as any loaded parts not contained
in a loaded assembly.
In the second method, a list of up to ten previously displayed parts is generated

as the displayed part is changed. This list contains the latest displayed part at
the top (excluding the currently displayed part) and then each previous part in
the order that they were displayed until a total of ten are listed. To change the
displayed part to any of the parts in the list simply select its name from the list.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
1-15
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ Activity 2 - Open an Existing Part File

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
1 This activity will demonstrate working with toolbars to establish an efficient
ÉÉÉ working environment in the Gateway application for this course as well as how
to load an existing part file into the work session.
Continue with the previous part file ***_new_1.
Step 1 Display the Standard toolbar in the Gateway Application.
Click Mouse Button 3 (MB3) in the toolbar area and choose

Customize.
Click MB3 within

toolbar area.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
The Customize Dialog box appears and shows the current toolbars which are
ÉÉÉ
displayed.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
Verify that the Standard toolbar is checked ON.
The Standard toolbar should be displayed on the screen docked in the upper
left corner under the Menu bar.
Choose Close to dismiss the Customize dialog box.
Step 2 Open the part file pau_intro_1.
Choose the Open icon.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
1-17
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ The Open Part File dialog box appears.

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
Check the current directory displayed in the Look in field. If

necessary, choose the proper directory from the option
menu.
Directory List Box Part Preview window

File List Box
EDS Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
Notice that there are no radio buttons for Inches and Millimeters in the Open
ÉÉÉ
Part File dialog box. The units of the file were determined prior to creation and
ÉÉÉ
may not be changed within an active Unigraphics session. A part file's units can
be converted using a program called ug_convert outside of the active ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
Unigraphics session.
Select pau_intro_1 in the file list box and choose OK, which
opens the file (or doubleĆclick on the file name).
Notice the Status Line. It displays useful information as to what the system is
doing while the part file is retrieved, as well as other information pertaining to
the operation being performed.
Choose OK in the Warning dialog box to dismiss the Read

Only message.
Once the part is open the following actions occur:
Options for viewing the contents of the file are available on the menu bar.
The graphics area is now active, showing the model in the condition in
which it was last saved.
The title bar of the Unigraphics window displays the current work part in
brackets [pau_intro_1.prt] and that its status is Read Only, meaning that
changes may not be saved in this file.
It is important to keep in mind that a loaded part file is only a copy of what is
stored on disk. Any new work that you do is not permanent until the part file is
saved on disk.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
1-19
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ Step 3 Display the View, Selection and Utility toolbars.

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
Click MB3 in the toolbar area and verify the View, Selection
and Utility toolbars are checked ON.
The toolbars are displayed on the screen in an Docked state. Remember that
toolbars may be docked horizontally on the top or bottom and vertically on the
left or right. Locate the toolbars.
View
Selection
Utility
NOTE: Icons may vary for each

toolbar
Step 4 Undock and Dock the Utility toolbar.
NOTE: This portion of the activity is simply meant to show how

to undock and dock toolbars. Whether toolbars are in docked or
undocked conditions the process for moving them is very similar.
Place the cursor on the handle portion of the Utility toolbar

and press and hold down mouse button 1 (MB1).
Select on the
Handle
EDS Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
Drag the toolbar onto the graphics window, note that the
ÉÉÉ
ghosted display of the outside of the window changes in size.
ÉÉÉ
Release MB1.
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
Notice the toolbar in an undocked condition displays a header with the name
of the toolbar.
Place the cursor on the header portion of the Utility toolbar

and press and hold down MB1.
Select Here
Drag the toolbar such that the header portion falls within the
main menu bar as shown below, note that the ghosted display
of the outside of the window changes in size as the cursor
leaves the graphics window.
Locate Here
Release MB1.
The Utility toolbar is docked to the Unigraphics window.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
1-21
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ Step 5 Move a docked toolbar.

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
Place the cursor on the handle portion of the Utility toolbar
and press and hold down MB1.
Select Here
Drag the toolbar such that it is aligned under the Standard

toolbar completely to the left side of the window.
Release MB1.
The Utility toolbar remains docked to the Unigraphics window in the proper
position.
Select the View toolbar on the handle and drag the toolbar
such that it is aligned to the right of the Standard toolbar.
Locate Here
EDS Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
Select the Selection toolbar on the handle and drag the

ÉÉÉ
toolbar such that it is aligned to the right of the Utility
ÉÉÉ
toolbar.
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
Locate Here
Step 6 Leave the part open, it will be used again in a later

activity.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
1-23
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ Mouse Navigation

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
The mouse may be used as well as the keyboard to make selections. Examples
of two different mouse devices are shown. The mouse buttons are referred to as
the first, second, or third mouse buttons, starting from left to right. (This order
can be reversed, for users who prefer that orientation, in most terminal control
panels.)
3-BUTTON MOUSE 2-BUTTON MOUSE
Both buttons
together execute
1 2 3 1 3 the second
mouse button
action
The mouse may be used to perform various actions as shown in this chart.
Mouse Button Action

First Mouse Button (left Selects or drags objects
only) MB1
Second Mouse Button (center OK while in an operation. Press and hold
or both buttons) MB2 down while in the graphics area to Rotate the
view. Hold down Shift+MB2 to Pan and hold
down Ctrl+MB2 to Zoom In/Out.
Third Mouse Button in Displays popĆup menu for Back, Apply,
graphics area MB3 Cancel, Pan, etc. Also displays action
information for objects selected with MB1.
Mouse arrow over icons or Displays either the icon or option label.
option menu in a dialog box
EDS Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
Mouse PopĆup Menu ÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉ
As mentioned in the previous chart, the mouse may be used to perform various
kinds of actions depending upon placement and position in the steps of the
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
process. When the cursor is in the graphics area and the third mouse button is
depressed, the Quick View PopĆUp menu shown in the graphic below is
displayed. The popĆup menu provides a shortcut to many of the functions that
are frequently used in Unigraphics.
NOTE: The View toolbar may also be used to perform many of the
view manipulation functions found in the View Pop-Up Menu.
Refresh Zoom Rotate Wireframe Wireframe

Fit Zoom Pan Shaded View
In/Out Settings
Settings Orientation
EDS
All Rights Reserved
1-25
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ The following table gives a brief summary of some of the options in the popĆup
ÉÉÉ menu.
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ Option Description
Apply Performs operation displayed in the current dialog box.
Back Goes back to a previous dialog box.
Cancel Terminates the current operation.
Refresh Refreshes the entire graphics window. Erases temporary
display entities.
Fit Fits the entire part to the view. Utilizes the fit percentage
found on the Preferences→Visualization→Screen dialog
box. Generally used in a modeling view.
Zoom Changes the view scale via a user specified rectangle.
Zoom In/Out Changes the view scale via specification of a reference
point and dragging the size using the mouse.
Rotate Rotates the model using the XĆY method.
Pan Pans the view in the direction you pull the mouse.
Update Display Performs a Refresh operation as well as redisplaying
silhouette curves of faces and hidden edges of solids.
Restore Restores the original view that was in effect before one of
the following operations was performed: zoom, pan, rotate.
Display Mode Specifies the shading method in which the solid model is
displayed.
Hidden Edges Specifies the method of display of hidden edges in the
graphics window.
Expand Expands a drawing's member view to the full graphics area.
This is a toggle. The affected view becomes the work view
and remains the work view until the expand is turned off.
Orient View Redisplays the current view in a canned view orientation.
The original visualization settings and view modifications
are retained. Active only in a modeling view.
Replace View Replaces the current view with one of the canned views.
Active only in a modeling view.
Undo Reverses the effect of the last single operation performed.
Any operation or edit performed prior to the last one will
not be affected by undo.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
Selection Toolbar ÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉ
The selection toolbar may be used anytime the selection of an object for
modification or the extraction of data is required. There are three major
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
categories of objects that a user may focus on: General Objects, Features, and
Components.
Components
General
Objects Features
EDS
All Rights Reserved
1-27
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ Depending on which category the user has selected, the Type Filter may be used
ÉÉÉ to narrow the band of selectable objects.
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
General
Objects
Features
Components
The remaining options of the toolbar may be used to further discriminate in the
selection of objects.
Deselect All
Color
Layer Reset
Class
Selection Select All Name Selection
Once an object has been selected, mouse button 3 (MB3) may be used to select
an available operator for that object.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
NOTE: When depressing MB3 the cursor must be on top of the

ÉÉÉ
selected object for the shown pop-up dialogs to appear.
ÉÉÉ
General Objects Components Operations
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
Operations
Features Operations
NOTE: Options may vary based upon application and object selected.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
1-29
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ Preselection
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
Preselection allows highlighting of objects that are selectable for various
operations as the selection ball is moved over them. Preselection by default is
ON in Unigraphics. Preselection may be controlled by choosing
Preferences"Selection from the menu bar. The color of the highlighting is
specified in the Color option menu. Preselection also applies to highlighting
objects that are being deselected, usually through use of <Shift> first mouse
button. The state of the Preselection setting is not saved with the part, and lasts
only through the current session.
Multiple Selection Candidates
During the graphics area selection process it is common to have more than one
selectable object contained in the selection ball. QuickPick is a selection
confirmation interface that allows immediate selection of a single object or an
easy method for browsing through multiple selection candidates.
During selection the act of moving the selection ball over a selectable object
causes the object to preĆhighlight in the preselection color. Selecting during this
preĆhighlighting phase causes the highlighted object to be chosen for the action
to be performed.
Should there be more than one selectable object at the selection ball location
and the cursor lingers for a short period of time, the appearance of the cursor
changes to a cross followed by an ellipsis (+...) indicating that there is more
than one selectable object at this position. Selection after the cursor changes
display will result in the presentation of the QuickPick dialog box shown below.
NOTE: The amount of time the cursor must be stationary for the
ellipsis (+...) to appear can be adjusted by choosing
Preferences"Selection and adjusting the Confirmation slider.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
Each selectable object beneath the cursor is represented by a number. Moving

ÉÉÉ
the cursor over the number highlights the object in the graphics area and
ÉÉÉ
displays the type of object in the Status area. The desired object may be
selected by selecting its numbered button. The maximum number of buttons ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
displayed at once is six. As shown in the previous graphic, when there are more
than six objects in the selection list, the end button is shown truncated. Placing
the cursor in the area outside the truncation causes the buttons to scroll in the
direction indicated.
NOTE: When the Quick Pick dialog box is presented upon selection
of an object, Mouse Button 1 can also be used anywhere on the graphics
screen to progress through the multiple candidates. This will also
progress the highlighted number in the Quick Pick dialog box and give
feedback in the Status line displaying the type of object being
highlighted.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
1-31
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ Layer Control

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
Unigraphics offers users the control of visibility and selectability of objects by
the use of layers.
A layer is a systemĆdefined attribute that all objects in Unigraphics must have.

Some other required attributes are color, font, and width.
A layer may be thought of as a partition in the part file that objects reside in, or
on for the purpose of organization. There are 256 usable layers in Unigraphics,
one of which is always the Work Layer. Any of the 256 layers can be assigned to
one of four classifications of status:
Work
Selectable
Visible Only
Invisible
The Work Layer is the layer that objects are created on and is always visible
and selectable while it remains the Work Layer. Layer 1 is the default Work
Layer when starting a new part file. When the Work Layer is changed to
another, the previous Work Layer automatically becomes Selectable and could
then be assigned a status of Visible Only or Invisible.
The number of objects on one layer is not limited. Each user has the freedom to
choose which layers they will create objects on and what the status will be.
However, it should be mentioned that the use of company standards in regards
to layers would be beneficial.
To assign a status to a layer or layers, choose Format→Layer Settings or select

the Layer Settings icon, which may be turned ON in the Utility toolbar as
shown below.
Work Layer can also

be changed here Layer Settings
EDS Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
The following dialog box appears:

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
Work Layer
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
Text Box
Select a layer from the Layer/Status listing and choose one of the four buttons
below the listing.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
1-33
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ Layers and Categories

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
The following layer and category standards will be followed in this class.
Model Geometry
Object Type Layer Assignment Category Name

Solid Geometry 1-20 SOLIDS
InterĆpart Modeling 15-20 LINKED_OBJECTS
Sketch Geometry 21-40 SKETCHES
Curve Geometry 41-60 CURVES
Reference Geometry 61-80 DATUMS
Sheet Bodies 81-100 SHEETS
Drafting Objects

Drawing Borders 101-110 FORMATS
Engineering Disciplines

Mechanism Tools 121-130 MECH
Finite Element Meshes 131-150 CAE
and Engr. Tools
Manufacturing 151-180 MFG
Quality Tools 181-190 QA
EDS Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
Moving Layers
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
In the process of creating a model, there are times when it is necessary to move
an object to a different layer. This option is available using Format→Move to
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
Layer. The objects which need to be moved are then selected using the Class
Selection menu. Once all of the objects to be moved are selected, the Layer
Move dialog box appears.
To complete the process, the destination layer may be entered in the

Destination Layer or Category field, or the layer may be selected from the list.
Choose OK or Apply to move the object(s). If Apply is chosen, more objects
may be selected to move by choosing the Select New Objects button.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
1-35
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ Class Selection

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
The Class Selection dialog box is used to filter for certain types of objects
during graphics area selection. Normally direct selection using the selection ball
in the graphics area is enough to get the desired object. There are times when
filtering using the Class Selection options is necessary or very helpful to ensure
that only desired object/types are selected. This often occurs in complex parts.
Name filter
Filter methods
Area filters
EDS Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
Class Selection Filter Types ÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉ
The Name filter allows selection by object(s) by entering an assigned
name attribute. ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
Filter Methods allows control of the selection of objects according to
attributes such as features, type, color, and layer.
Features allows features (e.g. block, hole, datum, sketch) to be
selected for various operations (e.g. delete or information). Once this
option has been selected and features have been identified, choosing
OK will perform the operation which introduced the Class Selection
dialog. This option is not available for all operations (e.g. edit object
display and Move to Layer).
Type allows the object types (e.g. curve, edge, body, datums) to be
included or excluded from the selection process.
Color allows objects to be included or excluded from the selection
process based on their color. All colors are initially selectable as the
default.
Layer is used to specify the layer(s) on which to allow selection. Valid
layer selection may include a single layer, an existing category, or a
layer range.
Other is used to filter for font (line type), width, and userĆdefined
attributes.
Reset is used to return all fields to the default state.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
1-37
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ Rectangle/Polygon Method is an option menu used to specify how objects

ÉÉÉ are selected relative to an area defined by a rectangle or a polygon as
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
discussed below. The rectangle or polygon is oriented in the current view
plane and may be used in any view. A rectangle may be used by selecting
a cursor location and dragging the cursor to another cursor location. The
Polygon button must be selected prior to specifying the boundary with
rubberĆbanding line segments in the graphics area.
Inside - Objects completely inside the rectangle/polygon are selected.
Outside -Objects completely outside the rectangle/polygon are
selected.
Crossing - Objects crossing the boundary of the rectangle/polygon are
selected.
Inside/Crossing - All objects inside the rectangle/polygon as well as
those crossing the boundary of the rectangle/polygon. This is the
default method.
Outside/Crossing - All objects outside the rectangle/polygon as well
as those crossing the boundary of the rectangle/polygon.
Up One Level allows selection of the next level component or group if
components or groups are enabled for that operation. This is useful in
assemblies work.
Select All selects all objects in the work view by current filter methods
settings.
All but Selected selects all objects in the work view except for those
currently highlighted by selection.
Chain allows the selection of a sequence of contiguous curves or solid
edges.
Polygon allows the selection of objects using a polygon that is specified in
the graphics area. (See Rectangle/Polygon Method above.)
EDS Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
Activity 3 - Save Part As (Copying a Part File) ÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉ
This activity shows how to make a copy of an existing part file by saving it using
a different name. ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
Continue with the previous part file pau_intro_1.
Step 1 Create a copy of a part file.
Choose File→Save As...
The Save Part File As dialog box appears.
Directory where part is Up One Level

to be saved
Enter new
filename
here
Step 2 Save a copy of the file in the desired directory.
In the Save Part File As dialog, use the Save in: option menu
to navigate to the proper directory to save the part file.
(HINT: should be one level up from the parts folder)
Step 3 Enter a new part file name.
Click in the File name field.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
1-39
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ Key in ***_intro_1 as the new part file name where ***
ÉÉÉ represent your initials.
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
Type filename
here
Choose OK.
The Status Line states that the part file is being saved. When the save is
complete, the message Part file saved" displays. Work in Unigraphics may be
resumed.
Step 4 Save the work.
Choose the Save icon.
Once again, Unigraphics informs you in the Status Line that it is saving the
part file. When the save is complete, the message Part file saved" is displayed.
TIP You can save your work and exit Unigraphics all at once by choosing
File"Close"Save All and Exit.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
Activity 4 - Closing Part Files and Exiting Unigraphics ÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉ
This activity shows how to close a part file and exit Unigraphics.
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
Continue with the previous part file ***_intro_1.
Use File→Close→Selected Parts to close one or more of the loaded parts. Close
All may be used to close all parts loaded in the current session from the Close
Part dialog box.
Step 1 Close the part file.
Choose File→Close→Selected Parts.
The Close Part dialog box appears showing a list of all open part files, which
currently are ***_intro_1 and ***_new_1 part files.
***_intro_1
List of open ***_new_1
part files
Select the ***_intro_1 part file and choose MB2.
Since the part was not changed since it was last saved, it is immediately closed.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
1-41
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ If the part had been changed, the system displays a warning message letting you
ÉÉÉ know that the part has been modified since it was last saved.
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
***_intro_1
Closing the part file does not save the part, it only clears the part file from the
local memory in the workstation. Changes that have been made to the part file
will be lost if the close operation is continued.
Step 2 Learn how to end the Unigraphics work session.
Choose File→Exit. A dialog box displays.
If part file(s) are still open and have been modified, a message displays:
To end Unigraphics, from either Exit message window, you would choose OK.
Choose Cancel to dismiss the message and keep the session

open. Do not Exit Unigraphics at this time.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
Activity 5 - Establish Toolbar Environment in Modeling ÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉ
This activity will establish an efficient toolbar working environment in the
Modeling application for this course. Other toolbars can be added as needed. ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
Step 1 Change the displayed part to ***_new_1 (HINT: Window
from the menu bar)
Step 2 Display the Application toolbar in the Gateway

Application.
Click MB3 in the toolbar area and check ON the Application

toolbar.
Click MB3 within

toolbar area.
Locate the Application toolbar in the Unigraphics window, it may be docked or

undocked.
NOTE: Icons may vary.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
1-43
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ Step 3 Customize the Application toolbar.

ÉÉÉ Click MB3 in the toolbar area and choose Customize.
ÉÉÉ

1
ÉÉÉ
Select the Commands tab and highlight Application in the

Toolbars column.
Select these
options
A listing with the commands for the Application toolbar is displayed. The
commands displayed on the toolbar are checked in the Commands column.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
Scroll down to see all of the options in the Commands

ÉÉÉ
column. Turn ON the Modeling, Drafting and Assemblies
ÉÉÉ
commands and turn OFF all others options. Also, turn ON
the Separator above the Assemblies command. ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
Scroll
down
here
Note that the display of the toolbar changes immediately upon selection of
commands.
Locate the Application toolbar as shown below.
Locate here
These toolbar settings will be retained for the Gateway application for the rest
of the course.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
1-45
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ Step 4 Enter the Modeling Application.

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ Select the Modeling icon in the Application toolbar.
Entering a different application will introduce a new set of toolbars. The

toolbars that were established in the Gateway application may move and have
different commands in them.
Step 5 Display the common toolbars from the Gateway

application.
Click MB3 in the toolbar area and verify that the Standard,
View, Selection, Utility and Application toolbars are checked
ON. Turn OFF all other toolbars. Other toolbars will be
turned ON throughout the course as they are needed.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
Dock the toolbars in similar locations as defined in the

ÉÉÉ
Gateway application.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
Step 6 Customize the toolbars.
Click MB3 in the toolbar area and choose Customize.
Select the Commands tab and adjust the toolbars to match

the commands in the table below.
Toolbars Standard View Selection Utility Application

New Refresh Select Work Drafting
General Layer
Objects
Open Fit Select Layer Assemblies
Features Settings
Save Zoom Select Separator Gateway
Components
Separator Zoom Separator WCS
In/Out Dynamics
Commands Delete Rotate Type Filter Orient
Undo Pan Reset WCS
Separator Separator Separator
Information Wireframe Select All
Settings
Shaded Deselect All
Settings
Wireframe Separator
View Up One
Orientation Level
Step 7 Close the part file, do not save.
Choose File"Close"All Parts.
Choose OK in the Question window.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
1-47
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
1
ÉÉÉ
SUMMARY
In this lesson you:

Started Unigraphics and were made aware
that the user interface appearance may be
slightly different on UNIX and NT
platforms.
Executed Menu Bar Pull Down Menus and
saw how these tools can save time.
Created, retrieved, and saved parts. By
performing these functions you were made
aware of that parts are only loaded into
memory and are not saved until performing
a save" or save as" operation.
Copied a Part File.
Closed a Part File.
Were introduced to the layer system in
Unigraphics, and saw how this convention
aids in part file organization.
Exited Unigraphics.
Activated toolbars and adjusted the
commands within them.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Solid Modeling

Lesson 2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
PURPOSE This lesson is a fundamental introduction to the Unigraphics
Modeling application. Subsequent lessons will reinforce and extend the
student's understanding.
Define the Absolute Coordinate System (ABS).

Define the Work Coordinate System (WCS).
Manipulate the WCS.
Define Points for Locations.
Create and Edit a Primitive Block.
Create a direction vector.
Create a primitive cylinder.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
2-1
Coordinate Systems in Unigraphics
Before any portions of the solid model may be defined, it is important to

understand the options Unigraphics offers for location and orientation of
objects. Since solid modeling takes place in a 3Ćdimensional environment,
model space is defined as the infinite extension of a 3Ćdimensional field
represented in the views of your graphics area.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Start here and go
this direction."
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
There are many coordinate systems in Unigraphics, all are rightĆhand,
Cartesian coordinate systems, made up of a set of X, Y, and Z axes, 90° apart
from each other.
A threeĆaxis symbol is used to identify a coordinate system. The intersection of

the axes is called the origin of the coordinate system. The origin has the
coordinate values of X=0, Y=0, and Z=0. The figure below illustrates that,
starting at the origin, each axis has a positive direction and a negative direction.
+Z
-X
+Y
-Y +X
-Z Origin
This manual will primarily discuss the following different coordinate system
types used in Unigraphics modeling.
Absolute Coordinate System (ABS)

Work Coordinate System (WCS)
Feature Coordinate System (Discussed in Form Features Lesson)
EDS Unigraphics NX
Absolute Coordinate System
The Absolute Coordinate System (ABS) is not mobile. It defines a fixed point
and orientation in model space. The Absolute Coordinate System is necessary
to relate location or orientation between any two objects, solid models,
Unigraphics part files, or even a Unigraphics part file to any other CAE
system. An object positioned at Absolute X= 1, Y=1, and Z=1 in one part file
is the exact same absolute position in any other part file.
Work Coordinate System

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Since the ABS is not mobile, Unigraphics uses the Work Coordinate System
(WCS) to establish a mobile coordinate system to facilitate geometry
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
construction in different orientations. The WCS can be located and oriented
manually anywhere in model space. The WCS is not a selectable entity.
Most solid modeling operations in Unigraphics do not require manipulation of

the WCS, since features are added to a model relative to existing geometry of
the model, not relative to positions and directions in model space. In those
cases, the WCS is handled automatically by Unigraphics. However, certain
functions are dependent on the WCS, and require the WCS to be positioned
prior to performing the operation. Curve and Primitive creation are two
functions dependent on the WCS.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
2-3
Manipulating the WCS

The WCS options are accessed by choosing WCS on the menu bar or from the
Utility toolbar (a part file must be displayed).
In general, there are four ways to manipulate the WCS. They are origin,
rotation, orientation and dynamics. WCS Dynamics will be the focus in this
lesson.
WCS Dynamics: Provides a dynamic interface to control the location and
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
orientation of the WCS by entering values or dragging handles of the WCS in
the graphics screen.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
After choosing WCS Dynamics, the WCS displays with handles. The Point
Constructor icon also appears in the upper left hand corner of the graphics
window.
Handles
Point
Constructor
NOTE: WCS Dynamics may also be accessed by double-clicking

directly on the WCS on the graphics screen. When the cursor is
placed directly over the WCS there will be a temporary display of
rotation planes shown to indicate that the WCS can be directly
selected. If there is another object coincident with the WCS the
temporary display of rotation planes may not appear. In cases where
the WCS cannot be double-clicked, WCS Dynamics can be accessed
from the Menu bar or the Utility toolbar (as shown below).
WCS Dynamics
EDS Unigraphics NX
Dynamic WCS Handles
Vertex Handle: If the square handle is selected the WCS can be relocated to any
point on the graphics screen (e.g. control point, cursor position, arc center, etc.)
and help indicators will display next to an object to help you predict where the
WCS will relocate to.
The Point Constructor option is also available on the graphics window to

position the WCS, when selected this option will bring the Point Constructor
dialog box up. This handle will also allow the coordinate system to be dragged
in any direction. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Vertex
Handle
EDS
All Rights Reserved
2-5
Defining Points for Location
To determine the location of the WCS, Primitives or any other geometry, the
definition of specific points in space is necessary, and is a common function in
any CAE system. Unigraphics offers a standard dialog box that provides
multiple point methods to define location. Using the Point Constructor dialog
box, you can define origin points, start points, endpoints, etc. based on existing
geometry or coordinate values.
ÏÏÏ
Existing Point End Point
Control Point
ÏÏÏ
Cursor Location
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Inferred Point
Intersection Point
Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Point on Surface

Center
Angle on
Arc/Ellipse Point on Curve/Edge
Quadrant Point
None
Rectangular
Cylindrical
Restores Base Spherical
Point values Vector
to zero and
Along Curve
Offset to none
NOTE: For more information on Point types, see Appendix B.
Axis Handle: If one of the three axis handles is selected a Dynamic Input Field
appears on the graphics window next to the WCS, which allows input of specific
distances or snap increments. This handle will also allow the coordinate system
to be dragged along its axis.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Rotation Handle: If one of the three rotation handles is selected a Dynamic

Input Field also appears next to the WCS, which allows input of specific angles
or snap increments. This handle will also allow the coordinate system to be
rotated about the axis.
Rotation
Handle
Axis
Dynamic
Input Field ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Handle
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Distance/Angle: When the Dynamic Input Field appears next to the WCS the
Distance/Angle fields display the offset distance or rotation that results from a
dragging operation. You can also use these fields to directly enter a distance or
rotation angle.
Snap (Angle/Distance): Using a Rotation handle, you can snap the WCS 45
degrees when you rotate within the Snap (angle) tolerance. The default value
for a tolerance is 45°, but you can change the Snap field to adjust the tolerance.
For example, if the Snap (angle) tolerance is set to 5° and you rotate the WCS
anywhere between 40 and 50° from its original position, it will snap to 45°. The
Angle field will update to the angle moved as the handle is dragged.
Using an Axis handle, you can snap the WCS incremental distances when you
drag the handle. The default value for a Snap (distance) is 0 (zero), but you can
change the Snap field to adjust the tolerance. The Distance field will update to
the distance moved as the handle is dragged.
Finished Moving: Use the middle mouse button (MB2) to confirm the location
or orientation of the WCS and exit WCS Dynamics.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
2-7
NOTE: Undo is available and can be used during WCS movement to

restore the WCS to a previous location or orientation.
Utility Toolbar
The WCS options may also be accessed through the Utility toolbar.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Display
Orient
WCS WCS
WCS Save
Dynamics WCS
EDS Unigraphics NX
Orient WCS: Allows the location and the rotation of the WCS to be altered in
one step. The menu shown below contains the various options to accomplish
WCS orientation.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Before After
XĆaxis
Using the XĆaxis, YĆaxis
option to change origin YĆaxis
and rotation in the same
step.
NOTE: The Orient option is commonly used to move the WCS back
to the Absolute origin and orientation.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
2-9
Activity 1 - Manipulating the WCS

In this activity, the WCS will be moved to different positions on a model. By
default, the WCS location and orientation in a new part file coincides with the
Absolute Coordinate System. During model construction, Unigraphics usually
manages the WCS automatically. However, some construction and Info
functions depend on the WCS, so it is helpful to learn how to manipulate the
WCS.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Step 1 Open part file pau_wcs_1 and start the Modeling
Application.
Step 2 Change the Work Coordinate System origin.
Choose the WCS Dynamics icon from the Utility

toolbar.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Select the various points shown. Do not select any of the

WCS handles.
Select this elliptical edge

(Quadrant Pt. or Ellipse Ctr.)
Select here
(End Pt.)
Select this circular edge

(Quadrant Pt. or Arc Ctr.)
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Select this elliptical edge

(Quadrant Pt. or Ellipse Ctr.) Select here
(End Pt.)
Select here
(End Pt.)
The vertex is selected by default when entering WCS Dynamics, therefore you
can simply pick points in the graphics window to move the WCS. The relocated
WCS has the same XC, YC, ZC directions as the prior WCS location.
Choose MB2 when finished moving the WCS to exit WCS

Dynamics.
Step 3 Change the direction of the Work Coordinate System

axes.
Choose the WCS Dynamics icon.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
2-11
Move the WCS to the arc center shown below.
Select this circular

edge when the
center is high
lighted.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Select the Rotation Handle shown below.
Select this
handle
The Dynamic Input Field appears allowing an angle or snap (angle) to be

entered.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Enter -905 in the Angle text entry field and press Enter.
Before After
The origin of the WCS is

unchanged, the coordinate
system is rotated about the
XC axis, from the ZC axis
toward the YC axis 90
The direction of rotation is based on the Right Hand Rule. ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
2
Choose MB2 when finished rotating the WCS. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Step 4 Change the orientation of the WCS.
The image below has be rotated for clarity. Feel free to shade and rotate the
view for better viewing of the part.
Choose the WCS Dynamics icon.
Move the WCS to the location shown below.
Select this
corner
EDS
All Rights Reserved
2-13
Select the XC Axis Handle as shown below.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Select this
Handle
Orient the XC Axis Handle to the edge shown below.
Arrow should
point in this
direction
Select
here
EDS Unigraphics NX
Select the YC Axis Handle.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Select this
Handle
Orient the YC Axis Handle to the edge shown below.
Arrow should
point in this
direction
Select
here
Choose MB2 when finished orienting the WCS.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
2-15
Step 5 Move the WCS back to the Absolute CSYS.

Choose the Orient WCS icon as shown below.
Orient WCS
The following menu appears, listing the various ways to specify a new location
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
and orientation for the WCS.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose the Absolute CSYS icon.
Choose OK.
Step 6 Choose File"Close"All Parts and choose OK in the

Question dialog.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Primitives
A Primitive is a solid object that is analytic in nature. A Primitive may be

thought of as raw stock", to which material will be added or removed to
achieve the finished part. There are multiple ways of defining each of the four
Primitive types. Primitives may be used as the basic shape at the start of the
solid modeling process. Using one of the Primitive types as the base feature
eliminates the need to create and sweep curve geometry.
When a Primitive is created, its type and its size must be specified as well as its
location and orientation in model space. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
The four types of Primitives are: ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Block
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
NOTE: Although Unigraphics continues to allow the use of multiple

Primitives in one solid body, the practice is not recommended because of
the advantages and associativity of other solid modeling functionality. If a
Primitive is used in a part file, the Primitive should be used as the initial
solid feature.
NOTE: Primitives are positioned explicitly. Their origins are set by a

specified point in model space. However, they can be moved manually by
either Transforming or, preferably, using Move Feature. A primitive's
creation parameter values may be edited and made associative to each
other.
This lesson will concentrate on the Block feature. Another type of Primitive will
be discussed later.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
2-17
Block
A Primitive block may be created by specifying the size and location of the
block in model space. The orientation will be implied from the orientation of
the WCS.
There are three different methods that may be used to create a block. The
middle portion of the dialog and the Selection Steps change depending on the
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
type of block creation method you choose. This manual will discuss the first
method, Origin, Edge Lengths.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Two Points, Height
Two Diagonal Points
Origin, Edge Lengths
EDS Unigraphics NX
Origin, Edge Lengths Method
Choose the Block icon. (Insert→Form Feature→Block)

Choose the creation method of Origin, Edge Lengths
Define the length for each edge.
Define the Point Method for the corner's origin.
NOTE: When no solid exists, no selection will place the corner at ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Absolute 0,0,0.
The corner used for the origin is the vertex of the edges used to
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
define the size of the block.
Choose the desired boolean operation
(Although Unigraphics continues to allow the use of multiple Primitives

in one solid body, the practice is not recommended because of the
advantages and associativity of other solid modeling functionality. If a
Primitive is used in a part file, the Primitive should be used as the initial
solid feature.).
NOTE: All of the X, Y, and Z values of the edge lengths are

measured relative to the WCS, and must be positive values since
they are used as the length, width, and height parameters of the
block.
Choose OK or Apply.
Once the block has been created, its size may be changed by editing the values
that were used for edge lengths during creation.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
2-19
Activity 2 - Additional Toolbars in Modeling Application

This activity will establish additional toolbars in the Modeling application for
this lesson and future lessons.
Step 1 Create a new inch part file and name it ***_prim_exp_1
and choose the Modeling icon.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2 Step 2 Display additional toolbars in the Modeling application.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Click MB3 in the toolbar area and turn ON the Form
Feature, Feature Operation, Edit Feature and Modeling
Toggles toolbars.
Form Feature
Feature Operation
Edit Feature
Modeling Toggles
NOTE: Icons may vary for each

toolbar
EDS Unigraphics NX
Dock the toolbars horizontally or vertically in the locations

defined below.
Modeling
Feature Edit Feature Toggles
Operation
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Form
Feature
Step 3 Customize the toolbars.
Click MB3 in the toolbar area and choose Customize.
Select the Commands tab and adjust the toolbars to match

the commands in the following table.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
2-21
Toolbars Form Feature Edit Modeling

Feature Operation Feature Toggles
Form
Edit Feature
Sketch Taper Feature
Parameters
Toolbar
Feature
Edit
Extruded Body Edge Blend Operation
Positioning
Toolbar
Edit
Revolved Body Edge Chamfer Move Feature Feature
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Toolbar
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Sweep along
Guide
Hollow Separator
Instance Suppress
Separator
Feature Feature
Hole Unsuppress
Offset Face
Feature
Commands Boss Separator Separator
Delay Update
Pocket Unite
on Edit
Pad Subtract Update
Slot Intersect Separator
Feature
Groove
Playback
Separator
Datum Plane
Datum Axis
Datum CSYS
Separator
Block
Cylinder
Step 4 Continue to the next activity.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Activity 3 - Creating a Primitive Block

In this activity, a Primitive Block will be created using the Origin, Edge Lengths
method. Only numerical values will be used for the size of the block.
Continue with the previous part file ***_prim_exp_1.
Step 1 Orient the WCS.
Choose the Trimetric icon from the View toolbar.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ

Place the cursor over the WCS and double-click on it to ÏÏÏ

enter WCS Dynamics.
Select the YC-ZC Rotation Handle and drag the WCS to to

orientation shown below.
Select this
handle
Choose MB2 when finished rotating the WCS.
Step 2 Create a Block.
Choose the Block icon.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
2-23
If necessary, choose the Origin, Edge Lengths icon.
Key in the following parameters:
Length (XC) = 8 (Tab)
Length (YC) = 6 (Tab)
Length (ZC) = 6/2 (an example of algebraic entry)

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2 Choose MB2.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose the Fit icon from the View toolbar.
Step 3 Move the WCS back to the Absolute CSYS orientation.
Choose Orient WCS icon .
Choose the Absolute CSYS icon.
Choose MB2.
Notice the WCS rotated back to the absolute orientation but the block stays in
the same orientation. The WCS is only referenced when creating primitives and
is not created associative to it.
Step 4 Change the size of the block.
Ensure the Select Features icon is ON in the

Selection toolbar.
Place the cursor over the block an double-click on it to

enter Edit Parameters.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Select the parameter shown below to edit.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Select this
parameter
Change the parameter value to 4 and choose MB2 twice.
Step 5 Choose File"Close"Save and Close.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
2-25
Defining Vectors
Some of the primitives require a direction vector to define in what direction the
primitive will be created. The direction, reference, and destination vectors may
be defined using the Vector Constructor dialog box shown below.
At Angle Edge/Curve
Vector
Between Two
Points On Curve
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Inferred
Vector
Vector
Face
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Normal
Datum Plane
Normal ZC Axis
Datum Axis
YC Axis
XC Axis
NOTE: The XC, YC, and ZC Axis options are sufficient for the
purpose of this course.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Cylinder
A Primitive cylinder may be created by specifying the orientation, size and
location of the cylinder. The methods to create cylinders are shown in the next
figure.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Diameter, Height Method
This method is used to create a cylinder by specifying the diameter and height
values. The location and axis direction vector must also be specified. After
choosing this method:
Define the cylinder axis vector using the Vector Constructor.
Enter the diameter and height.
Define the cylinder origin using the Point Constructor.
In the example below, the direction vector is the ZC Axis. The origin is shown
with the cylinder being created at the specified height in the direction of the
vector.
Direction vector
Origin
ZC
YC
XC
EDS
All Rights Reserved
2-27
Activity 1 - Creating a Primitive Cylinder

In this activity, a primitive cylinder will be created utilizing the direction vector
menu.
Step 1 Open the part pau_seedpart_mm.
Step 2 Choose Modeling.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Step 3 Create the Cylinder.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Choose the Cylinder icon.
Choose the Diameter, Height method.
Choose the YC Axis direction icon from the Vector

Constructor.
Choose OK.
Enter the following Values:
Diameter = 75
Height = 200
Choose OK.
Locate the cylinder at XC=0, YC=0, ZC=0. Choose Reset in

the Point Constructor menu if needed and choose OK.
Choose Cancel.
Choose Fit from the third mouse button PopĆUp Menu.
ZC
YC
XC
EDS Unigraphics NX
Step 4 Edit the size of the cylinder.
Place the cursor over the cylinder and double-click on it to

enter Edit Parameters.
Choose Feature Dialog.
Change the values as follows:
Diameter = 15
Height = 150
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Choose MB2 twice. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose File"Close"All Parts, do not save the part.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
2-29
SUMMARY
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
In this lesson you:
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Were taught that the Absolute Coordinate
System is a stationary coordinate system that
defines a fixed point in model space.
Were taught that the Work Coordinate
System is a mobile coordinate system that
may be moved and reoriented as necessary
to support other Unigraphics functions.
Relocated, rotated, and reoriented the WCS.
Created a Block. You were also taught that if
using a Primitive feature, it should be the
base feature and that Primitives should be
limited to one in a part file because they
cannot be associatively positioned.
Changed the size of a Primitive after
creation.
Created a Primitive Cylinder.
Edited a Primitive Cylinder
Reviewed the Vector Constructor dialog.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Form Features
Lesson 3
PURPOSE To introduce Form Features.
Create Boss, Pocket, Hole, and Slot Form Features.

ÏÏÏ
Position Boss, Pocket, Hole, and Slot Form Features . ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ

3
Create a Rectangular Pad.
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
3-1
Form Features
Form Features
Form features are used to add detail to the model during creation. These
features include holes, slots, bosses, pads, pockets and grooves. Form features
are fully associative to the geometry and parameter values used to create them.
The Placement Face
ÏÏÏ All form features require a placement face. For a groove, the placement face
ÏÏÏ must be cylindrical or conical. For all other form features, the placement face
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
must be planar. This planar placement face defines the XĆY plane of the
coordinate system for the feature being created. Features are created normal to
the placement face.
A datum plane may be used as the planar placement face. The creation and
use of datum planes is covered in a later lesson.
Datum Plane used

as Planar Placement
Face for Hole feature
through cylindrical
face of boss.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Form Features
The Horizontal and Vertical Reference
The Horizontal Reference defines the X axis of the feature coordinate system.
Any linear edge, planar face, datum axis, or datum plane that may be projected
onto the planar placement face may be selected to define the horizontal
direction. The Horizontal Reference is required to define the length direction
of form features having a Length parameter (slot, rectangular pocket and pad).
If no edge in a true horizontal direction is available the user can specify a
vertical reference from which the system will infer horizontal as perpendicular
to the selected vertical direction.
X+ Vector
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
The Horizontal Reference is also required to define horizontal or vertical types

of positioning dimensions for features that do not initially require a Horizontal
Reference (holes bosses, and cylindrical pockets).
Feature Coordinate System
During creation of features of a Unigraphics model, the system will manipulate

the WCS automatically to facilitate creation of the feature specified based on
the user input provided. The manipulated coordinate system is called a Feature
Coordinate System (FCS) and is stored as part of the feature definition.
Unigraphics will manipulate the WCS back to the FCS orientation during
subsequent feature editing.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
3-3
Form Features
Positioning Form Features
Positioning Dimensions are distance values measured along the planar

placement face. They may be used to place the form feature at the proper
location on the placement face. These dimensions should be considered as
constraints, or rules, that the geometry must obey.
There are nine different positioning methods available on the Positioning dialog
box, as shown below.
Parallel
Vertical Parallel at a
Perpendicular
Distance
Horizontal
Angular
Point Line
ÏÏÏ onto onto
ÏÏÏ Point Line
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ Point
onto
Line
NOTE: When positioning a form feature, only applicable dimension

types will be displayed.
It is not necessary to add positioning dimensions to form features, but it is

recommended that positioning dimensions be added at the time of creation for
ease of later editing.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Positioning Terminology
Fully Specified -The feature is uniquely located by the positioning
dimensions specified.
Underspecified - The feature is not yet uniquely located.
Overspecified - The feature has had more positioning dimensions
applied to it than are necessary.
Target Solid - The solid body that a Boolean operation acts upon. In the
context of a Form Feature it is the solid body that the Hole, Slot, Pocket
or Groove will subtract from, or a Boss or Pad will unite with.
Tool Solid -The solid representation of the feature being defined by the
current operation. In the context of a Form Feature it is the
representation of the Hole, Slot, Pocket, Pad, Boss, or Groove that will be
subtracted from or united with the Target Solid.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
3-5
Form Features
Positioning Methods
Horizontal - Specifies the horizontal distance between two points, one

point on the target solid and the other point on the tool solid. Horizontal is
measured along the XĆaxis of the feature coordinate system (i.e. the Horizontal
Reference). As edges are selected, the nearest valid point is selected (midpoints
are not selectable).
Feature
Coordinate
System
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Target edge
Horizontal reference
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ Tool edge
(datum plane)
1.50
Horizontal
positioning
dimension
EDS Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Vertical - Specifies the vertical distance between two points, one point
on the target solid and the other point on the tool solid. Vertical is measured
along the YĆaxis of the feature coordinate system (i.e. perpendicular to the
Horizontal Reference). As edges are selected, the nearest valid point is selected
(midpoints are not selectable).
Feature Coordinate System
Vertical
positioning
dimension
1.50 Target edge
(arc center)
Tool edge
(arc center)
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Angular - Specifies that a linear edge on the target solid (also datum
planes or axis) and a linear edge on the tool solid must be at a given angle to
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
each other. The angle is measured in a counterĆclockwise direction (with
respect to the feature coordinate system), from the ends of the edges nearest to
where they are selected.
Feature
Coordinate
System
Tool edge
(center line)
30
Angular
positioning
dimension
Horizontal reference Target edge
EDS
All Rights Reserved
3-7
Form Features
Examples of Horizontal, Vertical and Angular Positioning

Dimensions
Fully Specified by
Horizontal, Vertical and
Angular Positioning
Dimensions
15
.500
Target edge for Horizontal Tool edge for Horizontal

and Vertical Dimension and Vertical Dimension Horizontal
.500 reference
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ Fully Specified by
Horizontal and Vertical
Positioning Dimensions
1.00
Tool edge
(arc center)
Target edge for Horizontal

and Vertical Dimension
(arc center) 1.00 Horizontal reference
NOTE: When positioning Holes, Bosses, and Cylindrical Pockets the

Tool Edge is automatically selected and defined as the arc center.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Parallel - Specifies the shortest distance between two points, one point
on the target solid and the other point on the tool solid. As edges are selected,
the nearest valid point is selected (midpoints are not selectable).
Tool edge Feature

(arc center) Coordinate
System
1.375
Parallel
positioning
dimension
Target edge
(arc center)
Perpendicular - Specifies the shortest (normal) distance between a

linear edge on the target solid (also datum planes or axis) and a point on the tool
ÏÏÏ
solid. The linear target edge is always the first pick.
ÏÏÏ
Target edges
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
1.50
Feature
Coordinate
Perpendicular System
positioning
dimension
Tool edge
(arc center)
2.00
In the above example the feature (hole) can be fully specified with two
Perpendicular dimensions. Features with length, such as slot, pocket and pad,
will require an additional positioning dimension to control rotation.
TIP Using Perpendicular positioning instead of Horizontal or Vertical can

save time since no horizontal or vertical reference is needed.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
3-9
Form Features
Parallel at a Distance - Specifies that a linear edge on the target solid

(also datum planes or axis) and a linear edge on the tool solid must be parallel
and at a given distance. This is typically used for features with length (slot,
pocket or pad).
Feature
Coordinate
System
2.00
Parallel
positioning Tool edge
dimension (center line)
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Target edge These two edges are
Horizontal reference constrained parallel
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ Using Parallel at a Distance will solve two of the three degrees of freedom
necessary to fully specify a feature with length, rotational and distance in one
direction. Adding another Parallel at a Distance or Line onto Line dimension
would overspecify the location of the feature. To fully specify the feature in the
above example an additional positioning dimension is required to solve the final
degree of freedom (i.e. Horizontal, Perpendicular, or Point onto Line).
EDS Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Point onto Point - Specifies that the distance between a point on the target
solid and a point on the tool solid is zero. This is most commonly used to align arc
centers of cylindrical or conical features and fully constrain their location since rotation
is not a degree of freedom for cylindrical or conical features.
Point on tool solid
Point on target solid
Point onto Point is the same as the Parallel positioning dimension only the
ÏÏÏ
value is automatically set to zero. This zero value can be edited to a non-zero
ÏÏÏ
value through the Edit→Feature→Positioning dialog.
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
3-11
Form Features
Point onto Line - Specifies that the distance between an edge on the target
solid (also datum planes or axis) and a point on the tool solid is zero.
Point onto Line

positioning
dimensions
Feature
0 Coordinate
System
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
0
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
Target edges
(Datum Planes)
Tool edge
(arc center)
Point onto Line is the same as the Perpendicular positioning dimension only the
value is automatically set to zero. This zero value can be edited to a non-zero
value through the Edit→Feature→Positioning dialog.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Line onto Line - Specifies that the distance between a linear edge on the
target solid (also datum planes or axis) and a linear edge on the tool solid is zero and
they are constrained parallel to each other. This is typically used for features with
length (slot, pocket or pad).
Point onto Line

positioning
dimensions
Feature
Coordinate
System
0
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Target edge
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
(Datum Plane)
Tool edge
(center line
of slot)
Using Line onto Line will solve two of the three degrees of freedom necessary
to fully specify a feature of length, rotational and translation in one direction.
Adding another Line onto Line or Parallel at a Distance dimension would
overspecify the location of the feature. To fully specify the feature in the above
example an additional positioning dimension is required to solve the final
degree of freedom (i.e. Horizontal, Perpendicular, or Point onto Line).
Line onto Line is the same as the Parallel at a Distance positioning dimension
only the value is automatically set to zero. This zero value can be edited to a
non-zero value through the Edit→Feature→Positioning dialog.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
3-13
Form Features
Hole
This option is used to create simple, counterbore, and countersink holes in an

existing solid. The middle portion of the dialog window changes depending on
the hole type that is selected.
Placement face Thru face

Simple Counterbore Countersink
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
Hole Creation Method

Choose Insert→Form Feature→Hole (or the Hole icon.)
Choose the hole type.
Select the placement face. If a datum plane is selected choose the
Reverse Side button as required.
Select the thru face if applicable.
Key in the required values (or statements).
Choose OK or Apply.
Create positional dimensions as required.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Simple
Hole Depth
Hole Diameter
Counterbored
CĆBore Diameter
Hole Depth
ÏÏÏ
CĆBore Depth
ÏÏÏ
Tip Angle
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
Countersunk
CĆSink
Angle CĆSink Diameter
Hole Depth
EDS
All Rights Reserved
3-15
Form Features
Activity 1 - Creating Hole Form Features

This activity will show the creation of a thru hole feature.
Simple Thru Hole

Diameter = 1.50
Step 1 Open the part file pau_seedpart_in.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
Ensure that the Modeling Application is active.
Step 2 Create a Block.
If necessary, choose the Origin, Edge Lengths icon.
Length (XC) = 10 (Tab)
Length (YC) = 4 (Tab)
Length (ZC) = 2
Choose MB2.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Choose the Fit icon from the View toolbar.
Step 3 Create a simple thru hole.
Choose the Hole icon.
Ensure the Simple hole icon is selected.
Select the top face of the block as shown below. Confirm the
selection if necessary.
Select top face here
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
If incorrect geometry is selected, select the Placement Face icon again

and then reselect the correct geometry.
Select the bottom face as the Thru Face.
Select thru face with one

pick in this region or select
and confirm
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
3-17
Form Features
Enter 1.5 for the diameter and choose OK.
The hole is temporarily represented as a long tool solid that extends beyond the
thru face, as shown in the figure below.
Step 4 Position the hole feature.
ÏÏÏ The Positioning dialog box is displayed.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ The system defaults to the Perpendicular icon and
the Cue line prompts you to select a Target Edge.
Select this edge as the

Target Edge
EDS Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Key in the name of the expression (dim_1) and the value (2)
as shown below.
NOTE: The system applied expression names may be accepted,

however, it is a good practice to give expressions a meaningful name,
doing so will make interrogation of the part easier.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose the Perpendicular icon.
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
Select the left edge of the top face as shown in the figure
below.
Select this edge as

the Target Edge
EDS
All Rights Reserved
3-19
Form Features
Key in the name of the expression and the value as shown

below.
Choose OK.
Since the location of the hole is completely specified, it is moved to the new
position and the Boolean operation is performed. The part now looks like the
ÏÏÏ following figure.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
Step 5 Choose File"Close"All Parts.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Slot
This option allows you to create a slot in a solid body as if cut by a milling
machine tool. In each case, the shape of the imaginary cutting tool corresponds
to the slot type and dimensions.
The slot feature will be created so that the axis of the imaginary cutter tool is
normal to the face or datum plane selected. The path of the slot will be parallel
to the horizontal reference selected.
The system prompts for all necessary slot parameters, depending upon the
specific type of slot feature chosen. The slot types are shown in the dialog box
illustrated below.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
For all slot types, the Thru slot option extends the slot length along the
placement face in the direction of the horizontal reference through the faces,
specified by the user.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
3-21
Form Features
Rectangular
This option allows creation of a slot in an existing solid body using a tool that
has cylindrical end faces and will leave sharp edges along the bottom of the slot.
Rectangular slot parameters are Slot Width, Slot Depth, Slot Length, as shown
below.
ZC
YC XC
Width Length
ÏÏÏ Depth
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ The width of the rectangular slot represents the diameter of the cylindrical
cutting tool.
The depth of the slot is measured in a parallel orientation to the tool axis, from
the origin point of the slot to the bottom of the slot. Depth values must be
positive.
The length is measured parallel to the horizontal reference (X in the feature

coordinate system). Length values must be positive.
NOTE: The system will not prompt for slot length if the Thru
option has been toggled on. Instead, it prompts for selection of the
two thru faces.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Form Features
The figure below illustrates a T-slot using the Thru option.
Placement
Face Second Thru face
Centerline
First Thru face
The four other available slot profiles are illustrated below.
Depth Depth
ÏÏÏ
Ball Diameter Width
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
BallĆEnd Slot Corner UĆSlot
Radius
Top Width
Top Depth
Bottom Depth Width
Angle
Bottom Width
TĆSlot Dovetail Slot
NOTE: The value of the corner radius of the U-Slot must be less
than 1/2 the width of the slot.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
3-23
Form Features
Activity 2 - Creating Slot Form Features

In this activity, you will create two different types of slots in the top of a solid.
Step 1 Open the part file pau_slot_1.

Step 2 Create a rectangular slot.
Use the information provided in the figure below for your work.
Rectangular slot
width = 2.00
depth = 0.50
length = 3.00
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
Choose the Slot icon.
Then choose the Rectangular option.
The Cue line prompts you to select the planar placement face.
Select the top of the block at the approximate position

shown in the figure below. The top edges change to the
system color.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Form Features
If the Cue line asks for a selection confirmation, and the top
edges are highlighted, choose the correct number from the
QuickPick dialog box.
If the wrong face is highlighted, select the Back button in the active dialog box.
The Cue line asks for a horizontal reference. The object selected can be a linear
edge, solid face, datum axis, datum plane. Or, a vertical reference could be
specified instead using any of the fore mentioned objects. The horizontal
direction selected will determine the direction in which the slot length will be
placed in the part.
Select the bottom front edge of the block, as shown in the

following figure, or any edge parallel to it.
ÏÏÏ
Select this edge
ÏÏÏ
as the horizontal
reference ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
A conehead displays the direction of the length of the slot.
Enter the parameters for the rectangular slot:
Width= 2
Depth= .5
Length= 3
Choose OK.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
3-25
Form Features
The rectangular slot will appear and be placed at the location of the screen pick
on the top of the block.
Choose the Parallel at a Distance icon.
Select the target edge as shown below.
Select this edge.
Select the slot's centerline that is parallel to the selected
ÏÏÏ edge.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
Key in 2 and choose OK.
Choose the Perpendicular icon.
Select this edge.

edge.
Key in 3.5 and choose OK.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Form Features
The Boolean operation is performed. The finished rectangular slot should now
look like this.
Step 3 Create a TĆslot.
Select Back.
Toggle the Thru option ON.
Choose the T-Slot option.
ÏÏÏ
Select the planar placement face as shown.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
Select the horizontal reference.
Select this edge
EDS
All Rights Reserved
3-27
Form Features
Select the thru faces for the T-slot.
Starting thru face

Ending thru face
Enter the following values for the parameters:
Top width = .5
Top depth = .5
Bottom width = .75
Bottom depth = .5
ÏÏÏ Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ Choose the Parallel at a Distance icon.
Select this edge.

edge.
Since thru faces have been defined the slot does not need to be positioned
along its length.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Choose OK.
Your part should look like the following figure.
Step 4 Optional: Add a third slot, a dovetail Thru slot, that

intersects both of the other slots.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
3-29
Form Features
Pocket
The pocket feature is used to create a cavity in a solid body.
There are three types of pockets:
Cylindrical
Rectangular
General
The Rectangular Pocket will be discussed in this lesson.
Rectangular Pocket
This option allows a rectangular pocket to be defined to a specified depth, with

ÏÏÏ or without a floor and/or corner radius, having either straight or tapered sides.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
The following parameters may be specified:
Positioning
X Length Origin point
Centerlines
Y Length
Corner Radius
Horizontal
Reference Taper Angle
Z Length
Floor
Radius
Pocket features may be positioned from a tool edge, or from the centerlines
provided for this purpose.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Activity 3 - Creating Pocket Form Features

In this activity, a rectangular pocket will be created on the block. The finished
part will look like the figure below.
Step 1 Open the part file pau_pocket_1.
ÏÏÏ
Step 2 Create a rectangular pocket.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
Choose the Pocket icon.
Choose Rectangular.
Select the placement face as shown in the figure below.
Select placement face here
Select this face as

horizontal reference
Select the horizontal reference as shown in the same figure.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
3-31
Form Features
Enter the parameter values as follows:
X Length = 3
Y Length = 1.5
Z Length = 1
Corner Radius = .5
Floor Radius = .25
Taper Angle = 0
Choose OK.
The rectangular pocket appears at the location where the planar placement
face was selected.
ÏÏÏ Fully position the pocket using your own methods, and
ÏÏÏ parametric values.
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ Step 3 Use a similar method to create the second pocket shown
at the beginning of the activity.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Boss
The Boss feature allows the addition of a cylindrical shape to a specified height,
having either straight or tapered sides. The parameters of the boss are
diameter, height and taper angle.
Diameter
Height
X
Z
Tapered boss
Y
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
X
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
Diameter is the distance across the required boss.
Height is measured from the placement face.
Taper angle is the angle at which the cylinder wall of the boss inclines. A
positive or negative value may be entered depending on which way the wall is to
incline. A zero value results in a vertical cylinder wall.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
3-33
Form Features
Activity 4 - Creating Boss Form Features

In this activity, two bosses will be created and positioned on a cover plate for a
modular telephone jack as shown below.
Before
Boss diameter=0.20
Boss height=0.075
After
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
Step 1 Open the part file.
Choose File→Open.
Select pau_coverplate_1.
NOTE: The dimensions shown are from the outside of the part, be
sure to select the proper edges to dimension from.
Save the part as ***_coverplate_1 where *** represent your

initials.
Step 2 Create a boss feature.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Choose the Boss icon.
Select and accept the planar placement face as shown below.
Select top inside face

approximately here
Enter the parameters for the boss:
Diameter = .2
Height = .075
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Taper Angle = 0
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
Choose Apply.
The boss is temporarily placed on the face where you selected it. The
Positioning dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Position the boss.
The system defaults to the Perpendicular icon and

the Cue line prompts you to select a Target Edge.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
3-35
Form Features
Select a right side edge on the outside of the part for a target
edge for the perpendicular dimension, as shown below.
Front
Select either of the right
outside edges as the
target edge.
A temporary display appears that shows the distance from the center of the
boss to the target edge.
Enter 1.5 for the new value.
ÏÏÏ Choose the Perpendicular icon again.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
Select a front edge on the outside of the part for the target
edge for the second perpendicular dimension, as shown
below.
Target edge
Enter 1 for the new value and choose OK.
The boss is moved into the correct location and the Boolean operation is
performed.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Step 4 Create the second boss and position it.
Repeat Step 2 and Step 3 for the second boss. Use the same
positioning values, this time use the back, outside edge to
locate the boss.
Step 5 Choose File"Save. Do not close the part.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
3-37
Form Features
Pad
This option allows a raised pad on a solid body to be created, with or without
taper and corner radii. The parameter values of the pad feature are X, Y, and
Z lengths, corner radius, and taper.
The two types of pads are:
Rectangular
General (Not covered in this course)
Rectangular Pad
The Length, Width, and Height values of the Pad feature relate directly to the
displayed vector indicating the Horizontal direction. Length is measured along
the displayed vector, Width is measured perpendicular to the displayed vector,
ÏÏÏ and Height is measured normal to the Placement face.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
The Corner Radius specifies the blend radius for the vertical edges of the pad
feature (along the Height). This number may be positive or zero. A zero radius
results in sharp corners on the pad feature.
The Taper Angle is the angle at which the four walls of the pad feature incline
inward, and must be positive or equal to zero. A zero value results in vertical
walls.
Tapered Pad
Positioning
Length Centerlines
Width
Height Horizontal reference

Corner Radius
EDS Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Activity 5 - Creating and Positioning a Pad

In this activity, two pads will be centered with respect to the two existing bosses.
When complete, the part should appear as shown below.
Step 1 Continue working with ***_coverplate_1.
Rectangular pad
length 2.9
width 0.1
height 0.0375
ÏÏÏ
Step 2 Create the first rectangular pad.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
Choose the Pad icon.
Choose Rectangular from the dialog box.
Select the top surface at a location which approximates the

position shown.
Location for pad
It is now necessary to define the horizontal reference. This determines the

direction of the Length parameter of the pad as well as the direction for a
horizontal Positioning Dimension.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
3-39
Form Features
Select one of the edges or faces shown below to establish the

horizontal direction of the feature coordinate system.
Select back edges or face

for Horizontal Reference
Select front edge or face

for Horizontal Reference
A vector arrow displays the horizontal direction of the pad.
If the vector is not pointing in the desired direction, choose

Back and respecify the horizontal reference.
ÏÏÏ Enter the parameters for the pad:

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
Length = 2.9
Width = .1
Height = .0375
Corner Radius = 0
Taper Angle = 0
Choose OK.
The pad is temporarily positioned at the location selected for the placement
face.
Step 3 Position the pad.
Choose the Line onto Line icon on the Positioning

Method dialog box.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Select the target edge (an inside edge as shown below).
Tool edge
Target edge
Select a tool edge (the small edge at the top end of the pad)
The position is specified in one direction, another positioning dimension is

required to fully specify the feature's location.
Choose the Vertical icon.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Select the target edge (circular edge of the boss) as shown in
the figure below. ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
Target edge
Choose Arc Center.
Select the pad's horizontal center line as the Tool Edge.
Enter a new value of 0.
Choose OK.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
3-41
Form Features
The pad moves into position and the Boolean operation is performed. The part
should look as shown below:
Step 4 Create the second pad and position it in the same way to
the other boss.
When completed the part should look like the figure shown below.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
Step 5 Save and close the part file.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Form Features
SUMMARY In this lesson you were introduced to Form

Features. Form features are used to add detail
to the model during creation. Form features
are fully associative to the geometry and
parameter values used to create them. The
different form features are:
Hole
Boss
Pocket
Pad
Slot
ÏÏÏ
Groove
ÏÏÏ
This lesson you: ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
Identified a Placement Face.
Identified a Horizontal Reference.
Identified Target and Tool Solids
Applied Positioning dimensions to a form
feature.
Created a Hole Form Feature.
Created Slot Form Features.
Created Pocket Form Features.
Created Boss Form Features
Created a Rectangular Pad.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
3-43
Form Features
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Expressions
Expressions
Lesson 4
PURPOSE This lesson is a fundamental introduction to Expressions.
Create Expressions.
Edit Expressions.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
4-1
Expressions
Expressions
Expressions are algebraic or arithmetic statements used to control the

characteristics of a part. Expressions define the dimensions and relationships of
a model.
Unigraphics automatically creates expressions when:
a feature is created.
a sketch is dimensioned.
a feature or sketch is positioned.
Understanding Expressions
All expressions have a name, a statement, and a value.
NOTE: The total number of characters allowed for the name, equal
sign, statement, and comments in an expression is 132.
The name is the portion of the expression on the left side of the equal sign.
Expression names are alphanumeric strings of text that begin with a letter.
Expressions are case sensitive.
The statement is the portion displayed on the right side of the equal sign. The
statement may be a numeral or an algebraic function and may contain
ÏÏÏ
preĆexisting expression names.
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ The value is the result of the evaluation of the statement portion of the
equation within the expression.
Example of an Expression
Length=.5+2*cos(60) 1.5
Name Statement Value

Length is the name of the expression
and represents the value 1.5.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Expressions
Creating and Editing Expressions
To work with expressions, choose Tools→Expression.
Name
Creation order
Reverse creation
The Name Filter
Expression List
Expressions editor
and calculator
ÏÏÏ
Used By
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
Saving changes to
the expressions
EDS
All Rights Reserved
4-3
Expressions
Creating Expressions
There are three methods to create expressions:
System generated expressions (p#).
User defined expressions created during text input (Rad=5.00).
Predefined, user created expressions (Thk=0.60, Thk used as a text entry
in a parameter field).
Procedure:
Click in the expression editor field and key in the entire expression (for
example: rad=1.5).
Press the <Enter> key. The expression is then added to the Expression
List.
Choose Apply or OK to save the expression.
Editing Expressions
Procedure:
Choose the expression to modify from the expression list. It is displayed in
the expression editor field.
In the expression editor field, modify the statement (right side of the
equal sign). If the name (left side of the equal sign) is modified, a new
expression will be created.
Press the <Enter> key.
Choose Apply or OK to save the expression.
ÏÏÏ Using Information→Feature
ÏÏÏ
4 Many times there is a need to determine what expressions control what features
ÏÏÏ in the model. By choosing Information→Feature, and selecting the feature(s) in
question, a listing window will show information about the selected feature(s).
Used by
The Used by option provides a means of finding out if an expression is
referenced in another expression and what feature(s) use the expression. To use
this option, choose Tools→Expression, select the expression and then choose
the Used by icon.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Expressions
Activity 1 - Getting Familiar with Expressions

This activity will demonstrate how expressions were created when the block was
created in the previous activity. The same block will then be created with the
same dimensional values. However, this time logical names for the expressions
will be used.
Step 1 Open the part file pau_prim_exp_1 and save as

***_prim_exp_1. Start the Modeling application.
Step 2 Examine the Expressions for the Block created in the

previous activity.
Choose the Tools→Expression option.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
The Edit Expression dialog box shown above lists all of the expressions in the
part file. Notice the p0, p1, and p2 expressions. These are default expression
names given to the block.
Step 3 Delete the Block.
Choose the Delete icon from the Standard toolbar.
Select the block in the graphic window and choose OK.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
4-5
Expressions
Step 4 Create a new Block.
Choose Origin, Edge Lengths.
Key in the following expressions:
Length (XC) = Length=8 (Tab)
Length (YC) = Width=6 (Tab)
Length (ZC) = Height=6/2
Choose OK.
Step 5 Examine the Expressions for the newly created Block.
Choose the Tools→Expression option.
The display on the Edit Expression dialog box should be similar to the one
shown below. Notice the expressions Height, Length, and Width. These
expressions were created during the creation of the block.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Expressions
Step 6 Find information about the newly created Block.
Choose the Information→Expression→List All option or
select the Information icon at the bottom of the

Expressions dialog window.
The graphic shows the listing window with the information about the feature
selected.
Notice that the Height is tied to the numeric value 6/2. This is not the true
intent of the design. The true intent is that the Height grows proportionally
with the Width. This relationship could not be established upon creation as the
Width expression was not in existence.
Step 7 Change the expression.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
Close the Information window.
ÏÏÏ
Select the Height expression from the Expressions window.
The expression is displayed in the expression text editor
field.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
4-7
Expressions
Place the cursor in the text editor field just to the right of the
numeral 6 in the 6/2 expression field.
Text Editor Field
Backspace once to delete the numeral 6 and replace it with

Width and press Enter.
The value for the expression Height is now changed to Width/2. Any time that
the Width changes the value will change accordingly.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
Step 8 Change the Width value.
Select the Width expression.
Backspace once to delete the numeral 6, replace it with 4

and press Enter.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Expressions
Choose OK.
Step 9 Save and Close the part.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
4-9
Expressions
SUMMARY Expressions are algebraic or arithmetic

statements used to control the characteristics
of a part. Expressions define the dimensions
and relationships of a model. Expressions are
created when:
a feature is created.
a sketch is dimensioned.
a feature or sketch is positioned.
All expressions have a name, a statement, and

a value.
In this lesson you:

Created Expressions.
Edited Expressions.
Retrieved information through
Information→Expression.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Face Operations
Face Operations
Lesson 5
PURPOSE To introduce the Hollow face operation.
Hollow a solid body.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
5-1
Face Operations
Face Operations
Face Operations are available to provide additional definition to the faces of a

model. The Face Operations are Taper, Hollow, and Offset Face .
In this lesson, the Hollow operation will be discussed.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Face Operations
Hollow
The Hollow operation creates a cavity inside, or a shell around an existing solid,
based upon a specified thickness. The entire solid body is hollowed during this
operation.
In the figure below, the top face has been selected as the face to be pierced.
Face to be Thickness
pierced
Before After
Wall Thickness Value
Positive or negative values may be used as follows:
Positive values will hollow the existing solid so that the wall thickness is
measured inward from the original faces of the solid.
Negative values for the wall thickness will result in a hollow that forms a
shell of the specified value around the original solid.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
5-3
Face Operations
Choosing Insert"Feature Operation"Hollow from the main menu will display

the following dialog box for hollow creation.
Region
Face Body
Pierced Offset
face face
Type
Filter Default
Thickness
Alternate
Thickness
A hollow may be created in three different ways:
The "Face" button may be chosen to select pierced faces individually.

The "Region" button may be selected to quickly select a region of faces to
be pierced. Since a region of the body is pierced rather than individual
faces, any changes in the region are automatically reflected in the hollow.
The "Body" button may be selected to create a void region in a body
without piercing any faces.
A unique thickness may be assigned for each face with the Offset Face option.
When Offset Face is selected the Alternate Thickness text box becomes active.
Using variable thickness hollows reduces the number of features in the part, as
the offset features are not required, and results in more compact models that
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
are easier to comprehend.
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Face Operations
Activity 1 - Performing a Hollow Operation

In this activity the Hollow operation will be used to take material away from the
model of a plastic molded part.
Step 1 Open the Part File.

Open the part file pau_hair_dryer_1, and start the Modeling
application.
The figure below illustrates the solid that will be hollowed.
Right
Step 2 Inspect the Part.
Set the Display Mode to Shaded and Rotate the part

to verify that the solid requires hollowing.
Step 3 Hollow the solid and pierce the proper faces.
Set the display mode back to Wireframe and Restore

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
the view (third mouse button). ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
5-5
Face Operations
Choose the Hollow icon from the Feature Operation

toolbar.
Enter a Default Thickness of 2.
Select the right, and back side faces to pierce.
After both of the desired faces are selected to be pierced,

choose OK twice. The finished part is shown below.
Back side face
Right face
Step 4 Inspect the Part.
Set the Display Mode to Shaded and Rotate the part

(third mouse button).
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Face Operations
Activity 2 - Hollow and Selection Practice

In this activity the Hollow operation will be used to create a sheet metal part.
Open the part file pau_hollow_1, and start the Modeling

application.
The figure below illustrates the solid that will be hollowed.
Front
Step 2 Create a hollow feature.
Choose the Hollow icon.
Enter a Default Thickness of .12.

ÏÏÏ

Select the 5 following faces to pierce: front, back, left, right, ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ

and bottom.
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
5-7
Face Operations
After all the desired faces are selected to be pierced, choose

OK twice. The finished part is shown below.
Choose Edit→Undo List→Hollow.
Repeat the operation with a thickness of -.12 and examine

the result.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Face Operations
Activity 3 - Creating a Hollow Feature with an Offset

This simple activity will demonstrate the application of a hollow feature with an
offset face.
Open the part file pau_hollow_2, and start the Modeling

application.
Step 2 Hollow the solid.
Choose the Hollow icon.
Enter a Default Thickness of 4.
Select the faces to pierce as shown below.
Select the 3
faces that are
NOT shaded.
Choose the Offset Face icon.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
Key in an Alternate Thickness of 8. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
5-9
Face Operations
Select the face to offset as shown below.
Select this face

to offset.
Choose OK.
Step 3 Close the part, do not save.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Face Operations
SUMMARY The Hollow operation creates a cavity inside,

or a shell around an existing solid, based upon
a specified thickness. In addition, selected
faces may be assigned various offset thickness.
In this lesson you:

Specified a Default Thickness.
Specified a Alternate Thickness.
Specified Faces to be Pierced.
Specified Faces to be Offset.
Created a Hollow Feature.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
5-11
Face Operations
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Edge Operations
Edge Operations ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
Lesson 6
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
PURPOSE To introduce Blend and Chamfer edge operations.
Create Blends.
Create Chamfers.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
6-1
Edge Operations
ÏÏÏ Edge Operations

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ Edge Operations are available to provide additional definition to the edges of a
model. The Edge Operations are Edge Blend and Chamfer.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Edge Operations
ÏÏÏ
Edge Blend ÏÏÏ
This option creates cylindrical or conical faces in place of an edge on a solid
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
body. The system adds or subtracts material depending on the topology of the
solid body and shortens the faces intersecting at the edge selected.
Blend
radius
Selected
edge
Blend
radius Shortened faces
EDS
All Rights Reserved
6-3
Edge Operations
ÏÏÏ Edge Blends Using Dynamic Input Field

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ With the cursor selection set to General Objects, an edge may be blended by
first selecting the edge(s) in the graphics window, then the third mouse button
is used to access a pop-up menu. From this menu, the Blend operation is
chosen and a Radius value may be input directly on the graphics screen. The
edge blend is automatically created as a preview.
When you achieve the desired radius value, choose the checkmark in the upper
left corner of the graphics screen.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Edge Operations
You can also access the full Blend Dialog by choosing the Blend Dialog icon at
ÏÏÏ
the upper left corner of the graphics screen. By choosing the Blend Dialog, you
ÏÏÏ
may make changes to the Blend default settings.
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
6-5
Edge Operations
ÏÏÏ Activity 1 - Creating Edge Blends with Dynamic Input Fields

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
6 In this activity you will create Edge Blends using the MB3 pop-up menu and
ÏÏÏ onĆscreen Dynamic Input Fields.

Step 1 Open the part pau_edge_blend_1 and choose the
Modeling application.
You will create Edge Blends using the new functionality.
Step 2 Create the first Edge Blend.
Ensure the Select General Objects icon is ON in the

Selection toolbar.
Choose the edge shown above, click MB3 and choose the
Blend option.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Edge Operations
Highlight the Dynamic Input Field and enter .75. Watch the
ÏÏÏ
previewed radius to make sure it looks as desired.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
.75
Choose the Checkmark at the upper left corner of the

graphics window to apply the radius.
Step 3 Create the second Edge Blend.
Choose the edge shown below , click MB3 and choose the
Blend option.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
6-7
Edge Operations
ÏÏÏ Highlight the Dynamic Input Field and enter .5 . Watch the
ÏÏÏ previewed radius to make sure it looks as desired.
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ Notice that the tangent edges were automatically selected. That is because the
Add Tangent Edges toggle is on in the Blend dialog.
.5
If you chose OK at this point, only part of the edge would be blended. Instead
you would like to blend the entire left side of the part. To do this, you must
manually select the additional edges.
Note: At this point, if you wanted to make changes to the Edge

Blend default settings, you could choose the Blend Dialog icon from
the upper left corner of the graphics screen and make the desired
changes.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Edge Operations
Select the two additional edges at the left side of the part. If
ÏÏÏ
Enable Blend Preview is toggled ON in the dialog, you will
ÏÏÏ
see a preview of each blend as the edge is selected. If Blend
Preview does not display, you can choose the Blend Dialog ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
icon in the upper left corner of the graphics screen and
toggle Enable Blend Preview ON.
Choose the Checkmark icon to apply the blends.
Step 4 Close the part without saving.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
6-9
Edge Operations
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Chamfer
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ This option bevels the edges of a solid body by defining the desired chamfer
dimensions.
There are five methods of creating a chamfer:
Single Offset
Double Offset
Offset Angle
Freeform Single Offset (Outside scope of class)
Freeform Double Offset (Outside scope of class)
The system adds or subtracts material depending on the topology of the solid
body and shortens the faces intersecting at the edge selected.
Outside Inside
Chamfer Shortened faces Chamfer
Selected
edge
Selected edge
Chamfer
Chamfer
Shortened faces
Removes Material Adds material
EDS Unigraphics NX
Edge Operations
Single Offset ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
This option allows a chamfer to be placed with an offset that is the same along
both faces, as shown in the figure below (offset 1 and offset 2 have the same
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
value). This value must be a positive value.
Offset 1
Selected
edge
Face 2
Offset 2
Face 1
The single offset shown below is measured along the path of the curved face
and is not necessarily a linear distance.
Offset
Selected
edge
Face 2
Chamfer
Face 1
EDS
All Rights Reserved
6-11
Edge Operations
ÏÏÏ Double Offset

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
This option allows different offsets to be placed along the faces. Both of the
offset values must be positive and applied as shown below.
Second
offset Selected edge
Face 1
First offset
Chamfer
Face 2
Offset Angle
This option allows an offset value and the chamfer angle to be entered. Note
that the chamfer angle is measured from the second face selected.
NOTE: The option of flipping the chamfer is available if the

display is not what is desired.
Angle
Selected
edge
Face 1
Offset
Chamfer
Face 2
EDS Unigraphics NX
Edge Operations
Activity 2 - Performing a Chamfer Operation ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
In this activity, a chamfer will be placed on different edges of the model.
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
Open pau_chamfer_1 and make sure you're in the Modeling

application.
Step 2 Create a chamfer using offset and angle.
Choose the Chamfer icon.
Choose Offset Angle option.
Select Edge 1 as shown below.
Edge 1
Choose OK.
Offset = 1.75
Angle = 30
Choose OK.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
6-13
Edge Operations
ÏÏÏ The model should appear as shown below.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
Edge 2
Step 3 Create a double offset chamfer.
Choose the Double Offset option.
Select Edge 2 as shown above.
Choose OK.
First Offset = .25
Second Offset = .5
Choose OK and note the option to Flip Last Chamfer.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Edge Operations
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
SUMMARY The Edge Blend and Chamfer Operations are

available to provide additional definition to the
edges of a model.
In this lesson you:

Blended different edges.
Chamfered edges using Offset Angle
Chamfered edges using Double Offset.
Became aware of the Flip Last Chamfer
option.
Became aware that all blended edges or
chamfered edges created in a single
operation are considered one feature.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
6-15
Edge Operations
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Model Construction Query

Lesson 7
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
7
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
PURPOSE To demonstrate different methods available to query a part file.
Querying a part file is useful in that a user may gain an understanding of the
part's design intent and how the part was created.
Retrieve Layer Information.

Open and close the Model Navigator.
Retrieve Feature Information.
Retrieve Expression Information.
Playback the model construction.
Suppress & Unsuppress Features.
Identify where expressions are used.
Measure the distance between objects.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
7-1
Visually Inspect the Part
Visual inspection of the solid model may be accomplished by rotating the model
to view the different features. At times this is very beneficial in order to see
clearly what is displayed on the screen. The model may be rotated by using the
middle mouse button or the Rotate icon in the View toolbar. Depending upon
the graphics driver being used, this may be done with the model shaded or
displayed as wireframe. These display modes may also be controlled using the
View toolbar.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
7
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
Refresh Zoom Rotate Wireframe Wireframe
Fit Zoom Pan Shaded View
In/Out Settings
Settings Orientation
Inspect the Layers
Layers are used to organize a part file. They work like invisible containers to
house the different objects used to create a Unigraphics solid model.
Things to look for:
Object Count: Enabling Show Object Count using the checkbox will
change the display in the Layer/Status listing window to a
Layer/Status/Count listing window that shows the number of objects
contained on each layer.
Category Names: Unigraphics offers the ability to name layers or groups
of layers using Categories. The Category Names are listed in the Category
listing window on the Layer Settings dialog box as well as in the
Layer/Status listing window next to assigned layers when Show Category
Names is enabled.
Layer Listing: There is a filtering option menu at the bottom of the dialog
box that allows the Layer/Status listing window to display All Objects,
Layers with Objects, or All Selectable Layers.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Model Navigator
The Model Navigator may be used to identify the different features of the
model. Selecting a feature from the Model Navigator window will highlight the
selected feature in the graphics area and will also highlight the parent and/or
child features of the selected feature in different colors. Conversely, selecting a
feature from the graphics area will highlight the selected feature and its
parents/children in the Model Navigator window.
The Model Navigator allows the display of features to be temporarily removed

(suppressed) from the graphics screen by selecting the check box associated
with the feature name. When a check is displayed in the box, the feature is ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
7
ÉÉÉ
displayed in the graphics area.
The Model Navigator also allows various editing functions to be performed

from a central location. Holding down the third mouse button causes a feature
ÉÉÉ
specific popĆup menu to be displayed offering pertinent editing options.
To access the Model Navigator in UNIX use the Navigator toolbar and to access
the Model Navigator in Windows use the Resource bar. Both, by default, are
located vertically on the right side of the Unigraphics window.
UNIX:
Icon from
Navigator toolbar
Windows:
Icon from
Resource Bar
EDS
All Rights Reserved
7-3
Information
The Information pull down from the main menu offers a number of options for
obtaining information about the model. Some of the most useful menu options
when trying to interrogate a model are listed below with a brief description of
what they do.
Information→Feature
Information→Feature may be used to identify Parent/Child relationships
between the selected feature and the other features in the model. In addition,
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
7
expressions that control the feature may be displayed in the graphic screen by
toggling Display Dimensions on.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ TIP When using Information→Feature, the feature may also be selected
in the graphics window. The feature will then be highlighted in the
Feature Browser window. Choose OK or Apply to bring up the
Information window which will display the relative expressions.
Information→Expression→List All
Examining the expressions may reveal associativity that is built between
features or the expressions associated to them.
Information→Expression→List All by Reference

Information→Expression→List All by Reference allows expressions that
reference other expressions to be identified, as well as identifying to what
features these expressions belong. The Edit→Find option within the
Information Window allows easy navigation through the listing.
Playback & Suppress/Unsuppress

In regards to investigating how a model was created, the Playback and
Suppress/Unsuppress functions (found under Edit→Feature from the Menu
Bar or in the Edit Feature toolbar) will allow the user to reconstruct the model
and watch the progress graphically. On very large models, users will have to
weigh the invested time vs. the amount of information that can be learned to
determine if it is an acceptable practice for a particular model. The main
differences between these two methods is that Playback does not suppress
reference features or sketches. However, Playback does allow editing of
features during update, where Suppress/Unsuppress does not.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Expression Used by option
Features may be identified that have an association to a particular expression by

using the Used by" option found in the Expressions dialog window.
To use:
Choose Tools→Expressions
Select the expression.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
7
Choose the Used by icon.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
An Information window pops up identifying the features that are using the
selected expression.
Identified feature
Used by
EDS
All Rights Reserved
7-5
Analysis Distance
The Analysis→Distance function obtains the minimum distance between any

two Unigraphics objects such as points, curves, planes, bodies, edges, and/or
faces.
The system calculates the three-dimensional distance and the

two-dimensional distance relative to the XC, YC plane. In addition, it returns
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
7
the closest point on each object and the delta distances in absolute and work
coordinate systems. The graphics window will indicate the distance measured by
ÉÉÉ
a temporary line.
ÉÉÉ
All data in the Information window is converted to the current units. You can
change the units of measure in the Information window using Analysis→Units,
and then choosing OK. Once the Information window has displayed the results,
you can verify the distance between one of the selected objects and a new
object. Just select a new first object, and then select one of the previously
selected objects. The new distance is then displayed in the Information window.
You can continue verifying distances between one of the selected objects and
any other object as long as you specify the new unselected object first.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Start Points
In cases where multiple closest points exist, you may wish to specify a point to
indicate the region of the selected object in which you'd like the system to
calculate the distance. Use Start Point lets you indicate a start point for a
selected curve or face object.
Use Start Point toggles from No to Yes. When you set the toggle to Yes and
select a curve or face, the system displays the Point Subfunction menu, which
allows you to select the desired start point for the curve or face.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
7
Use this option to distinguish between multiple points on an object when the
selection of more than one is possible. For example, if there exists more than
one pair of points that are normal to both objects, the system may not produce
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
the desired results unless you indicate a start point to use, as shown below.
In this case, you want to specify the

minimum distance between point A
and a certain area of spline B. If no
start point is specified, the system may
But if you specify a start point
indicate the minimum distance here.
as shown, the system knows
which minimum distance you
Point A are looking for,
Spline B

Specified
start point
EDS
All Rights Reserved
7-7
Activity 1 - Model Construction Query

This activity deals with identifying different feature relationships and design
intent. Although detailed instructions are supplied, it may be beneficial to
attempt to navigate through the interface without using them.
Step 1 Open pau_arm_1 and start the Modeling application.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
7
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
Step 2 Visually Inspect the Model.
Inspect the model. As the part is rotated, try to identify different features and
the possible methods used to create them.
Rotate the model (hold down MB2 and drag in graphics

window).
Choose the Shaded icon. (View toolbar)
Rotate the model (MB2).
Orient the view back to trimetric using the Trimetric icon
in the View toolbar.
Step 3 Inspect the Layers.
Viewing the layers may help gain an understanding of how complex a model
may be. If there is only 1 object on a solids layer and just a few objects on a
curves layer, the model may be a simple extrusion.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Choose the Layer Settings icon. (Utility toolbar)
Toggle ON the Show Category Names options.
Review the listing for category names and object count.
Notice that there is 1 object on a Solids layer, 8 objects on a Sketches layer and
3 objects on a Datums layer.
Step 4 Identify the Different Features using the Model Navigator.

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
7
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
Choose the Wireframe icon if required to better view
interior features (View toolbar).
Make layers 1, 21, and 61 selectable so that the construction

aids may be seen.
Choose OK in the Layer Settings dialog box.
Choose the Fit icon in the View toolbar.
Choose the Model Navigator icon from the Navigator

toolbar (UNIX) or from the Resource Bar (Windows) and
size as required. Either option should be located vertically on
the Right side of the graphics window.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
7-9
Windows ONLY: Choose the tack icon in the upper left

hand corner to permanently display the Model Navigator.
This will also adjust the graphics window to fit the part
within the viewing area.
Starting at the top of the Model Navigator feature list, select

the first feature with MB1. The corresponding feature will be
highlighted in the graphic window as well as the parent
(pau_arm_1) and its children (S21_SKETCH(3)). Continue
ÉÉÉ
through all features to see which is which.
ÉÉÉ
7
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ Step 5 Review the model construction using Playback.
Choose the Feature Playback icon from the Edit

Feature toolbar.
Feature Playback
EDS Unigraphics NX
All of the solid features are suppressed except the reference features and the
sketch. The Edit during Update dialog box informs you that the
FIXED_DATUM_PLANE(0) feature has been updated, this is the base feature
of the model.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
7
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
Choose the Step icon.
The next feature, FIXED_DATUM_AXIS(1), is updated. You may have to

move the slider to read the entire message displayed in the Edit during Update
dialog box.
Choose the Step icon again.
The next feature , FIXED_DATUM_AXIS(2), is updated.
Continue to Step through until the model has been

completely updated.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
7-11
Step 6 Review the model construction using

Suppress/Unsuppress.

the checkbox in front of the first feature with MB1 to
suppress the feature.
Note that all of the features in the list, except for two fixed datum axes, become
suppressed. This is due to all of the other features in the model sharing some
sort of associativity with these reference features. To get a better idea about
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
7
direct associativity to features we will change the listing method of the Model
Navigator.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ Place the cursor over the Feature Name header in the Model
Navigator, select MB3 and choose the Quick Look option
from the drop-down list.
Click MB3 here
Notice that all of the features in the list, except for the two fixed datum axis,
branch out under the first feature in the list. The Quick Look option shows the
parent/child relationships in a tree structure format.
Suppress the two Fixed Datum Axis by selecting the

checkboxes to remove the checkmark.
Before unsuppressing the features we will change the listing method back to
Timestamp Order. This will give us a true creation order listing and will show
what features where created from first to last.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Place the cursor over the Feature Name header in the Model
Navigator, select MB3 and choose the Timestamp Order
option from the drop-down list.

the empty" checkbox in front of the first feature with MB1
to unsuppress the feature.
Continue down the list and unsuppress the remaining

features, one at a time, by selecting on each of the empty
checkboxes with MB1.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
7
TIP You can also use the Shift and CTRL keys to select multiple features
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
from the Model Navigator and then use MB3 one any of the selected
features to Suppress/Unsuppress them together.
Step 7 Find the values that control the Thickness of the Web
Extrusion.
In the Model Navigator, place the cursor on

WEB_EXTRUSION(4), press MB3 and select Information.
Scroll through the Information window to see the various

parameters and controlling expressions.
The expressions p8 and p9 are identified as limits 1 and 2, these expressions

control the start and end distances from the generator geometry for the
extrusion. The values of -.125 and .125 produce a web thickness of .25. Note
that the Parent of this feature is the sketch S21:SKETCH (3).
Step 8 Identify the Expression that Controls the Distance from

the Large Hole Center to the Small Hole Center.
Since the web feature was generated from the sketch geometry, the obvious
place to look for the expression that controls the hole to hole distance is in the
sketch.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
7-13
In the Model Navigator, place the cursor on

S21:SKETCH(3), press MB3 and select Edit Parameters.
Orient the view to the Front using the View toolbar.
Click here and select

the Front icon
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
7
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
The expression in question can clearly be identified,

arm_length=8.5
Orient the view back to the Trimetric using the View toolbar.
Choose Cancel in the Edit Sketch Dimensions dialog box.
Step 9 Close the Model Navigator.
Choose the Model Navigator icon again (UNIX) to

close the Model Navigator or select the tack icon again
(Windows) and drag the cursor off the Model Navigator to
collapse it.
Step 10 Determine how the Large Hole Feature is located.
To find the answer to this question, you will select a feature directly from the
graphics screen rather than from a list, which can take more time when trying to
identify a specific feature.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Choose Information→Feature.
Select the Large Thru Hole feature in the graphic window

and accept it if necessary. You can zoom, pan or rotate the
part to get a better look at the feature.
Choose MB2.
The information window pops up. It can be seen that p17 is a parallel
positioning dimension with a value of 0 (zero). The logical assumption can be
made that the hole is located Point to Point relative to the Large Knuckle
extrusion.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
7
This finding can be further confirmed by the following actions.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
Choose the Edit Positioning icon from the Edit

Feature toolbar.
Select LARGE_THRU_HOLE(7) and choose MB2.
The p17 expression appears at the arc center of the extrusion and hole. If you
don't see the expression, rotate the part.
Cancel the Edit Positioning dialog box.
Step 11 Identify where an expression is used.
Choose Tools→Expression.
Select the expression, small_dia=1.25.
Choose the Used by icon.
The information window appears and the expression is identified as one used
on an object A2 in the S21:SKETCH(3) feature.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
7-15
Close the Information window and cancel the Expression

dialog box.
Choose Information→Feature.
Select S21:SKETCH(3).
Choose the Object Dependency Browser button.
The child objects of the sketch are listed; notice that A2 is present.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
7
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
Select ArcĆA2.
The arc is highlighted in the graphic window. The expression's associated

feature and object has now been identified.
Cancel the Object Dependency Browser dialog box.
Step 12 Measure a distance.
Using the Layer Settings icon , make layer 21 the work

layer and all other layers invisible.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Choose Analysis"Distance.
Choose the Point Constructor button.
Choose the Quadrant Point icon.
Select the arc as shown below.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
7
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
Select the
arc here.
Choose the Point Constructor button again.
The Quadrant Point is still selected.
Select the other arc as shown below.
Select the
arc here.
The Information window appears and the 3ĆD and 2ĆD distances should report
a value of 10.625.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
7-17
SUMMARY In this lesson you were instructed on how to
ÉÉÉ
query a model to determine creation method
ÉÉÉ
and design intent. These skills are important
7 because of the need to review part files that
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
have been created by other users.
In this lesson, you:

Opened the Model Navigator.
Identified Expressions.
Reviewed the model construction using
Playback.
Reviewed the model construction using
Suppress & Unsuppress.
Identified where an expression was used.
Measured a distance.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Assemblies
Lesson 8
PURPOSE To introduce the Unigraphics Assembly Modeling application.
Activate the Assemblies application.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Set your Load Options. 8

Add Components to an assembly.
Reposition Components in an assembly.
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
8-1
Definitions and Descriptions
Assembly
An assembly is a part file which contains component objects. It is a collection of

pointers to piece parts and/or subĆassemblies. In the figure below, the toy laser
gun is an assembly consisting of many components.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ SubĆAssembly
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ A subĆassembly is an assembly used as a component within a higher level
assembly. The figure below shows the subĆassembly of the Integrated Circuit
board for the toy laser gun. A subĆassembly has components of its own.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Component Objects
A component object is the entity that contains the pointer that links the
assembly back to the master component part.
A component object can also be a subĆassembly made up of other component

parts and/or component objects.
Shown below are component objects of the sub-assembly. Every piece of the
Integrated Circuit board is a separate component object.
Component
Object
Component
Objects
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
8-3
Component Parts
A component part is a part file pointed to by a component object within an

assembly. The actual geometry is stored in the component part and is
referenced, not copied, by the assembly.
The term piece part is used to refer to master geometry as it exists outside of an
assembly.
Top level assembly

component component
piece part piece part
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
SubĆassembly
This is a
component part of
the top level
assembly.
component component component

piece part piece part piece part Component
parts of the
subĆassembly
EDS Unigraphics NX
General Assembly Concepts
There are two basic ways to define an assembly model.
TopĆDown Modeling
BottomĆUp Modeling (Demonstrated in this manual)
TopĆDown Modeling
As the name suggests, an assembly is created at the top level hierarchy and
parts are filed down the hierarchy, creating subĆassemblies and components.
BottomĆUp Modeling
A BottomĆUp assembly modeling approach starts by identifying the lowest level

piece parts that will make up the assembly. Component parts and
subĆassemblies are created as the process moves up the assembly level
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
hierarchy.
Combining Both Approaches

ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
It may be more practical for the methods to be combined. For example,
purchased or existing hardware for the assembly may be added using the
bottomĆup method, new subassemblies and piece parts may be defined in a top
down mode as the design progresses, and finally existing fasteners may be
added in a bottom up mode from a standard parts library.
Designing in Context
The ability to make a component of an assembly the work part while leaving the
assembly itself as the displayed part allows the assembly to be designed in
context. All new geometry that is created is added to the work part. Edits can
be made to the features and expressions residing within the work part.
If a component exists several times in the assembly (i.e. a fastener), any change
to the component while it is the work part will affect all the other occurrences
as well.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
8-5
Bottom Up Design
In the BottomĆUp approach, component parts are designed separate from the
assembly and later added to the assembly. This approach applies to purchased
parts or existing parts.
First, the pin is created in a Then, the pin is added to the

separate part file outside assembly as a component.
the assembly.
locator_pin.prt
ÏÏÏ All assemblies are automatically updated, when opened, to reflect changes
ÏÏÏ made to the component parts. If hole features are added to the solid in a
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
component part they will be seen in all occurrences of the components in the
assembly when it is opened.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Load Options
When an assembly part file is opened using File→Open, the system must find
and load any component parts that are referenced by that assembly. Load
Options establish how and from where the system loads the component parts.
The Load Options dialog box is accessed by choosing File→Options→Load

Options.
Where to look for

component parts
Which components
will be loaded
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Controls whether
components are fully
or partially loaded
Controls what to do if
a component is not
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
found
EDS
All Rights Reserved
8-7
Load Method
The Load Method determines where the system will search for the component
parts when an assembly is opened. There are three possible settings.
The As Saved method looks for each component part in the same
directory it was in when the assembly was last saved.
The From Directory method looks for each component in the same
directory as the assembly part.
The Search Directories method looks for each component in directories
specified in a userĆdefined list.
Load States
The Load Options also controls whether component parts will be fully loaded,
partially loaded, or unloaded when an assembly is opened. These are referred
to as load states.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
Fully Loaded
A part is fully loaded if all of its data is loaded into system memory.
All components can be fully loaded by changing the Load Components option
to All Components and toggling Use Partial Loading to off before opening the
assembly.
Partially Loaded
When a part is partially loaded, the system pulls only the data required to
display the part into memory. Components will be partially loaded if Partial
Loading is toggled on when the assembly is opened.
Partially loading components reduces the memory requirements and improves

performance. This is beneficial when working with large assemblies.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Unloaded
A component part is unloaded if it is not loaded when the assembly is opened.

Component parts may be refrained from loading by changing the Load
Components option to No Components before opening the assembly.
This will drastically reduce the amount of memory required and improve system
performance but no component geometry will be seen. Individual components
or subassemblies may be opened as desired to work on them using File→Open.
Load Failure
The Abort Load on Failure option controls how the system behaves if a
component part is not found based on the current load method.
When toggled On, the system will not load any parts unless all of the
components are found. The first component it is unable to find will be
ÏÏÏ
listed in an Open Error window.
When toggled Off, the system will open the assembly and load any of the
ÏÏÏ
components that it can find. Those components that are not found will be
listed in an Open Warning window and left unloaded. ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
8-9
Component Editing
A component part may be added to an assembly by choosing the Add Existing
Component icon from the Assemblies toolbar or the Add Existing button in the
Components PullĆDown menu under Assemblies. Turn ON the Assemblies
application to access the Assemblies toolbar or the Components PullĆDown
menu. This toolbar/menu contains most of the functions that affect the
hierarchical structure of the assembly and the relationships between
components. The Assemblies toolbar and the Components PullĆDown menu
will be available as long as the Assemblies application is turned ON.
1
3
4
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
2
or 2
1
EDS Unigraphics NX
The component part to add is specified in the Select Part dialog box.
ÏÏÏ
There are several ways to identify the part in this dialog box: ÏÏÏ
Select the Choose Part File button to retrieve an unopened part.
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
Select a previously loaded part from the list.
Enter the name of a previously loaded part.
Select an existing component in the graphics window.
Select an existing component in the Assembly Navigator display.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
8-11
After the part is identified, the Add Existing Part dialog box appears so that it
may be established how the existing part will be added as a component object to
the assembly and what information is stored with it. At this time, the only
change from defaults will be the placement of the part on the Original layers.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Reference Set Ć Allows you to control the amount of data that is loaded from
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
each component and viewed in the context of an assembly.
Default reference sets are, Empty and Entire Part.
Reference sets may be manually created or automatically created.
NOTE: In order for a BODY" reference set to be created

automatically the following line must be set in the ug_english.def
and ug_mectric.def environment files.
Assemblies_ModelReferenceSet: BODY
Layer Options - Defines which layer the objects in the new component will be
added to in the current work part.
Work - Places all objects from the component part on the current work
layer.
Original - Places each object from the component part on the same layer
in which it resides in the component part file.
As Specified - Places all objects from the component on the layer
specified in the Specified Layer entry field.
EDS Unigraphics NX
The Displayed Part

Unigraphics allows multiple part files to be open at the same time either
implicitly as a result of being referenced by a loaded assembly or explicitly
through the use of File→Open. The part file, whether it be an assembly or
component, that is currently displayed in the graphics window, is called the
Displayed Part.
The Displayed Part can be changed by:

Using the Selection toolbar and the Select Components option.
Choosing Window→More Parts (Change Displayed Part dialog box)
Choosing the Window Loaded Part List, which contains up to the last ten
loaded parts for selection to be the displayed part.
Using the Assembly Navigator pop-up menu. (this will not be covered in
this manual)
Selection Toolbar
The selection toolbar may be used anytime the selection of a component for ÏÏÏ
modification or the extraction of data is required. This method of editing uses
ÏÏÏ
an Object/Action approach, where the object needing editing is selected first
from the graphic window and then the necessary action is defined. This lesson
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
will focus on the use of the Select Components option.
Select
Components
Depending on which category the user has selected, the Type Filter may be used
to narrow the band of selectable objects.
Components
EDS
All Rights Reserved
8-13
Reset Select All Deselect

All Up One
Level
All icons not shown
Once an object has been selected from the graphic window, mouse button 3
(MB3) may be used to select an available operator for that object.

selected object for the pop-up dialog to appear.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Window
Choosing Window→More Parts will activate the Change Displayed Part dialog
box, listing all loaded parts except the one currently displayed.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
When this dialog box is active, a part may be selected by:
Choosing it from the list of loaded parts.

Entering the name in the Part Name entry field.
Selecting geometry from the graphics area (if the current displayed part is
an assembly).
EDS
All Rights Reserved
8-15
The Work Part
The part in which geometry is created and edited is termed the Work Part. The
Work Part may be the displayed part or any component part which is contained
in the displayed assembly part.
When a part file is opened, it will initially be both the displayed and the work
part. The displayed part and the work part do not need to be the same. In a
case where the displayed part is not the work part, the work part will be
displayed in color and the other component parts will be deĆemphasized.
The Work Part can be changed by:
Using the Selection toolbar and the Select Components option.
Choosing the Make Work Part icon on the Assemblies tool bar.
Choosing Assemblies→Context Control→Set Work Part.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Using the Assembly Navigator popĆup menu. (not covered in this
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
manual).
NOTE: When a component is made the work part, the

component's reference set is changed to Entire Part. When the
component is no longer the work part, the reference set is returned
to its original condition.
Selection Toolbar
Select
Components
Once an object has been selected from the graphic window, mouse button 3
(MB3) may be used to select an available operator for that object.
EDS Unigraphics NX

selected object for the pop-up dialog to appear.
ÏÏÏ
Make Work Part icon ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
Choosing the Make Work Part icon will activate the Set Work Part
dialog box.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
8-17
When this dialog is active, a part may be identified by:

Choosing it from the list of loaded parts.
Selecting geometry from the graphics screen.
Entering the part name in the Part Name entry field.
Choosing the Displayed Part button changes the work part back to the whole
assembly. This makes the displayed part and the work part the same.
Repositioning Components
To access the Reposition Components dialog, the Assemblies application must
first be turned ON. The Reposition Components dialog can be accessed by:
Choosing Reposition Component icon on the Assemblies tool bar.

Choosing Assemblies→Components→Reposition Component.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
After Reposition Component is chosen and a component object is selected the

repositioning dialog appears and a dynamic repositioning coordinate system
appears in the graphic window.
Rotate Rotate
Translate About A Between
Line Two Axes
Rotate Reposition
Point to About A
Point Point
Rotation
Handle
ÏÏÏ
Vertex
ÏÏÏ
Handle
Axis
Handle
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
Dynamic Repositioning
Coordinate System
Component objects may be repositioned by using the six options at the top of
the dialog window or interactively dragged using the dynamic coordinate
system.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
8-19
Dragging Components Objects

Component objects may be dragged three different ways:
LeftĆRight UpĆDown
Along an Axis of the coordinate system
Rotated about an axis of the coordinate system.
LeftĆRight UpĆDown
After the component object has been selected, it may be dragged left or right
and up or down, simply by placing the cursor any where in the graphic window
and holding MB1 down. If one of the coordinate system's axis or rotation
handles is currently selected, you must first select the vertex handle to deselect
the other handles. To move the component in the third dimension, while the
object is selected, rotate the part using your spaceball or MB3 Rotate (F7), exit
the rotation mode and continue to drag the object.
ÏÏÏ Dragging along an axis of the coordinate system

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
After a component object has been selected, it may be dragged along an axis of
the coordinate system by selecting on one of the axis handles. In addition the
Distance and Snap Increment text fields become active.
Axis Handle Distance field
Snap
Increment
field
Snap Increment
toggle
Keying in a positive or negative value in the distance text field and pressing
return will cause the object to be moved that distance value along the selected
axis. The Snap Increment value acts as a detent, which causes the object to snap
to the incremental value as the object is dragged along the axis. The Snap
Increment option may be toggled off and on as desired.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Rotation about an axis of the coordinate system

After a component object has been selected, it may be dragged about an axis of
the coordinate system by selecting on one of the rotation handles. In addition
the Angle and Snap Increment text fields become active.
Rotation
Handle Angle field
Snap
Increment
field
Snap Increment
toggle
Keying in a positive or negative value in the angle text field and pressing return
ÏÏÏ
will cause the object to be rotated that value about the respective axis. The
Snap Increment value acts as a detent, which causes the object to snap to the
incremental value as the object is dragged about the axis. The Snap Increment ÏÏÏ
option may be toggled off and on as desired. ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
Point to Point
Point to Point allows a component to be translated by indicating a first point

and a second point. The orientation of the translated component with respect
to the second point will be identical to that of the original component with
respect to the first point.
First Point
Second Point (arc center)
(arc center)
EDS
All Rights Reserved
8-21
Translate
Translate provides a means to move a component a delta value with respect to
the reposition coordinate system. Translated components maintain the original
orientation relative to other parts.
Rotate About a Point

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ This option may be used to rotate components about a vector parallel to the ZC
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
axis and passing through a specified reference point, as shown below.
A positive rotation direction is counterclockwise.
Axis of
Component Rotation
being
repositioned
Reference
Point
ZC
YC
XC Angle = 90 degrees
ZC
YC
XC
EDS Unigraphics NX
Rotate About a Line
This option allows components to be rotated about a defined vector which is

not necessarily parallel to the ZC axis.
To use this method:
Define a point that the vector is to pass through.

Define the vector using the Vector constructor.
Key in the desired value of rotation.
Choose Apply.
A positive rotation direction is counterclockwise relative to the defined vector.
Component being
repositioned
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Defined
vector ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
Axis of
Rotation
Angle=90 degrees
EDS
All Rights Reserved
8-23
Saving the Work Part
After editing, the work part must be saved to keep the modifications. The
File→Save option allows the saving of the work part without saving all of the
parts in the displayed assembly.
If the work part is a piece part (lowest level component), only that part
will be saved.
If the work part is an assembly or subassembly, any modified component
parts below it are also saved. Higher level assemblies will not be saved
even if they were modified.
TIP File"Save All saves all loaded parts in the session that have been
modified regardless of the work part designation.
TIP Open files for which the user does not have write privilege may not be
ÏÏÏ saved.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Activity 1 - Adding and Repositioning a Component

In this activity components will be added to an assembly. These components
will then be repositioned to the proper locations. The Load Options must be set
properly before loading the assembly.
Step 1 Set the Load Options.
Choose File→Options→Load Options.
Ensure Load Method is set to From Directory.
Ensure Use Partial Loading is turned ON.
Choose OK.
Step 2 Open the test stand assembly.
ÏÏÏ
Choose the Open icon. ÏÏÏ
From the laser_gun subdirectory, open the part
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
pau_test_assm_1.
Save the part as ***_test_assm_1 where *** represent your

initials.
Choose the Modeling icon.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
8-25
Choose the Assemblies icon.
Step 3 Add the test stand to the assembly.
The test stand is the part that the circuit board fits in for assembly and circuitry
testing.
Choose the Add Existing Components icon from the

Assemblies toolbar.
Choose Choose Part File.
From the laser_gun subdirectory, select

pau_mounting_block.
Choose BODY from the Reference Set pull down and

choose OK.
ÏÏÏ Choose Reset and OK.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
Choose Cancel in the Select Part dialog box.
Fit the view.
The illustration below shows how the mounting block is to be oriented to the
circuit board. The next step will direct you through the repositioning of the
mounting block.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Step 4 Reposition the mounting block.
Choose the Reposition Component icon.
Select the mounting block and choose MB2.
Select the rotation handle shown below.
Select this
rotation handle.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Change the Snap Increment to 15.
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
Ensure that Snap Increment is toggled ON.
Drag the selected rotation handle with MB1 until the angle
text field indicates -90.
Choose the Point to Point icon.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
8-27
Select the first and second points as directed by the CUE

line and shown below.
Second point
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
First point
The mounting block moves to the new position.
Choose OK.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Step 5 Add a new component to the subassembly.

In the graphic window, select the pau_ic_board_13 as shown
below and confirm if necessary. (Verify the component name
in the Status line)
Select here
Place the cursor over the component and select MB3.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose Make Work Part from the Pop-Up menu.
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
Choose OK to acknowledge the Read Only warning.
Choose the Add Existing Component icon.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
8-29
Choose Choose Part File.
Select the part pau_c2_13 and choose MB2.
Change the Positioning method to Reposition.

choose OK.
Press Reset in the Point Constructor dialog box, followed by

OK to locate the part at Zero.
Fit the view.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
Newly added
component.
Choose the Point to Point icon.
Choose the Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center icon.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Reposition the component as shown below. It may be

necessary to rotate and zoom in on the view so that the
proper arc centers are selected (Remember: Holding down
MB2 and dragging the cursor on the graphic window rotates
the view).
Select this arc

center as the
Second point
Select this arc

center as the
First point
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
The component moves to the new position.
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
Choose OK.
Choose Cancel.
Step 6 Save the subassembly.
Since you do not presently have write access to the subassembly you will
perform a saveĆas on it.
Choose File→Save As.
In your home directory save the circuit board assembly by

keying in ***_ic_board_13 and choose OK.
The system now prompts you to perform a saveĆas on the top level assembly.
You already own this part file, so this step is not necessary.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
8-31
Choose Cancel.
Choose OK to continue the SaveĆAs.
Choose OK to acknowledge the SaveĆAs Report.
Step 7 Make the Work Part the Displayed Part.
Choose the Make Work Part icon from the Assemblies

toolbar.
Choose Displayed Part.
Step 8 Save and close the assembly.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Choose File→Close→Save All and Close.
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ Choose OK to confirm the close.
Step 9 Reopen the saved assembly.
This step will demonstrate the importance of Load Options.
Choose File→Recently Opened Parts→***_test_assm_1.
A warning message appears. Currently the load options are set to look for the
component parts in the same directory as the assembly part file. Your assembly
file is saved in your home directory while the component parts are stored in the
course parts directory.
Choose OK to accept the warning.
Choose File→Close→All Parts.
Choose OK.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Step 10 Set the Load Options.
Choose File→Options→Load Options.
Toggle the As Saved option ON.
Choose OK.
Step 11 Reopen the saved assembly.
Choose File→Recently Opened Parts→***_test_assm_1.
This time all of the components are opened.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
8-33
SUMMARY An assembly is a part file which contains

component objects. It is a collection of pointers
to piece parts and/or subĆassemblies.
Assemblies may be created using the

TopĆDown, BottomĆUp, or a combination of
the two methods.
Assemblies provides the ability to design in

context.
ÏÏÏ In this lesson you:

ÏÏÏ Activated the Assemblies application.
ÏÏÏ

8
ÏÏÏ

Set your Load Options.
Added and repositioned a component in an
assembly.
EDS Unigraphics NX
The Master Model
The Master Model

Lesson 9
PURPOSE To introduce the Master Model concept.
Review an existing Master Model.

Create a new Master Model.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
9
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
9-1
The Master Model
The Assembly Modeler
The Unigraphics assembly is a file containing stored links to the part files that
are pieces of the assembly. The geometry that defines the piece parts of the
assembly resides in the original part file only, there is no duplication in the
assembly file.
A link in the assembly file is referred to as a component object. A component

object stores information about the piece part such as its location, attributes,
origin, orientation, permissions, degree of display, and its relationship to other
parts.
The Master Model Concept
Applying the Master Model Concept in a Drafting situation is simply the

creation of an assembly consisting of one component part. It is valuable as a
means of promoting concurrent engineering. The person responsible for the
design of a part is not the same person responsible for all of the downstream
applications performed on the part. These downstream applications may
include drafting, manufacturing, analysis, etc.
The Master Model Concept is also valuable in protecting the design intent of
the part from inadvertent corruption by a downstream user. The downstream
user will have write privileges to the assembly file, but only read privileges to
the model. The solid model is referenced for the application work, but the
downstream user will not have the ability to change it.
ÏÏÏ Because the application information in the assembly or non-master file is

ÏÏÏ
9 referencing the original master model part, edits to the master model will be
ÏÏÏ updated in the non-master part file.
Implementing Master Model theory allows diverse yet dependent design

processes to access the same master geometry during development. Therefore,
the entire part creation process becomes more efficient allowing many
disciplines to work at the same time and allowing master model edits to be
automatically updated in non-master parts.
EDS Unigraphics NX
The Master Model
The power of implementing a Master Model is that the independent design

processes are dependent on the same master geometry during development.
Drafting Assembly
Master Model
Analysis N/C
Each application uses a separate assembly file. When the Master Model is
revised, the other applications will automatically update with minimal or no
associativity loss.
The design intent of the various design applications can be maintained through
protection of the Master Model.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
9
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
9-3
The Master Model
Master Model Example
Manufacturing engineers have the need to design fixture devices, define

machining operations, and designate cutter tools and save this data in their
models.
By creating a manufacturing assembly" and adding a component to it, they can

then generate their application specific geometry or data in a separate part file
which references the master geometry:
This avoids duplication of model geometry

Different users can work in separate files simultaneously
abcd1234_mfg.prt
(owned by manufacturing engineer)
Contains manufacturing data

and a component object which
references master model part
abcd1234.prt
ÏÏÏ
(owned by designer)
ÏÏÏ
9
ÏÏÏ
Contains master model geometry
The manufacturing engineer has ownership of the assembly file without

necessarily having write access to the master model which is owned by the
designer.
EDS Unigraphics NX
The Master Model
Master Model Drawing Guidelines

1. Create the 'drawing' file
(Open seedpart_mm or seedpart_in, FILE→SAVE AS, xxxxxxx_dwg)
2. Start the Assemblies application
(APPLICATION→ASSEMBLIES)
3. Add the part to be detailed as a component
(ASSEMBLIES→COMPONENTS→ADD EXISTING)
4. Change to the Drafting Application
(APPLICATION→DRAFTING)
5. Adjust the paper; name, units, size, projection angle
(DRAWING→EDIT)
6. Add the drawing formats; title block, border, revision block, standard
notes (Site dependent)
7. Set View Display Preferences; hidden line removal, section
backgrounds, threads
(PREFERENCES→VIEW DISPLAY)
8. Add the first 'Imported' view; typically top or front
(DRAWING→ADD VIEW→IMPORT VIEW)
9. Add more views; orthographic, detail, auxiliary, section, isometric,
exploded
(DRAWING→ADD VIEW→ORTHOGRAPHIC VIEW)
10. Adjust the views; scale, move, align, remove
(DRAWING→EDIT VIEW)
11. Adjust the View Display Preferences, per view
(PREFERENCES→VIEW DISPLAY)
ÏÏÏ
12. Clean up individual views with view dependent edits; erase object, edit ÏÏÏ
9
ÏÏÏ

entire object, edit object segment
(EDIT→VIEW DEPENDENT EDIT)
13. Add the Utility Symbols; centerlines, target symbols, intersection
symbols
(INSERT→UTILITY SYMBOL)
14. Add the dimensions
(INSERT→DIMENSION)
15. Add the notes, labels, and GD&T's
(INSERT→ANNOTATION)
EDS
All Rights Reserved
9-5
The Master Model
Activity 1 - Exploring a Master Model Assembly

This activity will demonstrate the advantages of a Master Model Assembly.
Step 1 Choose File"Options"Load Options and ensure that

the Load Method is From Directory.
Step 2 Open the part file pau_tapedisp_dwg.
Make sure that you are selecting pau_tapedisp_dwg.
Step 3 Choose Drafting.
Step 4 Inspect the drawing for dimensional values.
Zoom in on section view A-A and note the slot width of .88
and the corner radius of .12. Both dimensions have been
rounded from the model dimensions to two decimal places.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
9
Slot Width
ÏÏÏ
Corner
Radius
EDS Unigraphics NX
The Master Model
Restore the view and note the drawing name, SH1, at the
lower left corner.
Step 5 Investigate the model.
Choose Modeling.
Choose Information→Feature and note that there are no

features.
Choose Tools→Expression and note that there are no

expressions.
Choose Assemblies→Reports→List Components.
An information window appears showing the assembly file structure for the file
pau_tapedisp_dwg and indicates that there is one component named
pau_tapedisp. This part contains the Master Model definition.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
9
ÏÏÏ
Close the information window.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
9-7
The Master Model
Step 6 Examine the display.
Choose Information→Object. Place the cursor over the solid

body. When the cursor changes to the cross with the ellipsis
(+...) select once. Pass the cursor over the numbers in the
QuickPick window until the solid body is highlighted, then
select it.
Choose OK.
An information window appears with information regarding the solid, its

owning part, and confirmation that it is a component.
Dismiss the information window.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
9 Step 7 Retrieve the Master Model file.
ÏÏÏ
Choose Open.
Choose pau_tapedisp from the list box.
Step 8 Edit the expression for Roll_width to .75
Choose Tools→Expression.
EDS Unigraphics NX
The Master Model
Select the Roll_width expression.
Replace the .875 value with .75 and choose OK.
The opening for the tape roll changes in width to accommodate the modified
dimension.
Step 9 Edit the blend on the inside of the spool cavity.

ÏÏÏ
Choose Edit→Feature→Parameters.
ÏÏÏ
9
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
9-9
The Master Model
Select the Blend(21) feature at the bottom of the list.

Confirm the selection with OK.
In the Radius Dynamic Input Field, key in a new value of

.06.
Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ
9
ÏÏÏ Step 10 Change Displayed Part to pau_tapedisp_dwg.
Choose Window→pau_tapedisp_dwg to change the

Displayed Part.
Choose Drafting.
Notice the drawing name now shows (OUT-OF-DATE) to remind you the
views are not updated.
EDS Unigraphics NX
The Master Model
Step 11 Update the drawing.
Choose Drawing→Update Views.
Choose All in the Update Views dialog box and choose OK.
Step 12 Zoom in on section A-A again to see the changes to the

master model reflected on the drawing
Slot Width
Corner
Radius
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
9
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
9-11
The Master Model
Activity 2 - Creating a Master Model Assembly

This activity will demonstrate creation of a Master Model Assembly.
Step 1 Open the part file pau_seedpart_in.
Step 2 Save the part as ***_dwg_1 where *** represent your

initials.
Step 3 Add the part pau_dwg_1 to the discipline specific

assembly file.
Check to see the Assemblies application is toggled on
(Choose Application→Assemblies, if it is not on).
Choose the Add Existing Component icon.
Choose the Choose Part File button.
Choose pau_dwg_1 from the parts directory, then OK.
Change the Positioning option to Absolute.

choose OK.
Press Reset in the Point Constructor dialog box, followed by

OK to locate the part at Zero.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
9
ÏÏÏ
Step 4 Choose Save.
EDS Unigraphics NX
The Master Model
SUMMARY This Master Model approach offers many

benefits to Unigraphics customers. If these two
files were readĆprotected by different
departments, distinct responsibilities would be
enforced by the protection and yet all of the
appropriate model data is shared by each of the
departments concerned. Users can access
whatever they want, whenever they want with
full confidence that no data or revision work
can be lost without active confirmation by the
users.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
9
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
9-13
The Master Model
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
9
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Drafting
Lesson 10
PURPOSE This lesson will introduce the fundamentals of the Unigraphics

Drafting application.
Edit drawings.
Add Views to Drawings.
Modify Preferences.
Create Utility Symbols.
Create Dimensions.
Create Annotations.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
10-1
Uses of the Drafting Application
The Drafting application can be used to rapidly create drawings of solid parts.
Some of the features of the Drafting application are:
Views may be added to the drawing just by indicating their location with
the cursor.
As orthographic views are added, they will automatically be aligned with
the parent view.
Every view is fully associated with the solid. If the solid is updated, the
views will also update.
Drafting annotations (dimensions, labels, and symbols with leaders) are
placed directly on the drawing.
Drafting annotations are fully associative to the geometry selected and
will update automatically to changes in the solid part.
Fully associative view boundaries automatically calculated when the
drawing is updated.
Drawing Display
Drawings may be displayed two different ways, full color or monochrome.
Full color is the default setting. In this mode objects are displayed in the color
that they appear in the modeling application and the background is the color
set by the Preferences"Visualization"Color Pallet"Edit Background dialog.
Monochrome Display provides a means for a drawing to appear more like an

actual drawing (black-on-white). Monochrome is toggle on or off by choosing
Preferences"Visualization"Color Pallet"Color Settings and then toggling
Monochrome Display. The foreground and background colors may be set in this
dialog. Show Widths may also be set here but only applies to drawings. When
Monochrome Display is toggled off, drawings will be displayed in full color.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Editing a Drawing
The Drawing"Edit option may be chosen to change the creation parameters of

a current drawing such as name, size, scale, units of measure, or projection
angle.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
10-3
The current state of the displayed drawing affects the edit options available.
The following are things to be aware of:
The projection angle can only be changed if no projected views exist on

the current drawing being modified.
The drawing may be edited to a larger or smaller size. However, if the
drawing is edited to a size so small that a view falls entirely outside the
boundary of the drawing, an error message will appear.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Activity 1 - Editing a Drawing

In this activity, the current drawing name, size and scale will be modified.
Step 1 Open the file pau_edit_1.
Step 2 Choose Drafting.
Step 3 Choose Drawing"Open and select 93A12345-5 from the

listing as the drawing to open and choose OK.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
10-5
Step 4 Rename the current drawing.
Choose Drawing"Edit.
Change the drawing name in the Selection text field to

93A12345Ć6.
Choose Apply and notice the drawing name update in the

graphics area.
Step 5 Change the current drawing size.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Change the values so that Height= 594, Length= 1100.
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose Apply and notice the drawing size update.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Step 6 Change the current drawing scale.
Enter a new drawing scale in the text fields (1/1) and choose
OK.
93A12345–6 (DWG) WORK
Multiple drawing edits may be performed before choosing Apply or OK.
NOTE: In order to save the drawing information or edits, the part

file must be saved.
Adding a View to a Drawing
The first view added is based on the view orientation selected from the list box
in the upper portion of the Add View dialog.
Once this view is added to the drawing, it determines scale, layer settings, as
well as the orthographic space and alignment of subsequent orthographic views.
It also establishes the part orientation on the drawing.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
10-7
Any modeling view may be used as the first view placed on a drawing.
View direction
ZC
YC
XC
Choosing Drawing"Add View displays the following dialog.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
View Type Icons
View Creation Steps
Viewpoint
Selection
List
View
Specific
Options
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
10-9
Create Centerline
When toggled ON, this option automatically creates linear, cylindrical, and bolt
circle centerlines (with a circular instance set) for views where the hole or pin
axis is perpendicular or parallel to the plane of the drawing view.
Removing Views From a Drawing
You can use the Drawing"Remove View option to remove one or more views
from a drawing.
Once a view is removed from a drawing, all drafting objects or view

modifications associated to that view are deleted.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Activity 2 - Adding a View to a Drawing

In this activity, a view will be added to the drawing previously created.
Step 1 Add a view to the drawing.
Choose File→Options→Load Options and select As Saved.
Open the part ***_dwg_1 or open pau_drawing_1_assm and

save as ***_drawing_1_assm.
Choose Drafting.
Choose Drawing→Edit; select B" size drawing.
Choose OK.
Choose Add View to Drawing.
The Top viewpoint is the default view orientation. Any one of the listed
viewpoints could be imported as the first view on the face of the drawing.
Ensure that the Create Center Line option is toggled On.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
10-11
Use the first mouse button to indicate a location near the

lower left corner of the drawing as shown.
View
View Center
View bounds are

ghosted to assist in
view placement
DWG1 (DWG) WORK
If there is a need to reposition the view after placement, choose the Move
button from the dialog box, then specify a new view center.
Note that the Top viewpoint of the part as it relates to model space is being
placed on the drawing such that it depicts an orthographic front view of the
part. This flexibility assures that the drawing views necessary to depict the part
may be placed on the drawing independent of the orientation of the part in
model space.
Notice the creation of the centerline.
Step 2 Place an orthographic View on the Drawing.
Choose the Orthographic View Icon.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Select the imported view as the parent view.
View bounds are

ghosted to assist in
view placement
Orthographic
View
Parent View
DWG1 (DWG) WORK
Use the first mouse button to indicate a location above the

parent view.
The location of the cursor relative to the base view determines the
Orthographic view projection from the parent view.
Step 3 Choose File"Save, do not close the part.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
10-13
Setting the View Display Preferences
Choosing Preferences"View Display produces the View Display dialog box.
The View Display dialog box may be used to define and edit the display of such
things as hidden lines, silhouettes, smooth edges, etc..
View
Selection
Box
View
Option
Buttons
Button
Specific
Options
Global
View
Options
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
The View Display dialog box may be used to preset preferences for subsequent
views added to the drawing, or this dialog box may be used to edit the settings
of existing drawing views. To edit the View Display preferences of an existing
view, select the view(s) from the drawing, or choose the view(s) from the
selection box.
Button Specific Options
The Button Specific Options area of the dialog box varies to support the
different View Option Buttons available. When each View Option Button is
selected the appropriate choices for the option are displayed in this area.
View Option Buttons
Hidden Lines
If the Hidden Line option is toggled Off, Hidden Line removal is not performed
and all hidden lines in the view will appear.
If the Hidden Line option is toggled On, the color, font and width of the hidden
line display is determined by the settings in the Color, Font, and Width option
menus.
Hidden Lines=Dashed
Hidden Lines=Invisible
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
10-15
Smooth Edges
Smooth edges are those edges that their adjacent faces have the same surface
tangent at the edge where they meet.
If the Smooth Edges option is toggled to the On position, the Color, Font and
Width option menus may be used to determine the appearance of the smooth
edges. The End Gaps option may be used to vary the edge intersection
appearance.
Smooth Smooth
Edges=On Edges=Off
Smooth Edges=Dashed
Visible Lines
The appearance of visible objects may be determined by using the Color, Font,
and Width option menus.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Virtual Intersections
Virtual Intersections are the theoretical sharp intersections that occur where
blended faces would intersect, where the display of smooth edges may cause
confusion.
If the Virtual Intersections option is toggled to the On position, the Color, Font
and Width option menus may be used to determine the appearance of the
virtual intersection display. The End Gaps option may be used to vary the edge
intersection appearance.
Virtual Intersections
Extracted Edges
The Extracted Edges option allows the edges of an assembly to be shown

without loading all of the component parts. Edges are extracted at the
component level and remain associative to the component.
Automatic Update
The Automatic Update option may be used to control whether a drawing view
is updated after the model has been changed.
If Automatic Update is turned on, hidden lines, smooth edges, and silhouettes
are updated after changes are made to the model. If Automatic Update is
toggled off, these edges are not updated.
This option does not affect section views, or detail views made from section
views. These views always automatically update after the model is changed.
NOTE: If the Preferences"Drafting"Suppress View

Update option is turned On, no automatic update will occur during
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
the return to the Drafting application. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
10-17
Activity 3 - Setting View Display Preferences

In this activity, you will practice setting the view display preferences.
Step 1 Continue using the part ***_dwg_1 or

***_drawing_1_assm, whichever is applicable.
Step 2 Change the view display preferences for the imported view
added to the drawing.
Choose Preferences→View Display.
Select the imported view.
With the Hidden Lines View Option Button depressed, make

sure Hidden Line is toggled on.
Set the Hidden Line Font to Dashed.
With the Smooth Edges View Option Button depressed,

toggle the Smooth Edges option off.
Choose OK.
Step 3 Save and close the part file.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Creating Utility Symbols
The Utility Symbols option creates various centerlines, offset center points,
target points, and intersection symbols. The utility symbol dialog is activated by
choosing Insert→Utility Symbol in the Drafting application.
The Utility Symbols dialog box consists of four distinct areas: symbol icons,
position options, symbol display parameters and preference options.
Symbol Display Parameters control the creation of each utility symbol as it is

placed. These parameters may also be used to modify existing drafting symbols.
Symbol
Icons
Point Position
Options
Symbol
Display
Parameters
Preference
ÏÏÏ
Options
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
10-19
Automatic Centerline
This option automatically creates centerlines in any existing view(s) where the
hole or pin axis is perpendicular or parallel to the plane of the drawing view. If
a series of holes in a circle (bolt hole circle) are not a circular instance set, then
a linear centerline is created for each hole.
The following views are not supported:
Faceted representation view

Unfolded section view
Revolved section view
Associativity of Utility Symbols
A utility symbol's placement is controlled by a position on an object. The system

will automatically size the symbol components to the objects used to create it,
based upon the symbol display parameters.
Deleting a Utility Symbol
A utility symbol may be deleted by choosing Edit→Delete and selecting the

symbol to delete. The symbols may be selected at any position.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Creating a Cylindrical Centerline
A cylindrical centerline that conforms to ASME Y14.5M-1994 standards may

be created through points, arcs, or cylindrical faces. The point position options
allow a centerline associated to objects other than cylinders to be created.
The following associativity rules apply to cylindrical centerlines:
A cylindrical centerline must be associated to two point positions.

A cylindrical centerline is updated when the data to which it is associated
is moved or reĆsized.
If one of the objects to which a cylindrical centerline is associated is
deleted, the centerline will conform to the Retain Annotations setting
setting found under Preferences→Drafting.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
10-21
Activity 4 - Creating a Cylindrical Centerline

In this activity, cylindrical centerlines will be created using both the arc center
and cylindrical face options.
Step 1 Open the part pau_symbols_1.
Step 2 Rename the part ***_symbols_1 where *** represent your

initials.
Step 3 Create a Cylindrical Centerline symbol.
Choose Drafting.
Choose Insert→Utility Symbol
Select the Cylindrical Centerline icon.
Set the Point Position option to Arc Center.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Select two positions, indicated below, for placement of a

single centerline symbol. Repeat for the other two pairs of
positions.
Select this pair of edges.
Select this pair of edges.
Select this pair of edges,

confirming your selections if
needed.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
10-23
The resulting cylindrical centerlines are shown.
Step 4 Create a centerline symbol using the Cylindrical Face

option.
Continue using the Cylindrical Centerline icon.
Change the Point Position option to Cylindrical Face.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Place the cursor over the cylindrical face as shown and select
the face using the first mouse button.
Indicate end points 1 and 2 of the cylindrical centerline,

using cursor locations as shown. The indicated end points are
projected to the axis of the cylindrical face, and two drafting
points are created that are associated to the selected face.
1* *2
Step 5 Repeat the procedure for the two counterbored holes in

the orthographic view.
This time, the face selection will need to be confirmed, as the system will select
the main, or outside face first. This face will highlight in the view that the face
was selected, as well as in the adjacent view.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
Toggle Multiple Centerlines to On. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
10-25
Use the numbers from the QuickPick window to select the

inner cylindrical face.
Select this
face
Indicate end points 1 and 2 of the cylindrical centerline,

using cursor locations as shown.
1* *2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Make a similar centerline through the lower counterbored

hole by selecting the counter bored face shown below.
Select this
face
Notice how you did not have to select the endpoints for this centerline, this is
because Multiple Centerlines was turned on. The completed centerlines are
shown below.
Step 6 Create Automatic Centerlines. ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
10
Choose File"Close"Reopen Selected Parts. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
10-27
Choose ***_symbols_1.
Choose OK twice.
Dismiss the Information window.
Choose Insert"Utility Symbol.
Choose Automatic Centerline.
Hold the Ctrl key down and select the following views from
the list:
FRONT@16
ORTHO@26
RIGHT@10
SX@25
Choose Apply.
Step 7 Choose File"Save, do not close the part.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Creating Dimensions
The various dimensions types may be accessed two different ways. One way is
by choosing Insert→Dimension and then selecting the desired dimension. The
other way is by choosing the dimension from the customizable Dimension
toolbar.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
10-29
Dimension Dialog
Whenever a dimension type is selected a dimension dialog specific to that type

of dimension is displayed.
Second Fold
Name of First selection Location Origin
dimension type selection
Line and point

type definitions
for Cylindrical
Point type dimensions
Vector definitions
for Angular
dimensions Annotation editor
for appended text
Local
Preferences
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Vector Definition for Angular Dimensions
The Vector Definitions options are only available when creating an angular
dimension. An angle dimension is the measurement between two vectors. The
various options provide a means of defining the vectors
Existing Line
Two Points
Extension Line
Arc Center
Enter Angle
Horizontal Right
Vertical Up
Horizontal Left
Vertical Down
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
10-31
Line and Point Definition for Cylindrical Dimensions
These options are only available when creating a cylindrical dimension. The
various options provide a means of defining the lines or points that the
dimension measures.
Existing Line
Inferred Point
Control Point
Intersection Point
Arc Center
Tangent Point
Baseline
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Dimension Local Preferences
The Dimensions dialog box contains options that control the display and
placement of dimensions. These local preference settings may be changed with
each dimension created.
Local
Preferences
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
10-33
Appended Text Controls
Text or symbols may be added to dimensions via the Annotation Editor and
toggling on Use Appended Text.
Annotation Editor
To create appended text:
Select the desired dimension type.

Choose the Annotation Editor button.
In the annotation editor select the required position button. One or all
four positions may be used on the same dimension.
ÏÏÏ
Below
Before After Above
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
Enter the desired text for the different positions as required and choose
OK.
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
NOTE: If the position arrow displays solid, that is an indicator

that text is present and will be displayed in the dimension. If that
text is not desired, select the position button and delete the text.
Toggle Use Appended Text on.

Dimension the object.
Any text entered in the appended text fields will continue to be added to any
new dimensions created unless the Use Appended Text option is toggled off.
Precision Options
The Precision button activates the Dimension Precision dialog box which is used
to independently control the precision of both dimension values and tolerance
values. Both single (Primary) and dual (Secondary) dimensional precision is
supported.
If the dimension display format is set to fractional values (instead of decimal

values) then the Dimension Precision dialog box will show fractional values for
the nominal precision option.
This pull down is active when

using dual dimensions.
OR
For decimal For fractional

precision precision
Example: X.XXX Example: X.X ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
10
R 2.195 R 2.2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
10-35
Tolerance Type and Tolerance Value Options
The display of tolerance values may be controlled using the Tolerance Types
shown below.
Click here
Bilateral
Unilateral+
Unilateral-
Bilateral
No tolerance
+Limit, 2 Lines
Tolerance Types -Limit, 2 Lines
+Limit, 1 Line
-Limit, 1 Line
Basic
Reference
Diameter Reference
Not to Scale
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Tolerance Value Options
The Tolerance Value fields are active in respect to the units button, Inches or
Millimeters, that has been selected. The units buttons are active depending on
the dual dimension format that has been selected by
Preferences→Annotation→Units.
Use the Tolerance Value fields to enter upper and lower tolerance values for
both Inch and SI units. Any value entered in these fields will be interpreted as
positive unless a negative (-) value is specified.
Tolerance Values
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
10-37
Some examples of different tolerance values and displays are shown below.
nominal size= 5.50 inches

upper tolerance = .030
lower tolerance = -.010
Equal Bilateral
Only the upper tolerance value
is used; the lower value is ignored.
5.50 ".03
nominal size= 5.50 inches

Unilateral -
The negative limit below (-TOL) will
show value while the positive limit
above (+.000) will be zero.
5.50 ) .00
* .01
nominal size = 5.50 inches

+ Limit 1 Line
Limits are calculated by adding the

positive tolerance value to the
dimension value for the upper limit of
5.53 – 5.49
your dimension, and subtracting the
negative value for the lower limit
Basic
Displays a basic dimension

enclosed in a rectangular box
around the dimension. No
tolerance values are displayed.
5.50
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Placement Options
Dimensions placement on the drawing may be controlled using the options

shown below.
Auto Placement
Manual Placement, Arrows In
Manual Placement, Arrows Out
Auto placement automatically centers the dimension between the extension

lines if space allows, or moves the text outside the extension lines if necessary.
Auto placement also controls whether the leader lines come from left or right.
When using the Manual Placement, Arrows In or Arrows Out options, the
dimension is placed at the cursor location specified. The leader line placement
is controlled manually using the Leader From option.
Initial Position
Cursor Initial Position Cursor
Movement Movement
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Final Position
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
cursor Final Position
position
cross hairs ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ cursor
position
In Auto" placement, the cursor is In Manual" placement the cursor is

insensitive to the horizontal direction sensitive to cursor position
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
10-39
Arrow Line and Extension Line Options
The display of arrow lines and extension lines for dimensions may be controlled
using the Arrow Line Display and Extension Line Display options shown below.
Display Arrow Display Arrow

on Side 1 on Side 2
Display Extension Display Extension
Line on Side 1 Line on Side 2
Example: 2 Arrows & 2 Extension Lines

8.0000
Example: Arrow 1 & Extension 2

8.0000
NOTE: Side 1 refers to the first object selected and Side 2 refers
to the second object selected.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Leader Direction Options
The dimension leader direction may be controlled by selecting one of the three
leader options. The leader option may be set prior to creating the dimension or
changed during placement of the dimension.
Example: Left R 2.000

Infer
From Left Example: Right R 2.000
From Right
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
10-41
Text Justification Options
Text justification may be controlled using the Horizontal and Vertical

Justification options. These are used when there is more than one line of
dimension text and/or symbols, such as appended text or GD&T symbols.
Vertical Justification Options
Horizontal Justification Options
6.000 Left/Top Justification

12 Places
6.000 Center/Middle Justification

12 Places
6.000
12 Places Right/Bottom Justification
ÏÏÏ
The origin of the dimension may be changed simply by selecting it and dragging
to the new position. The dimension will drag within the constraints that it was
ÏÏÏ
10 created, i.e. if Automatic Placement was used during creation, the dimension
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
will remain centered between the arrows.
EDS Unigraphics NX
In addition to the Dimension Local Preferences, there are Global Preferences

governing drafting views and entities. These are the Preferences found in the
Preferences pullĆdown menu shown below.
Global
Drafting
Preferences
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
10-43
Activity 5 - Creating Dimensions

In this activity, several dimensions will be created using various local settings on
the Dimensions dialog.
Step 1 Continue using the part ***_symbols_1.
Step 2 Set the work layer to 111 (category DIMS).
Choose Format→Layer Settings.
Choose layer 111.
Choose Make Work and OK.
NOTE: It will be necessary to set Dimension local preference

settings and the Global preferences to create each of the following
dimensions.
Step 3 Create a Horizontal dimension.
Choose Preferences→Annotation→Lettering. Set the

Lettering Types option menu to Dimension, and the
Character Size to .25. Choose OK.
Choose Insert"Dimension"Horizontal.
In the Horizontal dialog window choose the
Annotation Editor icon.
Choose the Appended Text Below icon.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Enter 6 EQ SPACES in text field and choose OK.
Notice that Use Appended Text was automatically toggled on.
Set the Precision for 2 decimal places.
Set the alignment methods to Center and Middle.
Set the Placement option menu to Auto Placement.
Select the two centerlines as shown in the figure below.
Select a cursor location to place the dimension on the

drawing.
Notice the extension lines are spaced from the linear centerlines, not the arc
centers.
Step 4 Create a Vertical dimension. ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
10
Choose Insert"Dimension"Vertical. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
10-45
Toggle Use Appended Text off.
Set the tolerance type to Equal Bilateral Tolerance.
Accept the default value in the Upper Tolerance field (.005).
Set the Precision to 3 decimal places.
Select the objects shown below.
Place the dimension on the drawing.
Step 5 Create a Cylindrical dimension.

Choose Insert"Dimension"Cylindrical.
Set the Precision to 1 decimal place.
Set the tolerance type to No Tolerance.
Select the outer edges of the cylinder to dimension as shown

below.
Select this edge
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Select this edge
EDS Unigraphics NX
Place the dimension on the drawing.
Step 6 Create a Radius NOT to Center dimension.
Choose Insert"Dimension"Radius.
Set the Placement Option to

Manual Placement, Arrows Out.
Select the arc and place the dimension on the drawing as

shown below.
Step 7 Create a Hole dimension.
Choose Insert"Dimension"Hole.
Select the arc and place the dimension on the drawing as

shown below.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
Step 8 Choose File"Save, do not close the part. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
10-47
Annotation Editor
The Annotation Editor is used to place other information on the drawing such
as notes, labels, GD&T symbols, and User Defined Symbols. Any of these
symbols can be placed on the drawing with a leader or as a standalone note
without a leader.
Tool Bar
Text Entry
Window
Preview
Window
Symbol
Display and
Text
Preference
Options
Placement
Options
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
As text and symbols are entered, the text and control characters appear within
the Text Entry Window. In this window the formatting options available within
the Tool Bar may be used to customize the appearance of the text. The preview
window displays the text as it will appear when it is placed on the drawing.
The Tool Bar
The Tool Bar contains several buttons that allow various text formatting
operations to be performed.
Insert Reset Text

from Preview and Dialog
Copy Delete Text
File Clear Preferences
Attribute
Save As Cut Paste Select Next Fit to

Symbol Preview
Window
Text
Bold Underline Superscript
Font Justification
Character Italic Overline Subscript

Scale Factor
TIP To reveal the function of any button, hold the cursor over the icon
until the name of the button appears.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
10-49
Placing the Text
Notes and labels may be placed on the drawing either with or without a leader
line, depending on the placement option chosen.
Create with Create without

Leader Leader
Creating text Without a Leader
When the Create without Leader option is selected, the Origin Tool dialog box
is displayed. This dialog box allows you to specify the placement and alignment
method for the text.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Creating Text with a Leader
To create text with a leader line, choose the button to display the Create Leader
dialog box. This dialog box allows one or more leaders to be specified as well as
the display characteristics of each leader.
Plain
Plain with All Around
Symbol
Plain with Aligned Arrow
Plain with Aligned Arrow

and All Around Symbol
Extension Line
ASME 1994 / ISO 1983

Datum Feature
ASME 1994 / ISO 1983 Options

Datum Feature With Available For
Datum on Extension Line ASME
Text Annotation Y14.5M-1994
Alignment ASME 1994 / ISO 1983 Standards
Options Datum Feature On
Datum on Dimension
Top Stub
Middle
Bottom
Below Bottom, Extend to maximum
Below Bottom, Extend to maximum, Underline
Below Bottom
Below Bottom, Underline
Below Top, Extend to maximum
Below Top, Extend to maximum, Underline
ÏÏÏ
Below Top
Below Top, Underline

ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
10-51
To create a leader, simply select the reference geometry for the leader end
point, indicate up to seven intermediate leader points (if necessary), select the
preferred leader type, leader side placement, and leader/text alignment. Once
all selections are made for the Create Leader dialog box, choosing OK will
proceed to the Place Annotation dialog box discussed earlier.
Drafting objects may be created with more than one leader by selecting the New
Leader button anytime during the leader creation process.
The default placement method is Drag, but the Point Constructor option may
be used to tie the text location to a control point, arc center, or intersection
point. Text may also be aligned either horizontally or vertically with an existing
drafting object using the Align Text option. The Offset Distance option may be
used to indicate an origin position offset from an existing drafting object. A
horizontal and vertical distance is given as multiples of the current character
size when using the Offset Character option.
Editing Text
Text may be edited in a previously created note or label by selecting it from the
drawing. When a note or label is selected, it is captured in the Text Entry
Window so that changes may be made. When editing is completed, simply
choose the Apply button to accept and display the changes on the drawing.
Editing Existing Dimension Preferences
The Annotation Preferences of existing dimensions may be edited simply by

doubleĆclicking on the dimension. The Annotation Preferences dialog will
appear and the following types of preferences may be edited.
Dimension
Line/Arrow
Lettering
Units
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Radial
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Activity 6 - Using the Annotation Editor

In this activity, the Annotation Editor will be used to create a label.
Step 1 Continue using the part ***_symbols_1.
Step 2 Make layer 101 the Work Layer.
In the Utility tool bar, key in 101 for the work layer.
Step 3 Create the Label Shown to define the chamfer.
Choose Insert→Annotation.
Ensure that Drafting Symbols is selected.
Enter the text, as shown in the illustration above, in the text

entry area using the appropriate degree symbol.
Choose the Text Justification button from the Control

Character Area.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
10-53
Choose Left Justify.
Left Justify
Center Justify
Right Justify
Choose the Create with Leader option.
Select the edge shown to place the arrow leader.
Select this
edge
Choose OK to indicate that no intermediate points are

required.
Locate the Label in the proper location.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
SUMMARY The Drafting Application provides for the

creation of drawings. Views and dimensions
that are placed on a drawing are associative to
the solid model and update when changes are
made to the model.
In this lesson you:

Modified a drawing.
Added views to a drawing.
Created Utility Symbols.
Created Cylindrical Centerlines.
Created Dimensions.
Added annotation to a drawing.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
10-55
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
10
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Datum Plane Reference Features
Datum Plane Reference Features ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
Lesson 11
ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ
PURPOSE This lesson will define datum plane reference features.
Create a Datum Plane.

Create a hole feature on a tangent datum plane.
Move a hole feature location by changing a datum plane angle.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
11-1
ÏÏÏ Reference Features

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ and
Reference features are construction tools that assist in the creation of features
sketches in locations and orientations where planar placement faces do not
exist, or as associative linear objects. Reference Features are theoretically
infinite in size, but the display is limited to a size slightly larger than that of the
solid model. Reference Features may be created relative to an existing solid
model or fixed in model space. This lesson will only discuss relative datum
planes.
In the case where a hole must pierce a cylinder to a certain depth from the
outside of the cylinder, construction tools are necessary. These tools are needed
because the hole feature requires a planar placement face for creation rather
than the cylindrical face of the base solid. The amount of control desired over
placement of a feature sometimes dictates the number of reference features
required. Two examples below show a hole in the side of a cylinder, normal to
the axis of the cylinder. The example on the right requires an additional datum
plane to position the hole perpendicular to the slot.
Plane 3B
Plane 1A Plane 1B
Plane 2A
Plane 2B parameter
Example A Example B
In example A above, Plane 1A defines a position through the cylinder axis,

while Plane 2A defines a placement plane that is tangent to the cylindrical face
and perpendicular to Plane 1A. This allows the hole to be placed on the tangent
datum and be relative to both the cylinder and Plane 1A.
Datum Plane reference features are accessible by choosing

Insert"Form Feature"Datum Plane from the menu bar while in the Modeling
application.
EDS Unigraphics NX
ÏÏÏ
Datum Plane ÏÏÏ
The datum plane option allows a planar reference feature to be created that
ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ
may be used:
To define a sketch plane.

To act as the planar placement face for the creation of form features (ie:
hole, slot, pad, boss, pocket, etc.).
As a target edge for positioning features.
As a horizontal or vertical reference.
For the mirror plane in Mirror Body and Mirror Feature.
To act as the 'trim to' face (extruded and revolved bodies).
To trim a body.
In assemblies, as mating TO or FROM object.
In Drafting, as a hinge line for a section or auxiliary view.
To help define a relative Datum Axis.
Relative Datum Planes
Relative datum planes are constrained (associated) to other geometric objects.

A constraint is a restriction on a datum that positions it relative to some existing
plane, face, or feature.
Many constraint combinations can be used to create relative datum planes.
Creating Datum Planes by Inferred Selection
Relative datum planes are created by selecting an existing object. The

constraint type is determined (inferred) by the objects selected.
Generally, whatever is necessary to describe the relationship of the plane to

other objects determines the constraint type(s) to be used. One, two, or three
constraints may be necessary. Simply selecting the objects will present the
applicable constraint types.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
11-3
ÏÏÏ A Single Constraint associates the datum plane to the target solid using either
ÏÏÏ one of the following creation methods:
ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ
Offset From Face or Datum Plane (Select a face or Datum Plane)
Through Face Axis (Select cylinder, cone or revolved feature)
Using Dual Constraints means that the constraints must be specified in pairs to
create the datum plane. The possible combinations of selections are shown on
the next page.
The Triple Constraint method is inferred by selecting three points on a single

solid body. The Datum Plane is associative to the body and constrained to the
selected points. Only Endpoints and Midpoints on linear edges are selectable.
Datum Plane User Interface

Most of the datum planes created in this course can be created with the Static
Datum Plane Dynamic Input Field by inferred methods.
The Datum Plane Dialog may be used to create datum planes that are more
specific than those you can create with the Inferred method.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Dual Constraints ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
First Constraint (selection)
Offset From Face
Second Constraint (selection)
Offset From Face (Center Plane)
ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ
Through Edge
Through Datum Axis
Through Cyl/Con/Rev Face Axis
Through Point
Parallel to Face/Datum Plane
Tangent to Face
Tangent/Normal/Binormal to a Curve/Edge
Through Point
Through Edge
Through Edge Through Datum Axis
Angle to Face/Datum Plane
Through Point
Through Edge
Through Datum Axis Through Datum Axis
Through Point
Through Edge
Normal to Edge
Through Cyl/Con/Rev Face
Normal to Datum Axis
Axis
Through Datum Axis
Angle to Face/Datum Plane Through Edge
Through Datum Axis
Angle is 0 Through Point
Angle is 0 or 90 Tangent to Face
Through Point
Tangent to Face Angle to Face/Datum Plane (Angle is 0,
0 90)
Tangent to Face
Through Curve Through Point
EDS
All Rights Reserved
11-5
ÏÏÏ Datum Plane Types

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ
The following is a list of the datum planes that will be covered in this lesson:
Offset
Center
Angle
Tangent
Through Control Points
Point and Direction
Offset Datum Plane

To create an offset datum plane
Choose the Datum Plane icon.

Select the face to offset from.
Do one of the following:
Choose OK to accept a value of 0 (zero).
Key in a value, press Enter, and choose OK.

Select the base of the normal, drag the datum plane to the desired
location and choose OK.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Center Datum Plane ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
To create a center datum plane ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ
Select two parallel faces or datum planes.
Choose OK.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
11-7
ÏÏÏ Datum Plane Through Cylindrical Axis

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ
To create a datum plane through a cylindrical axis:

Select the cylindrical axis symbol.
Choose OK.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Datum Plane at an Angle Through a Cylindrical Axis ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
To create a datum plane at an angle through a cylindrical axis, an additional
datum plane must be created.
ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ
Choose OK.

Select the previously created datum plane.
Choose OK to accept the default value of 90.
Select the rotation drag handle and drag the datum plane to the
desired location and choose OK.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
11-9
ÏÏÏ Datum Plane at an Angle to a Face or Datum Plane

ÏÏÏ Through an Edge
ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ To create a datum plane at an angle through an edge, do the following:

Select the edge that the datum plane is to pass through.
Select the planar face or datum plane that the angle will reference.
Select the rotation drag handle and drag the datum plane to the
desired angle and choose OK.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Datum Plane Tangent to a Cylindrical Face ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
To create a datum plane tangent to a cylindrical face, an additional datum plane ÏÏÏ
11
must be created. ÏÏÏ
Choose OK.

Select the cylindrical face (not on the axis).
Select the previously created datum plane.
Choose Alternate Solution from the Datum Plane toolbar until the
correct tangent datum plane is previewed.
Choose OK.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
11-11
ÏÏÏ Datum Plane Through Three Points

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ
To create a datum plane through 3 points, do the following:

Select the control points as desired (edges or curves).
Tab through and set the U Parameter as required.
Choose OK.
NOTE: The U Parameter is a value that indicates a position

along a theoretical infinite curve. Values between 0 (zero) and 1
define locations on the selected edge or curve. Values less than 0
(zero) or greater than 1 may also be used.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Datum Plane Defined by Point and Direction ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
To create a datum plane defined by a point and direction, do the following: ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ
Choose Datum Plane from the Datum Plane toolbar.
Choose Point & Direction.

Select a point through which the datum plane should pass.
Define the normal of the datum plane using Inferred Vector or Vector
Constructor.
Choose OK twice.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
11-13
ÏÏÏ Activity 1 - Creating Relative Datum Planes

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ
In this activity, three relative datum planes will be created. The datum planes
created are shown below.
Datum plane 1
Datum plane 2
Datum plane 3
Step 1 Open the part pau_ref_1.
Step 3 Create a Datum Plane Offset at a distance of 1 inch above

the upper face of the block.
Choose Datum Plane.
Select the top face of the block and confirm the selection if
necessary.
Pick this top face.
EDS Unigraphics NX
The top face highlights and a direction vector points normal to the face, in this
ÏÏÏ
case, the positive ZC direction. The vector displays the positive offset direction.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ
Key in 1 and press Enter.
Choose OK.
Datum plane
Datum planes have infinite bounds even though they are displayed with visible
boundaries.
Step 4 Create a second datum plane through three points.
The second datum plane will be created diagonally through the block.
Choose Datum Plane.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
11-15
ÏÏÏ Select the first point and confirm any of the edges. Any of
ÏÏÏ the edges are acceptable because they share the end point.
ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ
First Point
Third Point
Second Point
Carefully select each of the two midpoints.
Choose OK.
The datum plane is created and positioned through the three selected points.
The relationship of this datum plane through the points will remain if the block
parameters are changed.
Step 5 Create the third datum plane midway between the left
and right faces.
Choose Datum Plane.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Select the right planar face.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ
Right Face
Select the left planar face.
Left Face
Choose OK.
The datum plane is created and located at the center of the part and is parallel
to the faces selected.
Step 6 Edit the block to verify the parametric relationship of the

datum planes to the block.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
11-17
ÏÏÏ Select BLOCK(6) and choose OK.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ
Choose Feature Dialog.
Change the Block Dimensions values to:
X Length = 2
Y Length = 2
Z Length = 5
Choose OK.
The revised values are displayed in the graphics area. Again a dialog box
displays options to edit the feature. The feature may still be modified without
updating the model.
Choose OK in the dialog box.
If there were more features that needed to be edited, those features could be
selected at this time. In this case, there are no more edits desired.
Choose OK in the Edit Parameters dialog box to complete

the change.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Fit the view.

ÏÏÏ
Notice that the constraints applied to the datum planes at the time of creation ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
11
continue to control the positioning of the datum planes after the block is edited. ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
11-19
ÏÏÏ Selecting and Using Datums

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ
Selecting Datum Planes - When selecting a datum plane in the graphics area,
one of its displayed boundaries must be selected.
Creating Features using Datum Planes - Form Features created using datum
planes for the planar placement face are created normal to the datum plane.
These features are positioned in the center of the datum plane as a default if no
positioning dimensions are specified.
When a datum plane is selected for the planar placement face, the system will
display a direction vector showing the side of the datum plane on which the
feature will be created. The side shown can be accepted by selecting the Accept
Default Side option. If it is desired that the feature be created in the opposite
direction of the default vector, the Flip the Default Side option must be
selected.
Editing Datum Planes
Datum planes may be edited three different ways:
Select the datum plane, and with the cursor over the selection, click MB3
and choose Edit Parameters.
DoubleĆclick on a datum plane.
Choose Edit→Feature→Parameters and select the datum plane.
Deleting Datum Planes

Use Edit→ Feature→Delete
Select the datum plane. With the cursor over the selection click MB3 and
choose Delete from the popĆup menu.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Activity 2 - Cylindrical Faces and Datum Planes ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
This activity will demonstrate the creation of relative datum planes as they
apply to a cylindrical face. ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ
Step 1 Open the part pau_ref_2.
Step 2 Save the part as ***_ref_2 where *** represent your

initials.
A hole is required through the cylindrical face at the bottom of the part,
centered in the feature. Relative reference features are required to accomplish
this task.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
11-21
ÏÏÏ Step 3 Start the Modeling Application.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ Step 4 Choose Datum Plane.
Step 5 Create a Datum Plane through the feature axis, at an

angle to the existing plane of 90 degrees.
Move the cursor over the outside cylindrical face of the

feature at the bottom of the part. Select the cylindrical axis
symbol.
Select the existing Datum Plane.
Choose OK to accept the default value of 90.
Step 6 Create a datum plane tangent to the outside of the same

cylindrical face to use as a placement face for the hole
feature.
Choose Datum Plane.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Select the original Datum Plane.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Select the cylindrical face of the feature at the bottom of the
part.
ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ
Choose Alternate Solution until the new tangent
datum plane is in the orientation shown below.
Choose OK.
Step 7 Create a center datum plane.
Choose Datum Plane.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
11-23
ÏÏÏ Select the two faces shaded below.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ
Choose OK.
Step 8 Create a hole feature.
Choose Hole.
Choose Simple.
Specify a diameter of 10.
Select the tangent datum plane as the placement face.
Ensure that the direction arrow is pointing into the part.
Choose the cylindrical face of the hole through the center of

the bottom of the part as the thru face.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ
Location
Datum
Placement
Datum
Thru Face Location Datum
Use Point onto Line positioning to locate the hole centered

on the two datum planes shown above.
Step 9 Move the datum planes to another layer.
Choose Format"Move to Layer.
Select all the datum planes.
Choose OK.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
11-25
ÏÏÏ The newly created hole will remain centered in the part due to its relationship
ÏÏÏ with the datum planes that are constrained to the solid body.
ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Activity 3 - Feature on a Relative Datum Plane ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
In this activity, a relative datum plane will be created, which is to be used as a
placement plane for a hole at an angle to, and through a block. ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ
Design Intent
Create a simple hole that will have its angle parametrically controlled.
Step 1 Choose File"Recently Opened Parts and select the part

pau_ref_1.
Recently Opened Parts allows switching back and forth between parts opened
recently, in the current Unigraphics session or previous sessions. The Recently
Opened Parts list may contain up to ten parts.
Step 2 Create a datum plane through an edge and at an angle to

a face/plane.
Choose Modeling.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
11-27
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Choose Datum Plane.
ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ Select the right edge (not the mid point) and confirm the
selection if necessary.
Edge
Select the top face, and confirm the selection if necessary.
Face
In the Angle Dynamic Input Field, key in 20 and press Enter.
Choose OK.
A datum plane is created at a 20 degree angle from the top of the block and
passes through the selected edge.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Step 3 Create the hole perpendicular to the datum plane.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Now a Simple Thru Hole will be created using the datum plane. The hole will
be normal to the datum plane, but will pass through the block at an angle ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ
because the datum plane is angled to the block.
Choose Hole.
Choose Simple for the hole type.
Key in .5 for the diameter.
Select the boundary of the newly created datum plane for

the placement face.
Select the bottom face of the block as the Thru Face.
Bottom Face
Choose OK.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
11-29
ÏÏÏ Features are initially positioned in the center of the datum plane. If no other
ÏÏÏ positioning dimensions are specified, the hole will stay in this position. In this
ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ
case the hole will be positioned to the front and right edge of the model.
The Perpendicular icon is already selected for the first positioning

dimension.
Select the edge of the block shown as the target edge.
Select Edge
Key in -.75 as the positional expression value.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Select the edge of the block shown as the target edge.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ
Select edge
Accept the value of 2.0 by choosing OK.
The hole is positioned to the newly constrained location.
Step 4 Modify the angle parameter of the datum plane.
DoubleĆclick on the datum plane.
Change the angle from 20 degrees to 75 degrees.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
11-31
ÏÏÏ Choose OK.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ
Try 80 and 90 degrees. Can you explain the results?
EDS Unigraphics NX
Activity 4 - Creating a Hole Corner to Corner ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
In this activity, you will create a relative datum plane using the Point and
ÏÏÏ
11
corner of a block and comes out the opposite corner and maintains associativity. ÏÏÏ
Direction option. The intent is to create a hole feature that goes through one
Step 1 Open the part file pau_seedpart_mm and save it as

***_hole_corners, where *** represent your initials.
Step 3 Create a block that is 200 x 100 x 100 on layer 1.
Step 4 Change the work layer to layer 61.
Step 5 Create a datum plane with the point and direction

method.
Choose Datum Plane.
Choose Datum Plane Dialog from the toolbar.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
11-33
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Choose Point and Direction.
ÏÏÏ

11
ÏÏÏ Select the end point as shown to define a point on the datum
plane.
Select this
end point.
Change the Inferred Vector to Vector Constructor.
Set the Vector Method to Two Points.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Select the end points shown below.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Select this
end point.
ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ
Select this
end point.
Choose OK twice.
Step 6 Create a simple hole perpendicular to the datum plane,

through the block.
Choose Hole.
Choose Simple for the hole type.
Key in a diameter value of 25.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
11-35
ÏÏÏ Select the datum plane as the placement face.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ
Thru Face
Placement Face
If the hole is not going into the block, choose Reverse Side.
Select the far side of the block as the thru face and choose
OK.
Choose Point onto Point as the positioning dimension.
Point to Point
EDS Unigraphics NX
Select the end point as shown.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ
Select this
end point
Change the work layer to 1 and make layer 61 invisible.
Step 7 Modify the size of the block.
Select the block.
With the cursor on the block, click MB3.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
11-37
ÏÏÏ Choose Edit Parameters.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ
Click on p2=100.000.
Key in 400.
Choose OK twice.
Fit the view and note the associativity of the features.
Step 8 Save and close the part.
EDS Unigraphics NX
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ
SUMMARY Datum planes are reference features that are

used as construction tools to assist in the
creation of features and sketches in locations
and orientations where planar placement faces
do not exist. Reference Features are
theoretically infinite in size, but the display is
limited to a size slightly larger than that of the
solid model.
In this lesson you:

Created associative datum planes.
Created a hole feature from an associative
datum plane.
Created an associative datum plane by
defining a point and direction.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
11-39
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
11
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Datum Axis Reference Feature

Lesson 12
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
12
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
PURPOSE This lesson will define another type of reference feature, the
datum axis.
Create a Datum Axis.

Locate a hole feature using a datum axis.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
12-1
Datum Axis
This option allows a linear reference feature to be created that may be used as
a(n):
Axis of rotation for revolved features.

Axis of rotation for circular arrays.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
12
Pivot axis for datum planes.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ

Directional reference.
Dimensional reference for feature position.
EDS Unigraphics NX
User Interface
When you first open the Datum Axis option, the Datum Axis static toolbar
displays in the upper left corner of the graphics window. The static toolbar uses
the Inferred method to let you quickly create a datum axis based on your object
and constraint selections.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
12
The main Datum Axis dialog is used to create datum axes that are more
complex than those you can create with the Inferred method. To open the main
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Datum Axis dialog, click its icon on the Datum Axis Static toolbar.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
12-3
Relative Datum Axis
The four relative datum axis methods that will be covered in this lesson are:
Through Two Points

Through Edge
Through Cylindrical, Conical or Revolved Face Axis
Intersection of Two Faces/Datum Planes
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
12 The important function of these Reference Features is that they are associative
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
to existing geometry.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Datum Axis Through Two Points
To create a datum axis through 2 points, do the following:
Choose the Datum Axis icon.

Select the control points as desired (edges or curves).
Tab through and set the U Parameter as required.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
12
Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
NOTE: The U Parameter is a value that indicates a position

along a theoretical infinite curve. Values between 0 (zero) and 1
define locations on the selected edge or curve. Values less than 0
(zero) or greater than 1 may also be used.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
12-5
Datum Axis Through an Edge or Curve
To create a datum axis through an edge or curve, do the following:

Select the edge or curve.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
12
Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Datum Axis Through a Cylindrical face
To create a datum axis through a cylindrical face, do the following:

Select the face.
Choose OK. ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
12
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
12-7
Datum Axis Through the Intersection of two Faces

To create a datum axis through the intersection of two faces, do the following:

Select the faces.
ÏÏÏ
Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ
12
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
TIP There is no option to create a datum plane at the intersection of two

faces/planes from the datum plane dialog box. This requires creation
of an associative linear reference feature (datum axis) at the desired
intersection to serve as the pivot position. A datum plane may then be
created through the axis using whatever other constraint that applies.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Editing Datum Axes
To edit datum axes parameters, use any of the following methods:
Select a datum axis, and with the cursor over the selection, click MB3 and
choose Edit Parameters.
Double-click a datum axis in the graphics window.
Use Edit→Feature→Parameters.
Deleting Datum Axes

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
12
Use Edit→ Feature→Delete
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Select a datum axis. With the cursor over the selection, click MB3 and
choose Delete.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
12-9
Activity 1 - Constraining Locations using Datums

In this activity, a datum axis and datum planes will be added to constrain the
pivot location of a hole feature.
Design Intent
A 0.5 inch diameter hole is to be located in a block. The origin of the hole will
be on the top face and located from the right face. The hole is to remain
centered in the block along the YC axis. The angle of the hole shall be editable
in a plane parallel to the front face.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
12
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ZC
YC
XC
A/2

Choose File→Recently Opened Parts.
Select pau_ref_1.
Choose Modeling.
Step 2 Create the Reference Features.

Change the work layer to 61.
Choose Datum Plane.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Select the right face on the block as shown.
ZC
YC
XC
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
12
Right Face ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
In the Offset Dynamic Input Field key in -2 and press
Enter.
Choose OK.
Choose Datum Plane.
Select the back face of the block as shown and confirm.
ZC Back Face
YC
XC
Front Face
Select the front face of the block as shown and confirm.
Choose OK.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
12-11
A center datum plane is created.
Choose Datum Axis.
Select the top face as shown below.
Select the datum plane as shown below.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
12 Top Face
ÏÏÏ
ZC
ÏÏÏ
YC
XC
Datum Plane
Choose OK.
A datum axis is created at the intersection of the top of the block and the
associative datum plane.
Choose Datum Plane.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Select the right face of the block as shown.
ZC
YC
XC
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
12
Right Face
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Select the Datum Axis.
In the Angle Dynamic Input Field key in 45 and press Enter.
Choose OK.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
12-13
Choose Datum Plane.
Select the newly created datum plane.
In the Offset Dynamic Input Field key in 1 and press Enter.
Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ
Fit the view.
ÏÏÏ
12
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Step 3 Create a Thru Hole.
Choose Hole.
Choose the Simple icon.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Enter .5 for the Diameter.
Select the edge of the datum plane as shown.
The tool solid for the hole appears in the display.
Datum Plane
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
12
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ZC
YC
XC
Bottom Face
Select the bottom face of the block as the Thru Face, confirm
and choose OK.
Choose Point onto Line.
Select the datum axis as the target edge.
A positioning dimension appears in the graphics area with a value of 0.
Choose the Point onto Line.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
12-15
Select the center datum plane as shown and choose OK.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
12
ZC
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
YC
XC
Select this
Datum Plane
The hole is located. The hole will always remain on the datum axis and stay
centered in the block.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Step 4 Modify the angle parameter of the datum plane.
DoubleĆclick on the datum plane indicated below.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
12
ZC ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
YC
XC
Change the angle from 45 degrees to 20 degrees.
Choose OK.
The angle of the hole changes, but the point of entry remains the same.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
12-17
Step 5 Change the Location of the Datum Axis.
DoubleĆclick on the datum plane indicated below.
ZC
YC
ÏÏÏ
XC
ÏÏÏ
12
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Change the Offset from -2 to -3 and choose OK.
ZC
YC
XC
Step 6 Choose File"Close"All Parts. Do not save the part file.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Activity 2 - Relative Datum Axes

This activity will demonstrate the difference in positional associativity between
Point Direction and Datum Axis when either is used to define the rotation axis
of an instance array.
Step 1 Open the part pau_datumaxis_1 and start the Modeling

application.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
12
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Step 2 Investigate the model.
Use the third mouse button popĆup menu to change the

Display Mode to Wireframe.
Choose Format"Layer Settings and make the display of

ALL layers Selectable.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
12-19
The model contains two identical hole patterns. The central hole in each
pattern is located associatively to the relative datum planes in the part. The
hole pattern on the left in the graphic was created by specifying a point in space
and a vector to revolve the pattern about. The pattern on the right was created
by specifying the relative datum axis to revolve the pattern about.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
12
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Step 3 Modify the model.
Choose Edit"Feature"Parameters from the main menu

bar.
Select the BLOCK(0) feature and choose OK.
Choose the Feature Dialog button.
Change the X Length to 5 and press Tab.
Change the Y Length to 10 and choose OK.
Choose OK to dismiss the feature Edit Parameters dialog

box.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Choose OK to update the model.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
12
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
The model updates to reflect the change. Notice that the hole pattern on the
left does not update as expected. This is due to this hole pattern being created
with a nonĆassociative reference point and direction vector.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
12-21
The left hole pattern maintained its relationship to the objects used to define it,
but the nonĆassociative specified point in space does not change. The hole
pattern on the right that depends on the relative datum axis to define the
rotation point and vector updates as expected.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
12
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Step 4 Choose File"Close"All Parts. Do not save the part file.
EDS Unigraphics NX
SUMMARY A Datum Axis is a linear reference feature that
ÏÏÏ
is used as an aid in the construction of other
ÏÏÏ
features.
12
In this lesson you: ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Created a Datum Axis.
Positioned features using a Datum Axis.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
12-23
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
12
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Sketching
Lesson 13
PURPOSE To introduce the method of creating a sketch and free

hand sketching of curves.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Create a sketch.
Create sketch curves.
Apply dimensional constraints to sketches.
Apply geometric constraints to sketches.
Identify constraints.
Convert a sketch curve to reference.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-1
Sketching
What is a sketch?
A sketch is a feature that is intended to contain a collection of two dimensional

curves. Using a set of rules applied by the user, a sketch parametrically controls
the two dimensional profile. These rules, called constraints, constitute the
essence of constraint based modeling, a very powerful portion of Unigraphics
solid modeling.
Profiles may be used to produce extruded or revolved features, or to define

sections for free form features such as a swept feature or a through curves
lofted surface.
A profile may contain some, all, or none of the constraints required to fully
capture the design intent. Dimensional and geometric constraints may be used to
establish a design intent as well as provide the ability to perform parameter
driven changes.
Geometric relations may be established between the curves within a profile as

ÏÏÏ well as with curves in other profiles and model geometry such as edges or
ÏÏÏ datums.
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Why sketch?
Sketched profiles possess a higher level of control over features, thus

automating the propagation of changes. The most obvious reason for sketching
is when a design intent is well known and constraints can be quickly applied to
capture that intent. Another reason is when there is a need to iterate through a
number of various solutions to validate a certain design intent.
Once a sketch is placed on a face or datum plane, it will automatically move

when the position of the placement face/datum is changed. Since sketches do
not require constraining, this approach is the quickest way to build features and
still have a sufficient level of associativity.
The inherent ability to solve a sketch in real time means that, as rules are
applied, the sketch objects change and move to reflect the effect that the
assigned rule has on the geometry. This gives the user the ability to quickly
change profiles of features created using sketch curves.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-3
Sketching
When should a sketch be used?

Unigraphics users should sketch whenever they have a need for parametrically
controlled curves.
Most features of solid models can be created using combinations of form

features. The Unigraphics sketcher gives the user the ability to sketch shapes
that are not available as standard form features. This could be accomplished
with explicit curves, but there would be no parametric control over the shape.
The user might also consider sketching when a combination of features used to
create the desired shape makes the shape difficult to edit.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
When there is a commonly used shape that varies in size from part to part, a
sketch as part of a user defined feature should be considered.
Sketches may be used as base features of a model if the shape lends itself to
extruded or revolved geometry.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-5
Sketching
Sketches may be used in a number of different ways. Consider them for guide
paths for swept features, or as section curves for free form features.
The added advantage of being able to quickly and easily change the geometry
based on rules that the designer applies should be a large part of the
determination of when to sketch.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
An important aspect of modeling that helps the user decide when to use a
sketch is defining the design intent of the model. The design intent consists of
two items:
Design Considerations - The geometric requirements on the actual part,

including engineering and design rules that determine the detail
configuration of the part.
Potential Areas for Change - Known design changes or iterations, and
their effects on the part configuration.
As a general rule, the more design considerations and potential areas for
change, the more likely there are benefits from sketching.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Sketches and the Model Navigator
Since sketches are features of the solid model, they are listed in the Model
Navigator and any edits supported by the Model Navigator that are germane to
sketches are available.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-7
Sketching
Sketches and Layers
Organizing part files is a very important part of modeling. The sketcher helps in
this endeavor by automating layer control as sketches are activated and
deactivated. This automated layer management is designed to ensure that the
user does not accidentally construct objects in the active sketch across multiple
layers.
Unigraphics assigns the current work layer at creation to the sketch. As the
user subsequently activates the sketch, the work layer is set to the layer assigned
to the sketch.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Creating a New Sketch
Choosing the Sketch icon starts the sketch function.
The Sketch Plane
The first thing that needs to be defined is the plane that the sketch curves will
be placed on. But, before this can be done you must consider the state of the
model. Since our goal is to develop a parametric model, all of the features need
to be associative. Is the sketch going to define the base feature or has a base
feature already been created?
The tool bar shown below is used to define the sketch plane.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
1 Sketch Plane 5 Datum Plane
2 XC-YC Plane 6 Datum CSYS
3 YC-ZC Plane 7 OK
4 XC-ZC Plane 8 Cancel
Sketch to Define the Base Feature
If the sketch is going to define the base feature then you may define the plane
of the sketch by choosing one of the following:
XC-YC Plane
ZC-YC Plane
ZC-XC Plane
Datum CSYS
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-9
Sketching
After the plane is chosen the plane is highlighted in the graphic window. You
then chose OK to accept and enter the sketcher function. The sketch
plane is then oriented normal to the graphics screen.
Sketch Associative to Existing Base Feature
If a base feature already exists, then you will define the sketch plane on a
planar face or a datum plane of the base feature. The datum plane may already
exist or may be created on the fly.
If you are choosing a face or an existing datum plane:
Choose the Sketch Plane icon.

Select the face or datum plane.
ÏÏÏ Define the horizontal or vertical reference

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ Choose OK.
If you are defining a datum plane on the fly:
Choose the Datum Plane icon

Select the required objects to define the datum plane.
Choose OK.
Define the horizontal or vertical reference
Choose OK.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Defining the Reference Direction
The reference direction is used to specify the horizontal direction on the sketch
plane. There are times when no linear object is pointing in the desired
horizontal direction. At these times a vertical reference may be defined,
because vertical is by definition ninety degrees from horizontal; the system is
able to interpret where the desired horizontal direction is when using a vertical
reference.
Desired YC
Horizontal
Direction
ZC XC
ÏÏÏ
Vertical Reference
Resultant
Planar Placement Face
Sketch Orientation
ÏÏÏ
The direction of an axis may be changed as follows:
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
To flip the direction of an axis, doubleĆclick on it.
To specify a new direction, select the axis to redirect then select a straight
edge. The straight edge is projected to the sketch plane to define the new
direction.
In addition, the normal of the sketch plane may be changed by doubleĆclicking

on the ZC axis. This only applies when the sketch plane is being defined by a
datum plane.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-11
Sketching
Naming a Sketch
The system requires a unique name for each sketch, and therefore will select
the next available sketch name in the queue as the default. The system default
from Unigraphics is SKETCH_###" where the pound signs are replaced by
the next available number counting up from 000 (SKETCH_000, SKETCH_001,
etc.). A sketch name may be defined during or after the sketch has been
created by clicking on the default sketch name and then typing in the new
name.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ The sketch can also be renamed by:
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ Choosing Task→Sketch Properties
Using the Model Navigator
TIP It is highly recommended that sketches be named in a descriptive manner

rather than accepting the default. This allows downstream users to
understand the function of the sketch at a glance.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
The Active Sketch
In any given part there may be numerous sketches of different features at

different orientations. When using the sketcher, only one sketch may be worked
on at a time. This sketch is called the active sketch. Curves created while a
sketch is active become associated with the active sketch. When returning to a
sketch to add to or modify a profile, the sketch must be activated. There are
three ways to activate a sketch:
DoubleĆclicking on a sketch curve.

In the Model Navigator doubleĆclick on the sketch feature node.
Select the Sketch icon and from the Sketch Name pullĆdown, select the
desired sketch.
There are two ways to deactivate an active sketch as follows:
Select the Finish icon.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose Task→Finish. 13
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-13
Sketching
Sketch Creation Steps
Sketch for a Base Feature

Set the work layer for the sketch.
Choose the Sketch icon.

Define the sketch plane by one of the following.
XC-YC Plane
ZC-YC Plane
ZC-XC Plane
Datum CSYS
Name the sketch.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Choose OK.
Sketch on an Existing Face or Datum Plane
Choose the Sketch Plane icon.

Select the face or datum plane.
Define the horizontal or vertical reference
Name the sketch.
Choose OK.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Activity 1 - Sketch Creation

In this activity you will practice the creation of a sketch for a base feature, a
sketch that is to be defined on an existing face and a sketch where the datum
plane is created on the fly.
Step 1 Open pau_seedpart_in and start the modeling

application.
Step 2 Create a sketch for a base feature.

Make layer 21 the work layer.
Choose Sketch.
Choose the YC-ZC Plane.
Click on the sketch name, key in base and press Enter.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
The sketch is created.
Unigraphics created a fixed Datum Plane on the specified sketch plane and two
fixed Datum Axes along its major axes to support the new sketch.
Notice the WCS. The system has manipulated it so that XC is parallel to the
horizontal direction and YC is vertical.
Choose Finish.
Step 3 Close the part do not save.
Step 4 Open pau_skt_creation and start the modeling

application.
Step 5 Create a sketch on an existing face.

Make layer 21 the work layer.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-15
Sketching
Choose Sketch.
The Sketch Plane icon is already selected.
Select the Face shown below.
Select this face.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ Horizontal
Reference
The 2D sketch plane indicator appears and the XĆAxis is active (highlighted).
Select the horizontal reference at the location shown above.
Click on the sketch name, key in skt1 and press Enter.
Choose OK.
Step 6 Create a curve on the sketch plane.
Choose Line.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Create the line as shown below.
Click here . . .
then
Click here.
Choose Finish.
Step 7 Change the orientation of the face that defines the sketch ÏÏÏ
plane.
ÏÏÏ
Choose Tools"Expression. ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Select the expression, Change_Me=1, and change the value
to 3.5.
Choose OK.
Rotate the part and notice how the line remained associative
to the face.
Step 8 Create a sketch on a datum plane.
Replace the view with the TFRĆTRI view.
Make layer 22 the work layer, layer 21 invisible, and layer 1

selectable.
Choose Sketch.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-17
Sketching
Choose Datum Plane.
Select the 2 shaded faces shown below.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ A center datum plane is created.
The 2D sketch plane indicator appears and the XĆAxis is active (highlighted).
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Select the horizontal reference at the location shown below.
Horizontal
Reference
Click on the sketch name, key in skt2 and press Enter.
ÏÏÏ
Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Choose Finish.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-19
Sketching
Step 9 Activate existing sketches.
This step will demonstrate 2 ways of activating existing sketches.
Make layer 21 selectable.
DoubleĆclick on the sketch curve (1) shown below.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ Fit the view (MB3).
Sketch SKT1 is activated and oriented in the graphic window.
Choose Finish.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Choose Sketch.
Choose SKT2 from the sketch name pullĆdown.
Sketch SKT2 is activated and oriented in the graphic window.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Choose Finish.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-21
Sketching
Sketch Curve Creation
Sketch curves are created via the Sketch Curve tool bar. As curves are created
geometric constraints are assigned to the curves relative to the Infer Constraint
Settings.
Sketch Curve Tool Bar
Profile Line
Arc
Circle
ÏÏÏ Infer Constraints Setting Dialog

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Vertical
Perpendicular
Midpoint
Tangent
Horizontal Parallel
Collinear Coincident
Point on
Curve
Equal Point on Equal

Radius Concentric Length
String
As you create the curves a symbol will appear near the curve being created to
represent the constraint that will be applied, if any.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Locking a Constraint
When a constraint symbol appears during curve creation you may lock in that
constraint by pressing MB2. For example, you are creating a line and the
parallel symbol appears, you press MB2. Now as you move the cursor, the new
line that is rubber banding, is doing so parallel to the reference curve.
Snap Angle
The snap angle is a global preference set in the Sketch Preferences dialog box
that is applied any time curves are being created. It is used to snap" a line to
horizontal or vertical. When creating lines outside of the sketcher, snap angle is
only applied when using inferred cursor location. The default snap angle is set
to 3° and is user definable between 0° and 20°. This angular tolerance is
defined on either side of horizontal or vertical from the first specified location,
effectively creating a 6° tolerance zone by default.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Snap Angle
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
The Infer Point Tool Bar
The Infer Point tool bar is displayed when creating most of the curve types in
the sketcher, so that you have more control over the selection of locations.
When the Infer Point toolbar is active, regardless of the point types turned on,
Cursor Location is always available.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-23
Sketching
Alignment Lines While Creating Curves
In the process of creating a curve, if you are horizontally or vertically opposite a

control point, the system will display an alignment line.
New curve
being created.
Existing
Curve
Alignment
Lines
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Profile Tool
The Profile tool allows creation of a string of lines and arcs, without having to
specify a start for each curve after the first curve is created. Profile is accessed
by choosing the Profile icon on the Sketch Curve tool bar.
The icons at the upper left corner of the graphics screen allow you to switch
between lines and arcs, and allow you to switch between entering X-Y
locations and entering parameters.
Line Arc
XY Parameters
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
The default settings are:
Line creation
X-Y location
Once you have created the first curve (line or arc), the system will revert to
creating a line. You can change this any time you wish.
You can also switch to arc creation by using press-drag-release with MB1.
The circle-X" symbol controls the direction in which the arc will be created.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-25
Sketching
If the desired arc is in the wrong direction, re-cross the end of the line (with
the cursor), and exit in a different quadrant of the symbol.
Circle-X
Symbol
Arc originating
from top quadrant
Arc originating from

Left quadrant
ÏÏÏ right quadrant
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ

bottom quadrant
As you are creating curves with the profile tool, the string mode can be broken
by clicking MB2.
Creating Lines
Line creation is accessed by choosing the Line icon on the Sketch Curve
tool bar.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Once in line creation, the icons in the upper left corner of the graphics screen
give you two options: Location (by cursor location or entering an X-Y
location), and entering parameters.
There are several combinations of methods for creating a line:

Locate the start, and then locate the end.
Locate the start, and then enter the length and angle parameters.
Locate the start, enter one parameter, and then locate the end.
Enter the parameters and then locate the start.
Once you indicate a start location, the system will switch to the Parameters
mode. But you can still give an end location without changing back to XY.
Creating Arcs
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Arc creation is accessed by choosing the Arc icon on the Sketch Curve ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
tool bar.
Once in arc creation, the icons in the upper left corner of the graphics screen
give you two sets of options. The first is creation method, and the second is for
the XY-Location/Parameters choice.
For Arc by 3 Points: there are several combinations of methods for

creating the arc:
Locate the start, locate the end, and then locate a point on the arc.
Locate the start, enter a radius value and press Enter, locate the end
point and then determine which of the 4 options you wish to create.
The same as the previous, but enter the radius value after locating the
end point, but before the point on arc.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-27
Sketching
For Arc by Center and End Points: there are also several combinations of
methods for creating the arc:
Locate the center, locate the start point, and locate the end point. (The
start point location determines the radius.)
Locate the center, locate the start point, enter a radius value and press
Enter, locate the end point.
Locate the center, enter radius and sweep angle values and press Enter,
locate the start of the sweep, and locate the direction for the sweep.
Once you indicate a first location, the system will switch to the Enter
Parameters mode. But you can still give a location without changing back to
XY.
Creating Circles
ÏÏÏ Circle creation is accessed by choosing the Circle icon on the Sketch
ÏÏÏ Curve tool bar.
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ Once in circle creation, the icons in the upper left corner of the graphics screen
give you two sets of options. The first is creation method, and the second is for
the location/parameters choice.
For Circle by Center and Radius: there are several methods for creating
circles:
Locate the center, and then locate a point on the circumference of the
circle.
Locate the center, enter a radius, and press Enter. The circle is created.
You are then in multiple circle creation mode - just indicate another
location for a circle center.
Locate the center, drag the radius until you get the size you want. Press
Enter. The circle is created, and you are in multiple circle creation mode.
Indicate another center.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
For Circle by 3 Points: there are also two methods for creating the circle:
Locate three points on the circumference of the circle.

Locate two points on the circumference of the circle, enter a radius value
and press Enter, then choose which of the two options you want by cursor
location.
Once you indicate a first location, the system will switch to the enter
Parameters mode. But you can still give a location without changing back to
XY.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-29
Sketching
Activity 2- Using the Sketch Profile Tool
Step 1 Open pau_seedpart_in and save it as ***_skt_profile_1

where *** represent your initials.
Step 2 Change the Work Layer to 21.
Step 3 Create a sketch on the XC-YC plane.
Start the Modeling application.
ÏÏÏ Choose OK to accept the XC-YC Plane.

ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ Step 4 Set the Infer Constraints Setting.
You are going to set the Infer Constraints Setting to make available only the
constraints that you may want to apply during curve creation.
Choose Infer Constraints Settings.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Set the dialog as shown below.
Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Step 5 Create a Profile.
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
In this step you will create the sketch curves shown below using the Profile tool.
Choose the Profile tool and then move the cursor into
the graphics window.
Key in -4 for the XC value and press Tab.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-31
Sketching
Key in -2 for the YC value and press Enter.
Move the cursor so that the rubberĆbanding line snaps to the

horizontal orientation as shown below.
Horizontal Symbol
Notice the horizontal symbol indicating the constraint that is going to be

applied to the line.
Press MB2 to lock in the horizontal constraint.
Now notice that as you move the cursor around the rubberĆbanding line
remains horizontal.
Move the cursor to a position that defines a Length of
ÏÏÏ approximately 3 inches and click MB1.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Next, you are going to create the first arc.
Hold MB1 down and drag the cursor straight up from the
end point of the last line and then release.
You are now in arc creation mode.
Create the arc by indicating a location with MB1 as shown

below.
Notice the alignment line that aligns the center point and
end points.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Create a horizontal line approximately 2 inches long by

indicating the end point with MB1.
Next you will create another arc just like the first one, but you will use a
different method.
Hold MB1 down and drag the cursor up and to the right
from the end point of the last line and then release.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Key in .5 for the Radius and press Tab 2 times.
Key in 180 for the Sweep Angle and press Enter. Click in the
graphic window to apply.
Create a horizontal line approximately 1 inch long by

indicating the end point with MB1.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-33
Sketching
Create the line as shown below.
Start the creation of an arc in the orientation shown below

by holding MB1 down, drag and release.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Key in 1.875 for the Radius and press Tab 2 times.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
With MB1 indicate a cursor location, as shown below, so that

horizontal and tangent constraints will be applied to the line.
The line should also be approximately 2 inches long.
Start the creation of an arc in the orientation shown below

by holding MB1 down, drag and release.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Key in 1.5 for the Radius and press Tab 2 times.
The next line to be created is to have a perpendicular constraint relative to the

35° angle line.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-35
Sketching
Move the cursor over the line indicated below.
Move the cursor

over this line.
With MB1 indicate a cursor location as shown below. Note

the alignment lines and the perpendicular constraint symbol.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Create a horizontal line approximately 1.5 inches long as

shown below.
Move the cursor over the lines indicated below.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Move the cursor over these lines.
13
ÏÏÏ
With MB1 indicate a cursor location as shown below. Note

the alignment line and the parallel constraint symbol.
Close the profile by selecting the end point of the first line.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-37
Sketching
Choose Finish.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Creating Fillets
Fillet creation is accessed by choosing the Fillet icon on the Sketch Curve
tool bar.
Once in fillet creation, there is a single icon in the upper left corner of the
graphics screen. It is for controlling whether or not the original curves are
trimmed.
You can create fillets between lines, arcs or conics. You can also create a fillet
between two parallel lines.
There are several methods for creating Fillets:

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Select two curves with a single selection (at their intersection), and then 13
drag the size and quadrant.
Select two curves individually, and drag the size and quadrant.
ÏÏÏ
Select one curve, enter a radius value, and select the second curve.
Select two curves individually, enter a radius value, and the indicate the
desired quadrant.
Drag (with MB1) across the two curves you want to fillet. The size of the
fillet is governed by where the curves are selected.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-39
Sketching
Quick Trim and Quick Extend
Quick Trim
Quick Trim will trim any curve to the closest curve in the sketch. The
system will preview the results in pre-selection color.
You can also trim multiple curves at one time, by using the crayon" select
ÏÏÏ method. Hold down MB1 and drag across the portion of curves you want to
ÏÏÏ trim away.
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
You can also select a specific curve to trim to, by using ctrl-select to select the
desired boundary curve.
You can also select more than one bounding curve using the ctrl-select
method.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
In the example below, both the arc on the left and the spline on the right were
control-selected as boundary curves. With the cursor on the top line, (between
the two boundary curves), the center section is previewed as the portion to be
removed.
When a curve is trimmed, appropriate constraints are automatically created. In

the example above, two Point on Curve Constraints, and one Colinear
constraint would be added. If one of the boundary curves is later trimmed to
the line, the Point on Curve constraint would change to Coincident.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
If you trim an arc to a line that is tangent. . .
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-41
Sketching
the tangency constraint will be retained.
Quick Extend
Quick Extend will extend lines, arcs and conics to the closest curve in the
sketch. The system will preview the results in pre-selection color.
The curve being extended must extend to an actual intersection with the
boundary curve.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ You can extend multiple curves at one time, by using the crayon" select
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
method. Hold down MB1 and drag across the ends of curves you want to
extend.
Before After
You can also select specific boundary curves by using the control-select
method.
As with Quick Trim, when you use Quick Extend, appropriate constraints are
automatically created.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Activity 3 - Creating Fillets

Step 1 Open the part file pau_skt_fillet_1, and start the
You will be using this sketch geometry to create fillets.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Step 2 Activate the sketch.
Double-click with MB1 on any of the sketch curves.
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Step 3 Choose the Fillet icon.
You first want to create 4.0 millimeter fillets in the upper left and lower left
corners of the sketch.
Step 4 Make sure Trim Inputs is on (depressed).
Step 5 Create a 4 millimeter fillet using lines L16 and L20,

trimming the lines, and do it with a single select.
Enter 4 in the Radius field on the graphics screen, and press
Enter.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-43
Sketching
Select both lines at the same time, by selecting at their

intersection.
Drag the cursor around the screen and notice that you can
select which quadrant you want.
Select in the lower right quadrant to place the fillet in the

desired quadrant.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Step 6 Create a four millimeter fillet using lines L16 and L17,
with a single select, and this time do not trim the lines
being filleted.
Turn off Trim Inputs.
Select the two lines at their intersection.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Select in the upper right quadrant.
Step 7 Create a 4 millimeter fillet between lines L17 and L18.

Select by dragging across the two lines.
The 4.0 Radius value should still be in the text field on the graphics screen.
With MB1 held down, drag across the two lines as below:
(This is another method of selecting the curves to be filleted.
The curves crossed with the crayon" are the curves
selected.)
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Notice that the 4 millimeter radius was used.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-45
Sketching
Step 8 Create another fillet between lines L18 and L20 by using
the crayon", but his time do NOT use a radius value.
Use Backspace to erase the 4 in the text field.
Drag (with MB1), as shown below:
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ It used the selection location of the curves to determine the radius.
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Step 9 Create a fillet between lines L18 and L19, and drag the
size and quadrant.
Individually select the lines L18 and L19.
Drag the cursor around the screen.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Select a location to create an arc similar to the one shown

below.
Choose Finish.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Step 10 Close the part file. ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-47
Sketching
Activity 4 - Sketching a Gasket
Step 1 Open pau_seedpart_in and save it as ***_gasket_1 where

*** represent your initials.
Step 2 Change the Work Layer to 21 so that the part file will be
compliant with class standards.
Step 3 Create a sketch.
Enter the Modeling application.
Choose Sketch.
Click on the sketch name; key in s21_profile and press Enter.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Choose OK to accept the XC-YC Plane.
Step 4 Set the Infer Constraints Setting.
In this sketch we do not want to apply any constraints at this time, so you will
toggle all constraints off.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Set the dialog as shown below.
Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
Step 5 Create the sketch curves to define the main profile. ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Choose Profile.
Create the 4 lines as shown below.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-49
Sketching
Choose Fillet.
Turn on Trim Inputs.
Select the lines, as shown below, at positions 1, 2, and then a

cursor location at 3.
2 1
3
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ A fillet is created and the lines are trimmed to the tangent points. The system
also displays tangent symbols at the 2 tangent points.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Select the lines, as shown below, at positions 1, 2, and then a

cursor location at 3.
3
1 2
Key in 1 for the Radius value and press Enter.
Select the lines, as shown below, at positions 1 and 2.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
1
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-51
Sketching
The 1 inch radius fillet was created and the lines trimmed to the tangent points.
Select the lines, as shown below, at positions 1 and 2.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ 2
Step 6 Define the holes of the gasket.
Toggle Coincident on.
Choose OK.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Choose Circle.
At the approximate center of the profile, click and drag to

create a circle similar to the one shown below.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
13
Move the cursor over and along the arc on the left side of the ÏÏÏ
profile, until the arc center symbol (1) appears, then click
and drag to create a circle with a diameter of approximately
0.75.
The system now will infer a constraint of coincident between the arc and the
circle.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-53
Sketching
Create the circle for the opposite side using the same
method.
ÏÏÏ The sketch of the profile is now complete. The shape and design intent will be
ÏÏÏ further refined in a later activity with the application of dimensional and
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
geometric constraints.
Choose Finish.
Step 7 Move the reference features to the appropriate layer to

conform with class standards.
Choose Format→Move to Layer from the main menu.
Select the datum plane and 2 datum axes.
Choose OK.
Enter layer number 61 as the destination layer to move the

objects to and choose OK.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Activity 5 - Using Quick Trim and Quick Extend
Step 1 Open the part file pau_skt_quick_1, and start the

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Step 2 Trim curves with Quick Trim.
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
DoubleĆclick on one of the sketch curves to activate the
sketch.
Choose Quick Trim.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-55
Sketching
Select the line where the arrow is pointing in the illustration

below.
ÏÏÏ Hold MB1 down and drag the cursor across the 2 curves as
ÏÏÏ shown below.
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
CtrlĆSelect the curves labeled 1 and 2 for boundaries. Select

on curves 3 and 4 to trim the center portion.
3
4
Step 3 Extending curves with Quick Extend. ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
Choose Quick Extend.
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Place the cursor on the arc at location 1 as labeled below.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-57
Sketching
The status line informs you that the system cannot extend the curve. This is
because there is no other curve that would intersect with the arc.
Place the cursor on the arc at location 2 as labeled below.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
This time notice how the system provides a preview of the extension.
Select the arc at location 2 to create the extension.
Step 4 Continue to experiment with Quick Trim and Quick

Extend until the instructor is ready to continue.
Choose Finish.
Step 5 Close the part file.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Sketch Points
Sketch objects are defined by theoretical points. A line, for instance, is defined
by two points. The sketcher attempts to mathematically solve for the location of
the points by analyzing the constraints (rules) that are placed on objects.
The points that the sketch solver analyzes are referred to as sketch points. By
controlling the locations of these sketch points the line itself may be controlled.
There are various ways to control these points. The sketch points associated
with different types of curves are illustrated in the graphic below.
Line Fillet
Arc
Circle
+
Spline
Point
ÏÏÏ
Ellipse
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
DegreeĆofĆFreedom Arrows (DOF)
Degree of freedom arrows occur at sketch points to indicate that the solver is
unable to fully define where the sketch point exists on the sketch plane. DOF
arrows are only displayed during the creation of dimensions or constraints; they
are yellow, and their base emanates at the sketch point with arrowheads
pointing in both the horizontal or vertical directions (when the sketch point has
no constraints).
An arrow pointing to the right means that the sketch point in question is free to
move in the horizontal direction, both to the right and left. An arrow pointing
up means that the sketch point in question is free to move in the vertical
direction, both up and down. Should there be DOF arrows at a given point in
both directions, the point is free to move in both directions.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-59
Sketching
These arrows provide visual feedback to the user while in the process of
constraining the sketch.
(no display)
Undefined in X and Y Undefined in Y Undefined in X Defined in X

Directions Direction only Direction only and Y Directions
The system removes DOF arrows as rules are written that define the location of
the sketch points.
Arc - Arcs have sketch points at the center and at either end. These
sketch points as well as the radius of the arc may be defined if the user so
desires.
Circle - Circles may have the center point as well as a radius or diameter
defined.
ÏÏÏ Ellipse -An ellipse may have the location of its center defined; also, the
ÏÏÏ parameters for the size and orientation of the ellipse are stored for future
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
editing.
Fillet - Fillets are a specialized case of arc; by definition a fillet is tangent
to the objects with which it is associated. The system applies this rule as
the fillet is created. Fillets may have the same information defined as
other arcs, and in some cases the tangency that is assigned will define the
endpoints.
Line - Lines may have the sketch points at either end defined.
Point - Points may be defined relative to other objects or at specific
locations in space.
Spline - Degree three splines may have their defining points located.
Slopes of the spline at the defining points may also be defined. Splines
that are of a degree other than three may be added to sketches; however,
since their defining points are not located at their knot points, there is no
way to locate their defining points using constraints.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Constraining Sketches
Design Intent
The power in sketching is derived from the ability to capture design intent. This
is accomplished by setting up rules that dictate how sketch objects will react to
changing input. These rules are called constraints. As many or as few constraints
as necessary may be applied to cause the sketch profile to update in the manner
desired. Unigraphics sketches are not required to be fully constrained. A group
of these rules may be thought of as a constraint set. The constraint set is
comprised of two types of constraints, dimensional and geometric and are
accessed from the Sketch Constraints tool bar.
The Sketch Constraints Tool Bar
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Create Constraints
Dimensions
Creating Dimensional Constraints
A dimensional constraint establishes the size of a sketch object (such as the

length of a line or radius of an arc) or the scalar relationship between two
objects (such as the distance between two points).
Dimensional constraints appear in the graphics window. Unlike drafting

dimensions, changing the value of the dimensional constraints changes the shape
and or size of the sketch objects that are controlled by the sketch points. This
changes the feature of the solid model that the sketch curves control.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-61
Sketching
The Dimensions icon accesses the Dimensions dialog.
You can use the dialog to create and edit dimensions, as well as change some of
the preferences.
There are nine icons located near the top of the dialog box. The top leftĆhand
icon is the most useful as it infers the dimension type based on the objects that
are selected and where their dimension text is located. It is also the default
ÏÏÏ icon. The other eight icons are supplied for times when the system is unable to
ÏÏÏ
infer the desired dimension type. These different options are filters" that when
ÏÏÏ
13 selected will only allow a specific dimension type to be created. Because of this,
certain types of geometry may not be selectable if they do not coincide with the
ÏÏÏ dimension type selected.
As dimensional constraints are being created, the dimension, its extension lines,
and arrows are displayed as soon as the geometry has been selected. Drag the
dimension to the desired location and place it by clicking the left mouse button.
During some dimensioning the system infers a dimension type before all of the
geometry has been selected. In these instances continue to select geometry until
the correct dimension type is displayed, or select the icon for the dimension
type desired and reselect the geometry.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
As dimensional constraints are being created, the system creates an expression.

This expression's name and value are displayed in the current expression fields
of the Constraints dialog box. This places the value field in overstrike mode so
the user may enter the desired dimensional constraint. A slider is also provided
below the value text and may be used to change the value.
Enter new Enter new statement

name or numeric value
Use slider bar to

change value
Below the value slider are two option menus for manipulating the appearance
of the dimensional constraint.
ÏÏÏ
The leftĆhand option menu is for defining how the text and arrows of the
ÏÏÏ
dimensional constraint will be displayed. Options are for automatic text
placement where the system decides the appearance, manual text placement ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
with the arrows inside the extension lines, or manual text placement with the
arrows outside the extension lines.
Auto Placement
Manual Placement,
Arrows In
Manual Placement,
Arrows Out
The rightĆhand option menu is for defining whether the dimension's leader is
attached to the right or left of the dimension text.
Leader From Left
Leader From Right
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-63
Sketching
Both of these option menus may be used before, during or after dimension
creation.
Text Height
The display height of the dimension text is controlled by the text entry field at
the bottom of the dialog box. This value may be changed any time the
Dimensions dialog box is active.
The default value is .150 inches. There are no limits to values for this field.
Modifying this value changes all the dimensional constraints in the active
sketch.
Dimensional Constraint Types
Inferred - Allows the system to select any of the dimension types listed
ÏÏÏ below, (except perimeter) based on object selection and cursor location. Points,
ÏÏÏ points on sketch curves (including spline knot points), edges, lines, arcs, datum
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
planes, and datum axes are selectable using this method.
Horizontal - Used to filter the system to specify a distance constraint

between two points with respect to the XĆaxis of the sketch coordinate system.
Points, points on sketch curves (including spline knot points), edges, lines, and
arcs are selectable using this method.
YC
ZC XC
.500 4.000
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Vertical - Used to filter the system to specify a distance constraint

between two points with respect to the YĆaxis of the sketch coordinate system.
Points, points on sketch curves (including spline knot points), edges, lines, and
arcs are selectable using this method.
YC
2.000
ZC XC
.500
Parallel - Used to filter the system to specify a distance constraint

directly between two sketch entities. The parallel dimension is the shortest
ÏÏÏ
distance between the two points. All sketch objects are selectable using this
ÏÏÏ
method. The points selected will be inferred from the objects selected.
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Arcs selected for 1.23 dimension
1.23 .500
Line endpoints
selected for
.500 dimension
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-65
Sketching
Perpendicular - Used to filter the system to specify a distance constraint

measured perpendicular to a selected line and a point or the normal distance.
The first object selected using this method must be linear; the second will be a
point inferred from the next object selected.
.8502
.6302
Angular - Used to filter the system to specify an angular dimensional

constraint between two lines. The angle is measured counterclockwise from the
ends of the lines nearest the cursor upon selection. Only linear objects may be
ÏÏÏ selected with this method.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
p0=45.507
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Radius - Used to filter the system to specify a radial size constraint for an
arc or circle. Only arcs and circles may be selected with this method.
R p4=0.250
Diameter- Used to filter the system to specify a diametral size constraint

for an arc or circle. Only arcs and circles may be selected with this method.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
p1=2.568
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Perimeter- The Perimeter constraint is used to constrain the collective

lengths of lines and arcs to a desired value. After the desired curves are
selected the user chooses OK, a dimensional constraint is created and its name
is prefixed with Perimeter, i.e. Perimeter_p7=6.456. There is no graphical
representation of this constraint on the graphics screen.
Editing Dimensional Constraints`
The editing of dimensional constraints may be achieved as follows:
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-67
Sketching
To edit the value, simply double click on the dimension and edit the value
in the text box and press Enter.
To edit the position, simply drag a dimension's location.
Additional editing that may be done with the Dimensions dialog as listed below:
Name - Enter a new name in the text entry field.
Value - Enter a new value in the text entry field or use the slider.
Position - Click and hold the left mouse button to drag the dimension to
its new position.
Text placement method - Select a different option from the option menu.
Leader side - Select a different option from the option menu.
Text height - Enter a new text size in the text entry field.
NOTE: The name and value of a dimensional constraint may also

be edited by using the Expression Editor. As dimensional constraints
are edited, the constraints are evaluated and the geometry is modified.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ Delay Evaluation
At times it is advantageous not to have the geometry change until all of the
dimensional constraints have been modified. The Delay Evaluation is a toggle
on the Sketch tool bar that controls this condition.
Evaluate Sketch
The Evaluate Sketch button is provided so that the user may control sketch
evaluation when the Delay Evaluation toggle is on. Sketches are evaluated
automatically when the Constraints dialog box is exited.
Update Model
The Update Model icon located on the Sketch tool bar may be used to force the
model to update without leaving the sketch function.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
When a sketch is deactivated the display of the dimensional constraints is

disabled. A toggle switch labeled Retain Dimension is supplied on the Sketch
Preferences dialog box to enable the display should there be a need to display
dimensions without an active sketch (such as to reference expression names
between sketches, plotting, etc.).
Creating Geometric Constraints
A geometric constraint establishes a geometric characteristic of a sketch object

(such as defining a line as being horizontal) or the type of relationship between
two or more objects (such as requiring that two lines be parallel or
perpendicular, or that several arcs have the same radius).
Geometric constraints have no editable numeric values; a constant angle

constraint, for instance, simply dictates that the line stay at the angle it is at
when the constraint is applied.
ÏÏÏ
activates the process of creating constraints. ÏÏÏ
The Create Constraints icon
There is no dialog. ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Constraints are created by selecting the geometry, and then choosing the
desired constraint icon from the upper left corner of the graphics screen. Only
icons for constraints that are possible for the selected curves will be displayed.
If you wish to assign multiple constraints at one time, you can control-select
the objects. Then the icons for constraints will remain on the screen after you
choose the first constraint. You can use MB2 to cancel creation of constraints .
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-69
Sketching
Listed below are all the possible constraints and their respective icon.
Fixed Constant Angle
Collinear Concentric
Horizontal Tangent
Vertical Equal Radius
Parallel Coincident
Perpendicular Point on Curve
Equal Length Midpoint
ÏÏÏ Constant Length Point on String

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ Displaying Constraint Symbols
Constraint symbols are displayed when a sketch is active. Symbols for

Coincident, Point on Curve, Midpoint, Tangent, and Concentric are always
displayed. The other symbols are not displayed at all times.
The Show All Constraints icon will display the symbols for all the
constraints in the active sketch.
Sometimes, when the curves are very small on the screen (the view is zoomed
out), the symbols may not be displayed. You may need to zoom in to see them.
The following is a definition of each of the available geometric constraints:
Coincident - Defines two or more points as having the same location.
Collinear - Defines two or more linear objects as lying on or passing through

the same theoretical straight line.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Concentric - Defines two or more arcs as having the same center.
Constant Angle - Defines a line as having a constant angle.
Constant Length - Defines a line as having a constant length.
Equal Length - Defines two or more lines as being the same length.
Equal Radius - Defines two or more arcs as having the same radius.
Fix - Defines fixed characteristics for geometry, depending on the type of

geometry selected, as follows:
Arc or circle - defines the radius and the location of the centerpoint.
Arc center, elliptical arc center, circle center, or ellipse center - locates
the centerpoint.
Arc or elliptical arc endpoint - locates the endpoint.
Ellipse - locates the centerpoint and defines the radii.
ÏÏÏ
Ellipse center - locates the centerpoint.
ÏÏÏ
Elliptical arc - locates the centerpoint and defines the radii. ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Line - defines the angle and length.
Point - defines the location.
Spline - removes all of its rigid DOFs (it cannot be rigidly rotated or
rigidly dragged).
Spline control point - locates the control point.
Horizontal - Defines a line as horizontal.
Midpoint of Curve - Defines the location of a sketch point as coincident with

the midpoint of a curve.
NOTE: For the Midpoint of Curve constraint, select the curve anywhere
other than at its end points.
Mirror - Defines two objects as being mirror images of each other. This
constraint is automatically created when the mirror function is used. It cannot
be created manually.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-71
Sketching
Parallel - Defines two or more linear objects as being parallel to each other.
Perpendicular - Defines two linear objects as being perpendicular to each

other.
Point on Curve - Defines the location of a sketch point as lying on a curve.
Point on String - Defines the location of a sketch point as lying on an extracted

string.
Slope of Curve - Defines a spline, selected at a defining point, and another

object as being tangent to each other at the selected point.
Scale, NonĆUniform - Thus constrained, a spline will scale in the horizontal

direction while keeping the original dimensions in the vertical direction during
modification.
ÏÏÏ Scale, Uniform - A spline will scale proportionally in both the horizontal and
ÏÏÏ
vertical when the horizontal length changes.
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ A Scale constraint may not be mixed with fixing of an internal spline point
as the uses of the two different constraint types are mutually exclusive.
Tangent - Defines two objects as being tangent to each other.
Vertical - Defines a line as vertical.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Show/Remove Constraints
The Show/Remove Constraints is a tool that aids you in the management of

constraints. The constraints may be listed by object/s or all of the constraints of
the active sketch may be listed at once.
Determines which
objects will have
their constraints
listed.
Determines what
type of
constraints will be
listed.
Determines if the
filtered constraint
will be included
ÏÏÏ
or excluded in
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
the list.
13
Determines what
category of
ÏÏÏ
constraints will be
listed.
Actions that can be

taken on the listed
constraints.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-73
Sketching
Constraint Interrogation
One way to determine what geometric constraints are present is to pass the
selection ball over a sketch object. If the object has a constraint associated with
it, the sketch object will be preĆhighlighted as well as other sketch objects that
share the constraint and the constraint marker will appear next to the sketch
objects. If the selection ball passes over an object which has no constraints
associated with it, preĆhighlighting does not occur. The constraint types and
their markers are shown in the figure below.
Fix Perpendicular
Concentric Tangent
Coincident Equal Length
Colinear Equal Radius
Point on Curve Constant Length
Point on String Constant Angle
Midpoint on Curve Mirror
ÏÏÏ Horizontal Slope of Curve
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Vertical Scale, Uniform
13
ÏÏÏ
Parallel Scale, NonĆUniform
Constraint Categories
There are two major categories of geometric constraints, Explicit and Inferred.
Explicit constraints are constraints that the user has created by assignment
using the constraints dialog or by virtue of the creation method. Inferred
constraints are the Coincident constraints that the system has inferred and
assigned. The user has the option to list only the Explicit, or Inferred
constraints, or both may be listed at the same time.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Constraint Listing
The constraints may also be listed in the Show/Remove Constraints dialog by

selecting one of the three options at the top of the dialog window. They are:
Selected Object Once an object is selected, the associated constraints,

depending on the selected constraint category, are listed in the dialog box. To
view constraints associated with a different sketch object, simply select the new
object.
Selected Objects Allows the selection of multiple objects; the associated

constraints, depending on the selected constraint category, are listed in the
dialog box. Objects may be deselected by holding the shift key down and
selecting the object.
All in Active Sketch List all the constraints of the active sketch, depending on
the selected constraint category.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Listing Box
Any time there are constraints listed in the list box they may be browsed by ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
selecting the constraint to highlight it. When the constraint is highlighted in the
list box, the sketch object(s) that is associated with it is also highlighted in the
graphics area. The Step Up the List and Step Down the List buttons allow easy
navigation through the various constraints. The Up and Down arrows on most
keyboards will mimic this behavior.
Removing Constraints
Constraints may be deleted 3 ways:
Highlight them in the Show/Remove Constraints dialog List box and

select Remove Highlighted Constraint(s).
Turn on Select Constraints (on the Selection tool bar), select the
constraint symbol on the graphics screen, and then choose the Delete
icon.
Turn on Select Constraints, select the constraint symbol on the graphics
screen, and then use MB3→Delete to delete selected constraint.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-75
Sketching
Undo
The user may access undo from the edit pulldown on the main menu, the third
mouse button popĆup menu, or the accelerator keys. Undo takes the creation
procedure back one step at a time.
Dragging Geometry
UnderĆconstrained geometry can be dragged by simply holding down and

dragging MB1 while on the selected curve(s) or point(s).
Selection
When in the Sketcher Task Environment, the selection toolbar changes. It has
two icons that are only available in the Sketcher.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Select Sketch Objects allows selection of all objects in the sketch -
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
curves and dimensions.
Select Constraints allows selection of constraint symbols on the graphics

screen.
Deselect All deselects all objects that are currently selected.
Constraint Conditions
When the Constraints dialog box is active, the status line lists the constraint
condition for the active sketch. A sketch may be fully constrained, under
constrained, or over constrained. When the sketch is under constrained the status
line will indicate the number of constraints needed.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
A sketch is evaluated each time a constraint is placed upon the sketch. Each
time a sketch is evaluated, the system attempts to solve the set of constraints
that describe how the geometric objects are positioned and their relationships
with each other.
In order to completely capture the design intent of a particular profile, it may

be beneficial to fully constrain the sketch. This occurs when the solver is able to
completely define all sketch geometry.
It is important to remember that there is no requirement to fully constrain a

sketch. The design intent has been captured sufficiently when the constraint set
applied to the profile causes it to update in the intended manner.
ÏÏÏ
A sketch is under constrained when there is insufficient information to ÏÏÏ
completely locate each sketch point. DegreeĆofĆfreedom arrows are displayed at
each point that could not be solved to identify the direction in which that point
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
remains free to move.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-77
Sketching
Constraining Example
Lines constrained
to be horizontal
LINE A
Lines constrained
to be vertical
In the profile above, some elements are partially constrained due to system
applied constraints, such as the 3 degree snap angle default for horizontal and
vertical lines.
Line A has a system applied vertical geometric constraint. The bottom point of
ÏÏÏ line A has a fixed geometric constraint applied by the user. The
ÏÏÏ degreeĆofĆfreedom arrow at the top of line A now points in the Y axis direction.
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
This indicates the point is constrained in the X axis direction but not in the Y
axis direction.
Degree of freedom arrows may assist in the constraining process; however, until
the location of at least one object is defined, no degree of freedom arrows will
be removed. Defining the location of an object may be accomplished in a
number of ways.
Sketch objects may be located relative to edges of a solid model, datum planes,
or to datum axes using geometric constraints, dimensional constraints, or
positioning dimensions.
Fixing the location of a point fully defines the location of that point to the
solver. It is important to remember that there is no numeric input in fixing an
object. An object must be created in the proper location or be otherwise located
prior to fixing in order for the fix constraint to be properly applied.
A sketch is over constrained when too much constraint information is supplied

to the solver. For instance, specifying a geometric constraint on two lines that
identifies them as being equal in length, then placing a dimensional constraint
on each to identify their length would cause the sketch to be over constrained.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
The system highlights in yellow the geometry and dimensional constraints that
are causing the over constrained condition in order to prompt for the over
constrained situation to be corrected.
An unwanted constraint must be removed before the system will change the
geometric configuration.
The sketch is displayed in the last solved condition.
Dimensional constraints that are not related to the over constrained condition
are displayed in green. Geometry that is not related to the over constrained
condition is displayed in cyan.
Dimensional constraints that are in conflict in the current configuration with

the current constraint set are displayed in pink. Geometry that is not solvable in
the current configuration with the current constraint set is displayed in gray.
At times the system displays all geometry in gray and all dimensional constraints
in pink. This indicates that the constraint set that has been supplied is not
ÏÏÏ
solvable with the geometry in its current configuration. Constraints may need to
ÏÏÏ
be added or removed in order for the sketcher to be able to solve the constraint
set. ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-79
Sketching
Activity 6 - Constraining a Profile

Constrain the pipe vise profile sketch to satisfy the stated design intent.
Design Intent
Apply constraints to the curves so that the following may be controlled:
The outside envelope of the part.
The included angle of the angled lines.
The angled lines must remain centered in the part horizontally.
The width of the slot at the bottom of the angled lines is controlled by the
radius at the bottom of the slot.
Step 1 Open pau_pipevise_1 and start the Modeling application.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Step 2 Activate the sketch S21_PROFILE.
DoubleĆclick on a sketch curve.
Step 3 View the system applied constraints.
Choose the Show/Remove Constraints icon.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
The Show/Remove Constrains dialog box is displayed.
Choose the radio button in the List Constraints For: area for
All In Active Sketch.
Ensure that the Show Constraints category to Explicit.
The system created constraints are now displayed in the list box. The dialog box
should look similar to the graphic shown at right.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Choose the first constraint in the list.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-81
Sketching
The object referred to in the list is highlighted in the graphics area. There
should be one horizontal line highlighted in the graphics window. Let the
instructor know if this is not the case.
Use the UP and DOWN arrow buttons located to the right of

the list box to browse through the constraint list.
Cancel the Show/Remove Constraints dialog box.
Step 4 View the degree of freedom arrows.
Choose the Create Constraints icon.
Notice that there are degree of freedom arrows at each of the sketch points.
Even though most of the objects in the sketch have constraints associated with
them, the sketch points are free to move in all directions. This is because the
system cannot locate any of the points relative to model space.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Step 5 Constrain the location of a point.
Select the lower endpoint of the left vertical line.
Select the vertical datum axis.
In the upper left corner of the screen choose the
Point on Curve icon.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
The geometry now changes to follow the constraint. The point at the bottom of
the left vertical line is now constrained in the horizontal direction.
Select the left endpoint of the bottom horizontal line.
Select the horizontal datum axis.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose the Point on Curve icon.
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-83
Sketching
The geometry now changes to follow the new constraint. The shared sketch
point at the bottom of the left vertical line is now constrained in both the
horizontal and vertical directions. The degree of freedom arrows go away at this
point, and, due to the horizontal and vertical constraints on the lines that share
the sketch point, one of the arrows on the opposite end of those lines has
disappeared.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ Step 6 Move the datum planes and axes to layer 61.
The datums have served their purpose of locating the sketch. You will now
move them to ease selection of objects and clean up the screen display.
Choose Finish.
Choose Format→Move to Layer

Choose Type.
Choose Datums and choose OK.
Choose Select All and OK.
Enter 61 in the dialog box layer field and press Enter.
Step 7 Continue adding constraints to satisfy the stated design

intent.
DoubleĆclick on a sketch curve to activate the sketch.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Choose Create Constraints.
Hold the Ctrl key down and select the two horizontal lines at
the top of the profile.
Choose Collinear and Equal Length.
Now Equal Length
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Choose Deselect All.
Select the arc at the bottom of the slot taking note on which
side you choose. Select the end of the short vertical line on
the same side of the arc.
Choose Tangent.
Repeat the process for the other side of the slot.
Hold the Ctrl key down and select the bottom horizontal line
and the lower endpoint of the line originating from the arc
center.
Choose Point on Curve.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-85
Sketching
Choose Midpoint.
Choose Deselect All.
Select the line between the midpoint and the arc center.
Choose Vertical.
Now vertical
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Adding dimensional constraints to satisfy the controlling portions of the design
intent will allow the profile to be changed by modifying the numerical values.
Choose the Dimensions icon.
With the constraint type set to infer, select the bottom

horizontal line. Drag the dimension to position it and select
with MB1 to place it.
Type in a value of 5 and press Enter.
Fit the view if necessary.
Select the left vertical line and place the dimension for it.
Change the value to 3.75.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Select the top left horizontal line and place the dimension.
Change its value to .5.
Fit the view if necessary.
Select the lower end (over half way, not endpoint) of the left
angled line. Select the right end of the top left horizontal
line, avoiding its control points. Place the angular dimension
and change its value to 45°.
Select here first
Select here
second
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Select the left end of the top right horizontal line, avoiding ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
its control points. Select the bottom end of the right angled
line. Place this angular dimension and change its value to the
'p' number assigned to the other angular dimension.
Select the arc at the bottom of the slot. Place the radius
dimension and change its value to .25.
Select the line connecting the arc center and the midpoint
and place this vertical dimension. Change its value to 1.5 and
choose OK.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-87
Sketching
The Status line now informs you that the sketch is fully constrained. Remember
that there is no need to fully constrain the profile if it is updating in the manner
desired.
Step 8 Change the constraints on the sketch to alter the included

angle in the notch.
ÏÏÏ Double click on the first angular dimensional constraint that
ÏÏÏ was created and change it from a 45° to 30°.
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Notice that the depth of the notch is unchanged as a result of this change.
Should that have not been our intent, we would have to constrain the sketch in
a different manner.
Choose Finish.
Step 9 Choose File "Close"All Parts.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Activity 7 - Constraining the Gasket

In this activity you will fully constrain the sketch that was created earlier.
Step 1 Open ***_gasket_1 where *** represent your initials or

open pau_gasket_1 and save as ***_gasket_1a.
Step 2 Make Layer 61 Selectable in order to view the reference

features.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Step 3 Activate the sketch containing the profile.
Ensure that the Modeling application is active.
DoubleĆclick on a sketch curve to activate the sketch.
Fit the view.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-89
Sketching
Use the steps on the following pages to constrain the profile as shown below.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Step 4 Review the existing constraints.
Choose Show/Remove Constraints.
Choose All in Active Sketch.
Set Show Constraints to Explicit.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Review the constraints by clicking on each one in the listing

and observe which curves are highlighted in the graphic
window.
Notice how each curve in the profile is tangent to its adjacent

curve. This is due to the creation method that was used.
ÏÏÏ
In the Show/Remove Constraints dialog, ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ

13
choose Selected Objects.
Select one of the circles.

ÏÏÏ
Notice that there are no constraints listed.
Set Show Constraints to Inferred.
Now observe that a Coincident constraint is listed.
Select the circle on the other side and notice how the system
indicates an arc to which it is coincident.
Choose Cancel.
Toggle Show All Constraints on.
Notice the two Equal Radius symbols.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-91
Sketching
Choose the Select Constraints icon from the Selection

toolbar.
Place the cursor over one of the Equal Radius symbols.
The arcs that share this constraint are highlighted.
Place the cursor over one of the Coincident symbols.
The circle and arc that share that point of incidence are highlighted.
Choose the Select Sketch Objects icon.
Step 5 Constrain the sketch.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Notice the Degree Of Freedom markers associated with the sketch points,
remember that these are supplied to give feedback on the constraint condition
of the sketch. These markers will be removed from the display as the sketch
points are explicitly located.
Select the center circle and the bottom arc, avoiding control
points along the way.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Choose Concentric.
Step 6 Locate the profile in space.

ÏÏÏ
Select the arc center of the center circle and the horizontal
ÏÏÏ
datum axis.
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
The entire profile moves to follow the constraint just applied.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-93
Sketching
Select the arc center of the center circle again and the
vertical datum axis.
Note that the degree of freedom markers at the large arc center have been
removed, this point is now explicitly located.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Step 7 Apply Point on Curve design intent.
The design intent is that the arc center of all three circles lie on the same
horizontal centerline.
Select the arc center of the left circle and the horizontal
datum axis.
Repeat the above actions for the right circle, constraining it

to fall on the centerline" represented by the datum axis.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Note how the profile changes shape to obey the constraints as they are applied.
Also note that the Degree Of Freedom markers at the selected points have
been removed in the vertical direction. These points has been constrained in
the vertical direction but are still free to move in the horizontal direction.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Step 8 Applying equal radius design intent.
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
The upper and lower center arcs are intended to be the same radius. The circles
on either end are intended to be the same size as shown by the dimension.
Select the upper and lower arcs of the profile.
Be sure not to include control points in the selection process,

points and curves have a different constraint set than those
of two curves.
Choose Equal Radius.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-95
Sketching
Repeat the process for the two small circles.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Step 9 Apply dimensional constraints to define the size of the
profile.
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ Choose the Dimensions icon.
Use the Inferred dimension type to create all of the dimensions shown below.
Change Auto Placement to
Manual Placement, Arrows In.
Select the center circle and place the dimension.
Location of the dimension is not as important as being able to read it.
Change the value of the dimension to 2 and press Enter.
Create a horizontal dimension between the arc center of the

left circle and the arc center of the center circle. Place the
dimension.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Change the value of the dimension to 2.625.
Create a horizontal dimension between the arc centers of the

two smaller circles and place the dimension.
The status line indicates that the sketch needs 5 constraints in order to be fully
constrained.
Select one of the end circles and place the dimension.
Change the value of the dimension to .5.
Select one of the end arcs and place the dimension.
Change the value of the dimension to .5.
Select the lower arc and place the dimension.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
The status line indicates that the sketch needs 2 more constraints. Notice that
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
we forgot to create a concentric constraint between the upper arc and the
center circle.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-97
Sketching
Select the center circle and the upper arc, avoiding control
points.
Choose Concentric.
The status line now states that the Sketch is fully constrained.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Choose Create Constraints to exit that function.
Step 10 Change the design intent by making the gasket longer.
Double click on the dimension with the value 5.25.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Edit the value to 7.25.
Notice that the profile updates and the tangent condition is maintained.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose Finish. ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-99
Sketching
Convert To/From Reference
At times it is nice to be able to see what the effects of a change are numerically,
but adding a dimensional constraint to do this causes the sketch to be over
constrained. Additionally, sketch curves may need to be associated to other
sketch curves that are not intended to represent a portion of the swept feature.
To support these needs, Unigraphics allows Reference objects within sketches.
These reference objects may be either curves or dimensional constraints. The
Convert To/From Reference icon is located in the sketch management area of
the Sketch Tools dialog box.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
To change the status of the objects, set the radio button to the status desired,
select the object(s) and choose OK or Apply. An option menu is provided to
filter for All (the default), Curve, or Dimension.
Reference curves are displayed in gray color and phantom line font. Reference
curves are ignored during sweep operations.
Reference dimensional constraints are shown in white color and only the value
portion of the expression is shown, regardless of the preference setting. The
value for this reference dimension will be updated as the sketch is changed, but
it does not control the sketch geometry with which it is associated.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Activity 8 - Constraint Conditions

In this activity, you will constrain and edit a simple sketch to change the design
intent. This configuration is not one that you would likely sketch, but its
simplicity allows the concept of over constrained to be easily shown.
Design Intent
Apply constraints to control the length and width of the sketch. The shape of
the sketch should remain rectangular.
Width
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Length
Step 1 Open pau_seedpart_in.
Step 2 Create a sketch on Layer 21.
Start the Modeling application.
Change the work layer to 21.
Choose Sketch.
Choose OK.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-101
Sketching
Step 3 Create a rectangle.
Choose the Rectangle icon.
Select a cursor location, then drag and select a second cursor

location to create the rectangle.
Choose Cancel.
Step 4 Interrogate the constraints that currently exist on this

sketch.
Choose the Show/Remove Constraints icon.
Choose the radio button for All In Active Sketch.
ÏÏÏ Set the Show Constraints to Explicit.

ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Highlight the top constraint in the list and use the down
arrow button to browse through the constraints.
Choose Cancel.
Step 5 Apply constraints to locate the sketch on the sketch plane.
Choose the Create Constraints icon.
Select an endpoint of the left vertical line and the vertical

datum axis.
Select an endpoint of the bottom horizontal line and the

horizontal datum axis.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Step 6 Move the reference features to the proper layer.
Choose Finish.
Choose Format→Move to Layer
Select the reference objects and choose OK.
Type 61 in the destination layer field and choose OK.
DoubleĆclick on a sketch curve.
Step 7 Apply dimensional constraints to control the length and

ÏÏÏ
width of the part as per the design intent.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
p3=2.750
p2=4.500
With the dimension type set to Infer, select the bottom

horizontal line and place the dimension.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-103
Sketching
Select the left hand vertical line and place the dimension.
Choose OK.
As dimensional constraints are being created, the degreeĆofĆfreedom arrows are

eliminated. The sketch is fully constrained using one vertical and one horizontal
dimensional constraint, along with the geometric constraints of horizontal and
vertical that the system applied to the lines due to the manner of construction.
Design Change
Modify the sketch so that it can be controlled by the angle and length of a
diagonal line.
ÏÏÏ p5=5.274
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
p4=31.430
Step 8 Create a diagonal line in the sketch and convert it to

reference.
Choose the Line icon.
Select the lower left endpoint and the upper right endpoint
to define the line.
Choose the Convert To/From Reference icon and

ensure that Reference is toggled On.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Select the diagonal line and choose OK.
Step 9 Apply an angular dimensional constraint.
Select the right end of the lower horizontal line and the right
end of the diagonal line, and indicate a location for the
angular dimension.
The angle will be applied to the ends of the lines closest to the cursor position
in a counter clockwise manner.
At this point the system has more information than is required. The sketch is
over constrained.
The system changes the color of the sketch objects that have constraints applied ÏÏÏ
to them that are associated to the over constrained condition.
ÏÏÏ
In this case all of the active sketch curves and dimensional constraints are
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
displayed in yellow. To correct the over constrained condition, one or more of
the offending constraints must by removed.
Remember, the new design intent is to drive the sketch with angular and
diagonal length dimensions.
Step 10 Apply a parallel dimensional constraint.
Select the diagonal line and place a parallel dimension.

Notice that the sketch configuration does not change when the value is
modified. The system leaves the geometry in its last solved state until the over
constrained condition is resolved.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-105
Sketching
Choose Cancel.
p5=6.500
p3=2.750
p4=35.000
p2=4.500
Step 11 Convert sketch dimensions to reference.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Choose the Convert To/From Reference icon.
Select the horizontal and vertical dimensions, and choose

OK.
The sketch is returned to a fully constrained condition. The reference

dimensional constraints are shown to reflect the value only. Reference
dimensions do not apply rules to the geometry to which they are attached.
Another method of resolving the over constrained condition would have been
to delete the horizontal and vertical dimensions.
Choose Finish.
Step 12 Choose File "Close"All Parts.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sketching
SUMMARY This lesson introduced the concept of sketch

creation.
Sketches may be used to define a base feature,

guide paths, and additional associative features
to the base feature.
A sketch parametrically controls curves and

captures design intent.
To do this constraints are applied to sketch

objects in order to capture the design intent.
The level of constraint, partial or full, is
determined by the design intent and what is
necessary to capture it.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
In this lesson you:
Created a sketch on a fixed datum plane.
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
Created a sketch on an existing solid face.
Freehand sketched curves in a sketch.
Constrained Sketches
Created Dimensional Constraints
Edited Dimensional Constraints
Created Geometric Constraints
Created Inferred Geometric Constraints
EDS
All Rights Reserved
13-107
Sketching
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
13
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Swept Features and Boolean Operations

Lesson 14
PURPOSE To introduce Swept Features and Boolean Operations.
Extrude a body.
Extrude a body with offsets.
Create a Body of Revolution.
Create a solid by sweeping a profile along a guide
curve.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
14-1
Types of Swept Features
Swept features/bodies are created by extruding, revolving, or sweeping a section

string. The section string may be composed of explicit curves, sketch curves,
solid edges, solid faces, and sheet bodies.
An Extruded Body is one that is swept in a linear direction for a specified

distance.
Section string Resulting

feature
Direction
A Body of Revolution is one that has been rotated around a specified axis.
Section string
Axis
Resulting
feature
A Sweep Along Guide body is one that has been swept along a guide string.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ
Section string
Resulting
feature
Guide string
The features/bodies that are created will be associated with both the section
string and the guide string.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Creating Swept Features from Sketches
When sweeping a sketch you may or may not want to sweep all of the sketch
curves. By default the system selects the entire sketch when any sketch curve is
selected. When using a sketch to define the section string do one of the
following:
To select all the curves in a sketch - select any one curve belonging to the
sketch.
To select individual curves within a sketch - choose the Curve or Chain
Curves option, and then select the desired curves.
Sweeping a partial sketch is a technique that is used when one sketch may
define multiple features.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
14-3
Extrude
The Insert"Form Feature"Extrude option allows a solid body/feature to be

created by sweeping planar, section string geometry in a linear direction for a
specified distance.
Rules for Extruding Section String Objects
The Body Type switch found under Preferences→Modeling, controls whether a

solid body or a sheet body is created when extruding section string geometry.
When set to Solid" the following rules will apply:
Extruding a set of closed planar connected curves creates a solid body.

Extruding a set of closed planar connected curves with another closed set
within the boundary of the first creates a solid with an interior hole.
Extruding a curve or set of planar connected curves which are not closed
creates a sheet body unless extrude with offsets is used.
Extrusion Options
Direction & Distance option allows specification of the extrusion direction and
the start and end distances of the extrusion relative to the plane of the selected
section string. The extrusion does not need to start at the plane of the section
string.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
14 Trim to Face/Plane option allows the end distance of an extrusion to be
ÏÏÏ associated to an existing solid face or datum plane. The extrusion starts at, and
is normal to, the plane of the section string.
Trim Between Two Faces/Plane option allows the start and end of the extrusion
to be associated with specified faces or planes of the same body regardless of
the location of the section string geometry. The extrusion will be normal to the
plane of the section string.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Activity 1 - Swept Features

In this activity you will start to create the draglink part. As you work through
this lesson and learn new sweep skills, you will continue to develop the draglink
by applying those skills.
Step 1 Open part file pau_draglink_2, save as ***_draglink_2,

and start the modeling application.
Step 2 Extrude the curves.
Choose Extrude.
Select all of the curves and choose OK.
Choose Direction & Distance.
Choose Cycle Vector Direction so that the vector points down

and choose OK.
Key in the following:
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Start Distance . 0
14
ÏÏÏ
End Distance . 152.5
First Offset . . . . 0
Second Offset . 0
Taper Angle . . . 0
Choose OK.
Fit the View.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
14-5
Boolean Operations
Boolean operations are used to create a single solid body out of two or more
existing solid bodies. Unigraphics senses when a solid already exists in a file
and another is being created, the following menu appears for the Boolean
Operation.
The new solid may be created as a separate solid using Create, or a Boolean
operation (Unite, Subtract, or Intersect) may be performed on the two solids
during creation to make one resultant solid.
The Boolean Operations may also be created as a separate feature using the
Insert"Feature Operation options shown in the menu below. When using these
operations, a Target Solid and a Tool Solid need to be specified to perform the
boolean operation.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
NOTE: Creation of Booleans as separate features allows for

future editing of the Boolean operations.
ÏÏÏ
Defining Target and Tool Solids ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ
The Target solid is the solid body on which operations are executed. In the
figure below, to unite the two cylinders to the block, the block is chosen as the
target solid.
The Tool solid is the solid body that operates upon the target solid.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
14-7
NOTE: The target solid passes its attributes on to the Boolean

operation result. Therefore, the resultant solid inherits the layer,
material density, etc. of the Target Solid.
Target solid
Tool solids
The Boolean Operations are described below.
Unite
This option allows two or more solid bodies to be combined into one.
Target solid Completed solid
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ Tool solids
Before After
EDS Unigraphics NX
Subtract
This option allows material to be removed from a solid body (Target Body) by
using another solid body as the Tool Solid, leaving empty space where the Tool
body existed.
Tool solid
Target solid
Before Tool solid After
Intersect
This Boolean allows a new solid to be created from two solids. The resultant
solid will be that portion which is common to both of the selected solids.
Before After ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ
Target solid
Tool solid
EDS
All Rights Reserved
14-9
Swept Feature Errors
If you attempt to unite a tool solid within a target solid and there is no change
in topology, the system would warn you with the following message.
If you attempt to unite, subtract, or intersect a tool solid with a target solid and
the two solids do not touch, the system would warn you with the following
message.
If you attempt to subtract a tool solid from a target solid and the operation
would produce a zero thickness, the system would warn you with the following
message.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ Generator
Curves
Zero thickness
EDS Unigraphics NX
Rules for Extruding With Taper
The Taper Start radio buttons determine if the taper starts At Defining
String or At Start Distance when a taper is specified.
A positive taper angle creates an inward taper.
A negative angle creates an outward taper.
If the section string included interior holes, the holes would be tapered in
the opposite direction to the outside objects.
Positive Taper Angle Negative Taper Angle

Normal vector
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ
Plane of selected objects
EDS
All Rights Reserved
14-11
Extruding With Offsets
Once an extrusion method has been specified, arrows are displayed in the
graphics area to relay information. The arrow displayed in solid font is the
Extrusion Direction arrow, indicating the direction that positive values will be
extruded. The arrow displayed in dashed font is the Offset Direction arrow,
indicating the direction that positive offset values will be applied. The extrusion
values as well as the offset values may be entered in the Parameters menu.
Positive
Extrusion
Direction
Positive Offset YC
Direction
ZC XC
Using positive values in the First Offset or Second Offset field will offset the
extrusion in the direction of the arrow. Using negative values in the First Offset
or Second Offset field will offset the extrusion in the opposite direction of the
dashed arrow.
Offset Examples
Offset
ÏÏÏ
Section
Geometry
ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ Offset on arrow side
(Positive)
Section
Geometry
Offset on both sides

Offset on opposite side (One offset neg., one offset pos.)
(Negative)
EDS Unigraphics NX
Activity 2 - Extruding with Offsets

In this activity, additional extruded features will be added to complete the part.
Step 1 Open the part pau_extrude_1.
Step 2 Save the file as ***_extrude_1 where *** represent your

initials.
Step 3 Create a tube by extruding with an offset.
Choose Extrude.
Select the inside, large circle as the section geometry.
Choose OK.
Choose Direction Distance.
Choose OK to accept the default direction (vector pointing
ÏÏÏ

up).
ÏÏÏ
14
Enter the following values:
ÏÏÏ
Start Distance = 0
End Distance = 2.5
First Offset = 0
Second Offset = .25
Taper Angle = 0
If the offset vector is pointing away from the center of the part, use a negative
value for the Second Offset. If it is pointing to the center use a positive value
for the Second Offset.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
14-13
Press Enter.
Choose Create.
Choose Insert"Feature Operation"Unite.
Select the base as the target body.
Select the tube as the tool body.
Choose OK.
Choose Fit from the third mouse button PopĆUp Menu.
The selected curve is extruded from its origin, normal to its creation plane as
was indicated by the solid arrow, to a distance 2.5 units from the start distance.
The solid feature created to this length is also defined as being .25 units thick
inside the generator curve. This thickness was defined by the value entered in
the Second Offset field due to the direction of the dashed arrow.
The current model should look like the figure below.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ
Step 4 Create a flange at the top of the cylinder.
Choose Extrude.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Select the top outer edge of the cylindrical extrusion.
Select this edge
Choose OK.

and choose OK.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
14-15
Key in:
Start Distance = 0
End Distance = .25
First Offset = 0
Second Offset = .25
Taper Angle = 0
Choose OK.
Choose Create.
Select the main body as the target body.
Select the feature that was just created as the tool body.
Choose OK.
The selected edge is extruded from its origin, normal to its creation plane as
was indicated by the solid arrow, to a distance .25 units from the start distance.
The solid feature created to this length is also defined as being .25 units thick
outside the generator edge. This thickness was defined by the values entered in
the First and Second Offset fields relative to dashed arrow.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ
Step 5 Subtract an extrusion from the flange.
Choose Extrude.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Select the edge as shown to extrude.
Select this edge
Choose OK.

and choose OK.
The edge must be extruded with the offsets in the proper direction to create the
groove shown below.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ
Key in:
Start Distance = 0
End Distance = .075
First Offset = .15
Second Offset = .275
Taper Angle = 0
EDS
All Rights Reserved
14-17
Choose OK.
Choose Subtract.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sweep along Guide
The Insert"Form Feature"Sweep along Guide option allows features to be

created by sweeping a section string along a guide string.
Rules for Sweeping Section String Objects Along a Guide

Just like other sweep types, solid or sheet bodies are created based on the
current Modeling Preferences Body Type setting and the closure
condition of the curves (i.e. open string or enclosed string).
An open section string swept along a guide path that forms an enclosed
loop will automatically cap the end faces, providing the Modeling
Preferences Body Type is set to Solid.
Open section strings will always be swept into a solid body when using the
sweep with offset option.
Only one Section String and only one Guide String may be selected.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
14-19
Guide Strings Containing Sharp Corners
When using Sweep along Guide where the guide string contains sharp corners,
it is recommended that the section string be placed away from a sharp corner.
The section string also needs to be located on an end point of one of the guide
string objects.
Guide string
Two separate
line entities
Section string here

located on an endpoint Do not put
Section string here
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ Solid body
EDS Unigraphics NX
Activity 3 - Sweeping Along a Guide

In this activity, use the third method of sweeping, Sweep along Guide to create
a solid body.
Step 1 Open part file pau_sweep_1 and start the Modeling

application.
The curves are displayed in two colors. Sweep the section string along the guide
string to create a shape that could be used as a base or platform.
Guide string
Section string
Choose Insert"Form Feature"Sweep along Guide.
The Cue prompts to Select section string. Select the orange

curves and confirm the selections as necessary.
Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ
The cue prompts to Select guide string.
ÏÏÏ
14
Select the yellow guide string and confirm the selections as
necessary.
ÏÏÏ
Choose OK.
Choose OK to accept the direction.
The cue prompts to Specify Sweep offsets and a dialog box displays for First
Offset and Second Offset. Offsets work the same way as for extrusions, but they
will not be used here.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
14-21
Ensure that the First and Second Offsets are set to 0 (zero).
Choose OK on the dialog box to create the solid body.
The base is created. Shade the display if desired to better view the model. The
open section string was swept along the full length of the guide string and the
system automatically caps the open ends to produce a solid body.
The Sweep along Guide function may be used to sweep any section string along
a guide string.
Optional Challenge - Undo the solid and create it again,

this time use a .25 single offset toward the outside of the
curves. The part should resemble the figure shown.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Defining a Sweep Region
In some cases when sweep generator geometry is selected, there is a possibility

that multiple sweep areas may exist. At these times you will be prompted by the
system to define a region to sweep.
The system will prompt you to define a region when the selected generator
geometry is made up of one of the following:
Noncontiguous geometry that makes up a closed loop.

Geometry that provides more than one possible sweep area.
Example of
noncontiguous
curves.
Noncontiguous
closed loop made
up of 4 curves.
Region 1
ÏÏÏ
Region 2
ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ
Selecting these six curves
produces two possible
sweep regions.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
14-23
Activity 4 - Defining a Sweep Region

In this activity you will continue to develop the draglink part.
Step 1 Make ***_draglink_2 the active part.
Step 2 Create a feature by sweeping curves along a path.
Make layer 42 the work layer and all other layers invisible.
Notice that there is no top to the IĆBeam shape.
Generator
geometry.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ
Feature to be
created.
EDS Unigraphics NX
These curves will

be used to define
the sweep cross
section.
Choose Insert"Form Feature"Sweep along Guide.

Select the curves shown above for the section string and
choose OK.
Indicate the region by selecting inside the IĆBeam shape.
Make layer 1 the work layer and layer 43 selectable. Fit the
view.
Define the guide string by selecting the yellow curves and
choose OK.
Second Offset . 0
Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ
Choose Create. ÏÏÏ
14
Choose Insert"Feature Operation"Unite. ÏÏÏ
Select the first body created as the target body.
Select the IĆBeam body as the tool body.
Choose OK.
Fit the view.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
14-25
Revolve
The Insert"Form Feature"Revolve option allows you to create a feature by

rotating a section string around an axis through a specified angle.
Rules for Revolving Section String Objects
Just like with extruded section strings, a solid or sheet body is created based on
the closure condition of the curves and current Body Type setting found under
Preferences→Modeling. Exceptions apply as follows:
Revolving open section strings will cause the system to automatically cap
the end faces to produce a solid body however, the rotation must be a full
360° and the Modeling Preferences Body Type switch must be set to Solid.
The Right Hand rule determines direction of swept.
Body of Revolution Options
Axis & Angle - This option allows creation of a single feature by revolving the
section curves about a specified axis.
The amount of rotation is determined by entering a Start Angle and End

Angle. The total number of degrees cannot exceed 360.
The plane of the selected curves is considered zero degrees. The angles
entered determine the number of degrees the system revolves the selected
ÏÏÏ curves about the selected axis.
ÏÏÏ
14 Entering a Start Angle which is greater than the End Angle causes the
ÏÏÏ

system to sweep in the direction of negative rotation. First Offset and
Second Offset function in the same manner as the offsets discussed in
extruded bodies.
Trim To Face/Plane - This option allows creation of a feature on the target

solid by revolving the section geometry to a trimming face or datum plane.
Trim Between Two Faces/Planes - This option allows creation of a feature on

the target solid by revolving section curves between two trimming faces or
datum planes.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Activity 5 - Creating a Body of Revolution

In this activity, you will create revolved features using a variety of methods.
Step 1 Open part file pau_revolve_1.
Step 2 Select and Revolve the Section String.
Choose Revolve.
The Chain Curves option is an easy way to select a group of contiguous curves.
Choose Chain Curves from the dialog box.
If the loop is closed, pick any one curve and choose OK, the entire string is then
selected.
If the loop is open as below, the start of the chain must be defined as well as the
chain direction. The cue line will prompt you to Select Start Curve of Chain.
Care must be taken to select the first object such that the system may chain
toward the last object.
Select the curves as shown below.
Select this end of

this object first
Select this
object second
or choose OK.
Chain Direction
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
14

Choose OK twice.
Choose Axis Angle.
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
14-27
The cue prompts you to Enter Direction - Select object or enter I,J,K values to
define vector
Select the Datum Axis and choose OK.
A dialog box displays fields for the Start Angle, End Angle, and Offsets.
Start Angle . . . 0
End Angle . . . . 360
Second Offset . 0
Choose OK.
A solid revolved body has been created from an open section string.
Remember, if a solid body is desired through a sweep of less than 360° the
section string must be closed, or an open section string may be revolved with
offsets to form a solid shell using any angle values.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ Shade the part to check the shape of the solid body.
Step 3 Revolve a closed section string with an Offset.
Now use the same section string as before to create a new revolved body using
an offset and an angle to form a shell.
Choose Cancel and then Undo (third mouse button popĆup).
EDS Unigraphics NX
Choose Revolve.
Select the section string again and confirm the selection.
Choose Axis Angle as the method of revolution.
Select the Datum Axis and choose OK.
Start Angle . . . 0
End Angle . . . . 180
Second Offset . .25
Choose OK.
Plane of curves
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ
Notice that the revolution starts at the plane of the curves and revolves in a
CCW direction with respect to the positive axis of rotation. (Datum Axis). The
Right Hand Rule for Positive Rotation applies.
Step 4 Revolve a solid face using Axis and Angle option.
Now close one end of the solid without creating any new section string
geometry by revolving an existing face.
The cue line should still be prompting to Select section string.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
14-29
Choose Solid Face from the dialog box.
Select the solid face as shown and confirm the selection.
Choose OK twice.
Select this
face
Choose Axis Angle as the method of revolution.
Choose XC Axis and choose OK.
Select the far end point of the edge, as shown below, as the
rotation point.
Select left
end of the
top linear
edge of the
selected
ÏÏÏ face
ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ
Start Angle . . . 0
End Angle . . . . -90
Second Offset . 0
EDS Unigraphics NX
Choose OK.
The cue line prompts to Choose boolean operation from the dialog box that is to
be performed with the revolved feature.
Choose Create.
Select the target and tool solids as shown below.
Target solid
Tool solid
Choose OK.
The model should now appear as shown with one end enclosed.
Optional Challenge - This shell is one of two molded parts

that must fit together. Add a lip to the outside edge of the
part by extending the outside edges of the top planar face
with an offset value and height value equal to half the shell
thickness.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ
Step 5 Close the part do not save.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
14-31
Activity 6 - Adding a Body of Revolution

In this activity you will continue to develop the draglink part.
Step 1 Make ***_draglink_2 the active part and start the

modeling application.
Step 2 Create a body of revolution.
Make layer 44 selectable and all other layers invisible. Layer

1 will remain the work layer.
ÏÏÏ
Generator
geometry.
ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ
Feature to
be created.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Choose Insert"Form Feature"Revolve.
Select section string as shown below and choose OK.
Section String
Choose Axis Angle.
Define the axis direction by choosing ZC Axis and

choose OK.
Choose Reset and OK to define the revolution point.
Start Angle . . . 0
End Angle . . . . 360
Second Offset . 0
Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ
Choose Create. ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ

Select the main body as the target body.
Select the last feature created as the tool body.
Choose OK.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
14-33
Trimming Face Options
When using the Trim to Face/Plane or Trim Between Two Faces/Plane options,
the following dialog will appear. This dialog controls how the trimming
face/plane will interact with the cross section string.
Do not Extend Trim Face option will only allow the operation to succeed if the
cross section geometry or a portion of the cross section geometry intersects the
trimming face/plane. If only a portion of the cross section geometry intersects
the trimming face/plane, it must be the portion that the boolean operation
effects.
Extend Trim Face option extends the face/Plane infinitely.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Activity 7 - Revolving and Trimming to a Face

In this activity you will revolve a small area on the top of the face shown below,
to create a curved open shape on the top edge of the bracket.
Step 1 Open part file pau_revolve_2.
Step 2 Create the Body of Revolution.
Choose Revolve.
Remember, a section string may be composed of any combination of solid faces,

solid edges, curves, or sheet bodies by selecting it in the graphics area. Filtering
for specific object types may be accomplished by choosing an option from the
dialog box.
Choose Solid Edge to filter for solid edges.
For the first part of the section string, select the front top ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ

edge of the solid and, if necessary, confirm the selection. 14
ÏÏÏ
Select
this edge.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
14-35
The entire edge will highlight.
Select the other two edges as indicated below, confirming the

selections if necessary.
Select these
two edges.
Choose OK to complete the edge selection, resetting the

filter to all types.
Without filtering, select the orange line, confirming it if

necessary.
Select this line.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ
Choose OK to confirm that all objects have been selected for
the section string.
The Cue line prompts to Define Region Point for Cut Section. The region (area)
to be revolved must be specified.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Select the region surrounded by the highlighted objects.
Select region
The rectangular region will highlight in a cyan color.
The Cue prompts to Choose revolution method.
Choose the Trim To Face option.
Now the defined region may be revolved and trimmed to a specified face.
Filter for Solid Face and choose the solid face as shown,
choose OK.
Select face

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ
A datum axis has been created to use as the axis of rotation.
Choose the Datum Axis and then choose OK.
Ensure that the both Offset values are set to 0 and choose
OK on the Revolved Body dialog box to create the revolution
without offsets.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
14-37
The rotation will occur around the specified axis.
The Cue prompts to Choose boolean operation from the dialog box (Unite,
Subtract,Intersect).
Choose Unite to unite the revolved feature to the solid

model.
Fit the view.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Activity 8 - Extruding to a Face

In this activity you will complete the development of the draglink part.
Step 1 Make ***_draglink_2 the active part and start the

modeling application.
Step 2 Extrude a section string to a face.
Make layer 45 the work layer, layer 1 selectable, and all

other layers invisible.
Generator
geometry.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ
Choose Extrude.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
14-39
Select the section string as shown below and choose OK.
Section String
Choose Trim to Face/Plane.

and choose OK.
Toggle Do not Extend Trim Face on.
Select the shaded face shown below.
Select
this face.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ Choose OK.
Second Offset . 0
aper Angle . . . . 0
Choose OK.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Choose Subtract.
Choose Cancel.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
14-41
SUMMARY Swept features are created by extruding,

revolving, or sweeping a section string. The
section string may be composed of explicit
curves, sketch curves, solid edges, solid faces,
and sheet bodies.
Boolean operations are used to create a single

solid body out of two or more existing solid
bodies.
In this lesson you:

Extruded a body.
Extruded with offsets.
Extruded to a face.
Created a Body of Revolution.
Created a Swept Feature Along a Guide.
Applied boolean operations.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
14
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Editing the Model

Lesson 15
PURPOSE To manipulate solid body features by editing their parameters.
Playback the construction of a model.

Edit feature parameters during playback.
Move a Feature.
Delete a Feature.
Edit a feature's parameters and position.
Suppress a feature.
Unsuppress a feature.
Rename a feature.
Reattach a feature to a different face.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
15-1
Editing the Model
Common Features of the Edit PullĆDown Menu
The Edit pullĆdown menu offers common choices that relate to changing
existing solid bodies and features. Some of the Edit options are outside the
scope of this class. Those that are within the scope are documented here.
Edit Feature Toolbar
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
All icons not shown
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Delayed Update on Edit
When enabled, the Delayed Update on Edit option allows the user to
control when the system performs the display updates based on the edits
performed. This option is a toggle between ON and OFF.
Delayed Update
on Edit
If Delayed Update on Edit is OFF, the part is updated after the completion of
each edit function. Off is the default setting.
If Delayed Update on Edit is ON, feature updates are delayed while edits are
made. For example, a feature move, followed by an edit to another feature may
be accomplished without updating the model until after both edits are
complete. This saves time on complex models with many features.
NOTE: Delayed Update on Edit may not be used to delay a

delete, suppress or unsuppress feature operation.
Update
This option allows the user to control when the solid model is recalculated and
the display updated with the edits previously made when Delayed Update on
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
Edit is enabled. ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
15-3
Editing the Model
To view the effects of edits on the model, choose the Update icon in the
Edit Feature toolbar or Edit"Update in the Menu bar and the feature updates
are performed. The Status Line tracks and reports the update activity.
NOTE: The system will automatically update the model when the
part file is saved.
Update
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Editing Features
Using the Edit Feature toolbar or the Edit→Feature option allows existing solid
bodies and features to be altered and manipulated while maintaining any
implied or predefined associativity.
Edit Feature Toolbar
Edit Parameters
Edit Unsuppress
Move Playback
Positioning Feature Suppress
All icons not shown
Edit Feature PullĆDown Menu
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
15-5
Editing the Model
Suppress
The Suppress Feature option simulates the temporary removal of one or more
features from the solid body and its display.
After the Suppress Feature icon is selected, a list of all features is

displayed in the Suppress Feature dialog box. Select the feature(s) to be
suppressed then choose Apply or OK.
Suppressed features still actually exist within the math model, but are
temporarily removed from the model and display. Since the suppressed features
still exist, their display may be restored using Unsuppress Feature.
Suppressing features facilitates:
Temporary reduction in the size of the model, making it easier to work

with. This speeds up the creation, object selection, edit, and display time.
The removal of nonĆcritical features, such as small holes and blends, from
the model for other applications.
Creation of features in locations where conflicting geometry exists. For
example: if there is a need to position a feature using an edge that has
already been blended, the blend need not be deleted. Suppress the blend,
create and position the new feature, and then unsuppress the blend.
When a feature that has associated features is suppressed, the associated

features are also suppressed.
Unsuppress
This option restores previously suppressed features.
After the Unsuppress Feature icon is selected, a list of all suppressed

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
features is displayed in the Unsuppress Feature dialog box. Select the feature(s)
to be unsuppressed then choose Apply or OK. When features are
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
unsuppressed, other features may also be unsuppressed by association.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Move
Choosing Move Feature allows a feature that is not associatively positioned to

be moved to a new position. This option excludes all extruded and revolved
features as well as features whose location has been constrained using
positioning dimensions. Features whose position is determined via associative
positioning methods must be moved using the Edit"Feature"Positioning
option.
When you select the Move Feature icon , the Move Feature dialog box
will appear. Once you select a feature, a second Move Feature dialog box will
present four methods available to move the feature:
Delta XC, YC, ZC

To a Point
Rotate Between Two Axes
CSYS to CSYS
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
15-7
Editing the Model
Delta X, Y, Z
This option allows the feature to be moved by specifying a distance and
direction using rectangular coordinates, based upon the Work Coordinate
System.
(Delta XC, Delta YC, and Delta ZC)
To a Point
This option allows the feature to be moved from a reference point to a

destination point. The Point Constructor will become available during the
operation to assist in the move.
Rotate Between Two Axes
This option allows the selected feature to be moved by rotating that feature
from a reference axis to a destination axis.
The figure below is an example of this, where the negative X axis is the
Reference axis and the negative Y axis is the Destination axis.
Reference ZC
axis
YC
XC
Destination axis
Before After
CSYS to CSYS
ÉÉÉ
This option allows the selected feature to be repositioned from its current
coordinate system to the desired coordinate system. The current or Reference
ÉÉÉ
15 Coordinate System must be defined as well as the desired or Destination
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
Coordinate System using the Coordinate System Subfunction dialog.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
The newly relocated feature will maintain the same relative position to the
Destination Coordinate System as it had with the Reference Coordinate System.
Deleting Features
Deleting features is accomplished through the use of the Delete icon in

the Standard toolbar or Edit"Delete from the Menu bar. Selecting the delete
icon introduces the Class Selection dialog box.
Selecting the Features button within the Class Selection dialog box option
allows the selection of features of a solid model to be deleted.
Allows the selection

of Features
When a feature is deleted from a body, the space it occupied or voided is filled
in exactly as it was before the feature was created.
If a feature is mistakenly deleted, the Undo function may be used immediately

after the deletion to restore the feature.
ÉÉÉ
NOTE: Any features whose placement, not position, is dependent
on the deleted feature will also be deleted. For example, if a hole has
been created using a datum plane for its placement face, and the ÉÉÉ
15
datum plane is deleted, the hole will also be deleted. ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
15-9
Editing the Model
Playback
Playback allows the creation of the model to be reviewed feature by feature.
The model may also be edited as it is reviewed.
When the Playback Feature icon is chosen, the Edit during Update
dialog appears and starts with the first feature created.
Features may be browsed through forward or backward. Once the intended

feature has been reached, its defining parameters may be interrogated or
edited. Once a feature has been dealt with, a different feature may be browsed
to. At any time a trigger may be set to update the model starting at the current
feature and continuing until the model is complete, or until a feature fails to
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
update.
The Message window shows any applicable error or warning messages, as well
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
as whether the current feature updated successfully or failed.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Show Failure Area temporarily displays failed geometry. This option is available
only if an object involved in the failure, such as a tool body, is available for
display.
Show Current Model displays the part of the model that has been successfully
rebuilt.
NOTE: Some features, such as instances in an array, may not

appear in the current model until the last related feature is rebuilt.
NOTE: Most options outside the Edit During Update dialog are
disabled while the model is being reviewed or edited.
The Post Recovery Update Status options specify what should happen when the
icon option chosen is completed.
Continue restarts the automatic update process from where it left off.
Pause lets the user choose other Edit during Update options, rather than
automatically resuming update.
The Edit during Update dialog also contains icons for the review and edit
options that are available for the model. The first row of icons always appear,
but are grayed out if not applicable. The remaining icons may or may not
appear depending on the circumstances.
Update Tool
Should the model fail to update after an edit, the Edit during Update dialog
will be presented.
The possible options are:
Undo undoes the last modification made to the model before updating
began.
Step Back To allows backward navigation through the model to a

selected feature that may be chosen from the Update Selection dialog. (The
dialog contains a list of the features created before the current one, in order of
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
creation.) ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
15-11
Editing the Model
Step Back allows backward navigation through the model one feature at
a time.
Step advances one feature at a time through the model.
Step To allows forward navigation through the model to a selected

feature. In this case, the Update Selection dialog lists the features that have not
yet been rebuilt.
Continue triggers the update process, which continues until the model is
completely rebuilt or until a feature fails. If Continue is chosen when a failure
occurs, that feature is skipped.
Accept is used to acknowledge a single warning message about a failed

feature (but not an error message) to allow the update to continue. The feature
that fails is marked out of date".
The status of features may be viewed by choosing Information"Feature"

Update Status Report, listing out of date" features with either update or
dependant failure reasons. Editing the failed feature to resolve the problem
automatically removes the out of date" mark from the Update Status Report.
Accept Remaining, similar to accept, is used to acknowledge multiple

warning messages about failed features to allow the update to continue. This is
useful for messages that will recur, or to ignore a number of messages.
Delete allows deletion the of the feature that failed to update.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
Suppress suppresses the feature currently being updated.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Suppress Remaining suppresses the feature currently being updated and

all subsequent features.
Review the model allows investigation, but not editing, of the rebuilt
model with options from the menu bar or the third mouse button popĆup menu.
(The options available are the same as those in the Gateway application.)
Review the model cannot be used to review features that failed during update or that
have not yet been rebuilt.
Edit allows you to change the parameters of the feature currently being
updated. A subĆmenu will display with the Edit Parameters, Remove Unused
References and Edit Position options.
Removed Unused
References
Edit Parameters Edit Position
Edit Parameters allows modification of the parameters of the feature

currently being updated. See the Edit Parameters section of this lesson for
more information about this option.
Edit Position allows the selected or failed feature to be repositioned. See

the Edit Positioning section of this lesson for more details about repositioning
features.
NOTE: An editing option must be selected before any work may

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
be performed outside the Edit during Update dialog. ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
15-13
Editing the Model
If a failure occurs, the options that allow advance through the model (Step,
Step To, and Continue) are grayed out until the failure is resolved and the
feature successfully updates.
NOTE: Edits are not permanent until the model is completely

rebuilt. If a feature is edited, and then rethought, making it
necessary to return to the beginning of that feature's rebuilding, or
to the rebuilding of an earlier feature, the edits will be lost. This
may happen if Undo, Step Back, Step Back To, Edit Parameters, or
Edit Positioning Dimension is chosen on the same or an earlier
feature.
When Playback is chosen, all of the solids in the model that will be updated
disappear from the graphic window. If Step is chosen to reĆcreate the model
one feature at a time, the display updates each time a feature is rebuilt.
The display does not update if other options such as Step Back To, Step Back,
Go To, or Continue are chosen. If these options are being used, and it is
desirable to see what the model looks like at this stage of its rebuilding, choose
Show Current Model.
NOTE: For performance reasons, the display does not change

during update when an update method other than Show Current
Model is used. After the model update has finished, the display is
updated.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Selection Toolbar
The selection toolbar may be used anytime the selection of a feature for
modification or the extraction of data is required. This method of editing uses
an Object/Action approach, where the object needing editing is selected first
from the graphic window and then the necessary action is defined. This lesson
will focus on the use of the Select Features option.
Select
Features
Depending on which category the user has selected, the Type Filter may be used
to narrow the band of selectable objects.
Features
Reset Select All Deselect

Up One
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
All
15
All icons not shown
Level
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
15-15
Editing the Model
Once an object has been selected, mouse button 3 (MB3) may be used to select
an available operator for that object.

selected object for the pop-up dialogs to appear.
Various Feature options
Sketch options
NOTE: Options may vary based upon application and feature

selected.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Activity 1 - Playback, Move & Delete Features

In this activity, the Playback function will be used to gain an understanding of
how a model was constructed. The skills required to move a feature that is not
located by positioning dimensions will also be demonstrated.
Step 1 Open part file pau_edit_feature_1 and start the Modeling

application.
Step 2 Review the model construction.
Choose the Feature Playback icon from the Edit

Feature toolbar.
All of the solid features are suppressed except the base solid feature which is
BLOCK(2).
Step 3 Move forward to the next feature.

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
Choose the Step icon. ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
15-17
Editing the Model
The next solid feature, EXTRUDED(3), is updated.
Step 4 Examine the extruded feature.
The next set of actions will demonstrate how a feature may be examined to see
how it was constructed.
Choose the Edit icon in the Edit during Update dialog

box.
Choose the Edit Parameters icon.
The EXTRUDED(3) feature is highlighted in the graphic window because it is

the current feature.
Choose Feature Parameters.
Examine the dialog box window and the graphic window to see that the edge of
the BLOCK(2) feature, where the arrows begin, was extruded with an offset
value to create this feature.
Each solid feature may be examined in a similar manner as it is updated.

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ Choose Back twice and then Cancel to return to the Edit
15
ÉÉÉ

During Update dialog.
ÉÉÉ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
The defining parameters of the feature could also have been redefined using
this option.
Step 5 Move forward to the next feature.
Choose the Step icon.
The next feature, T_SLOT(4), is updated.
Try to Fit the view using the Fit icon in the View
toolbar.
Most options outside the Edit During Update dialog are disabled while the
model is being reviewed or edited. The next action will allow the graphic
window to be refreshed.
Choose the Review the model icon.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
15-19
Editing the Model
Fit the view using the Fit icon.
Review the model allows view options to be accessed during the review/edit
process.
Choose OK.
Continue to Step through until the model has been

completely updated.
Step 6 Move a feature relative to the WCS.
The pad illustrated below is a form feature that was not located with
positioning dimensions. The pad will be moved using the Move Feature
function.
Non-Positioned
Pad
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ Y
Z
X
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Choose the Move Feature icon from the Edit Feature

toolbar.
The dialog box window shows a partial list of the features of the model.
BLOCK(2) is the base solid on which all of the other features are constructed.
RECTANGULAR_PAD(12) is a feature located without positioning

dimensions.
All of the other features of the model are located associatively to the model
using positioning dimensions and therefore not eligible for the Move Feature
option, and not listed.
Choose RECTANGULAR_PAD(12).
Choose OK.
Enter the following parameters:
DXC = .75
DYC = -.5
DZC = 0
Choose OK.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
15-21
Editing the Model
The RECTANGULAR_PAD is moved a distance of .75 in the positive X

direction of the WCS and .5 in the negative Y direction of the WCS.
Step 7 Rotate a feature Between Two Axes.
Choose the Move Feature icon again.
Choose OK.
Choose Rotate Between Two Axes.
The Cue Line is prompting you to define a pivot point. Select

the Mid Point of the Rectangular Pad edge as shown below.
Z
X
Y
Mid Point
Choose XC Axis as the reference axis and choose OK.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Choose YC Axis as the destination axis and choose OK.
The RECTANGULAR_PAD is rotated 90° about the specified point from the
XC axis toward the YC axis.
Step 8 Move a Feature from CSYS to CSYS.
Choose the Move Feature icon again.
Choose OK.
Choose Csys to Csys.
Choose the X Axis, Y Axis icon.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
15-23
Editing the Model
Select the edges as illustrated below to define the X axis and

Y axis of the Reference coordinate system.
Select X-Axis
Here
Z
X
Y
Select Y-Axis
Here
Choose OK.
Choose the Offset from CSYS icon as the method to

define the Destination coordinate system.
Select the yellow Existing Coordinate System at its origin.
Choose OK.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
The RECTANGULAR_PAD is moved such that its relationship to the
Reference coordinate system is maintained relative to the Destination
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
coordinate system
EDS Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Step 9 Delete a Feature using the Object/Action approach.
Verify the Selection toolbar has Select Features turned

ON.
Select
Features
In the graphic window select the rectangular pad that was

just moved and confirm if necessary.
Place the cursor over the feature and select MB3.
Select Delete from the Pop-Up window.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
15-25
Editing the Model
The RECTANGULAR_PAD is removed from the model.
Step 10 Do not save or close the part.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Parameters
This option allows the redefinition of the parameter values of any parametric
feature and causes the model to update to reflect the new values.
To edit a feature's parameters:
Choose the Edit Parameters icon or Edit"Feature"Parameters

from the Menu bar.
Select the feature from the graphic area or choose the feature name from
the list in the Edit Parameters list dialog box and choose OK to confirm
the selection.
The Edit Parameters dialog box listing the different types of parameters
valid for the selected feature is presented.
Some parameters which may be edited will display on the screen where
they can be selected and edited directly, or . . .
Any of the valid parameter types may be selected from the Edit
Parameters dialog box to display the original creation dialog box with the
current parameter values.
Parameters may be edited in the creation dialog boxes.
Choose OK to complete editing at each of the creation dialog boxes.
Choose OK to complete the feature edit.
Choose OK again to complete the model edit.
NOTE: The Select Features option in the Selection toolbar may also
used to select features from the graphic window and edit
parameters using MB3.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
15-27
Editing the Model
Positioning
This option allows a feature to be moved by editing its positioning dimensions.

In addition, this option allows the addition of positioning dimensions to
features that are either underspecified or were not given any positioning
dimensions at the time of creation.
Once the feature to edit has been selected, the system will offer the following
option choices based upon the positioning status of the selected feature.
NOTE: If the selected feature has no positioning dimension

associated with it, the Add Dimension option is automatically
selected.
To edit a feature's positioning:
Choose the Edit Positioning icon or Edit"Feature"Positioning

from the Menu bar.
Select the feature to be edited.
Choose the type of dimension edit (add, edit, or delete) as required.
Select the dimension or dimension type.
Complete the edit, then choose OK.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
NOTE: The Select Features option in the Selection toolbar may also
used to select features from the graphic window and edit positioning
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
using MB3.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Add Dimension
This option may be used to add a positioning dimension to a feature.
When adding positioning dimensions, any object that is the intersection

between the feature being positioned and the target solid's face may not be
selected as the dimensioning geometry.
Select feature to be
positioned
Target solid This curve is the

intersection between
the feature and the
target solid.
The intersection curve is a child product of the tool and target solid's face, it is
defined by the boolean operation associated with the feature type being
created. The boolean operation does not occur until after the position of the
feature has been defined. Therefore, the intersection curve is not a valid
selection to specify location.
When adding positioning dimensions to a Thru hole, no edge will be selectable

as the target edge because both edges are intersection curves.
Identify Solid Face may be

used to position to the
center of the cylinder.
ÉÉÉ
Target solid
Valid target edges for positioning purposes must belong to features existing in ÉÉÉ
15
the feature creation list of the model before the feature being positioned. ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
15-29
Editing the Model
For example, in the figure below the features are numbered in the order in
which they were created. Feature #2 may not be positioned using any face or
edge from feature #3.
2
3
Edit Dimension Value
Features may be moved by changing the values of the feature's positioning

dimensions.
To use this option:
Select the dimension to edit (if there is only one positioning dimension, it
is selected automatically).
Enter the new value.
Continue editing as many dimension values as desired. Once all the desired
dimension values have been edited, choose OK.
Delete Dimension
Use this option to delete a positioning dimension from a feature. The feature
will then remain in its current location as its position is no longer associated to
the model.
Error Messages
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
If the new location of the feature causes it to miss the target solid, the Edit
during Update dialog box will be presented, this dialog box provides several
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
options for dealing with the failed update as discussed in the Playback section.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Activity 2 - Edit Features and Positioning Dimensions

In this activity, you will edit the creation parameters of a feature and then
capture one aspect of the design intent by editing a feature's positioning
dimensions to be associative to the creation parameters of another feature.
Step 1 Edit a Feature's Parameters.
Continue to work with pau_edit_feature_1.
Choose BLOCK(2).
Choose OK.
The parametric values for the block are displayed on the graphic window. A
parameter may be chosen by selecting an expression in the graphic screen or by
choosing Feature Dialog.
Also, note the expression that controls the width, p8=3.120; this will be used in
the next few steps.
Choose Feature Dialog from the Edit Parameters dialog box.
Change the X Length to 2.75.
Choose MB2 to approve the parameter change.
Choose MB2 again to approve the change to the indicated

feature.
Choose MB2 a final time to approve the change to the

model.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
15-31
Editing the Model
Notice that after the part updated, the pad on the bottom is no longer in the
center. Assume that the design intent is that the pad should always remain in
the center of the part.
This situation will be remedied in the next step.
Z Z
X X
Y Y
Before After
Step 2 Edit the Pad's Positioning Dimensions using the

Object/Action approach.
Verify the Selection toolbar has Select Features turned

ON.
In the graphic window select the rectangular pad shown in

the above figure and accept if necessary.
(Status line should read RECTANGULAR_PAD(7))
Select Edit Positioning from the Pop-Up window.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
The positioning dimensions for the feature are displayed in the graphic window.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Choose Edit Dimension Value.
In the graphic screen select the p39=1.560 expression.
To see the pad feature and expressions better, the view may
need to be rotated and updated (MB3).
Since the pad should always stay in the center of the part,
entering a simple equation will capture this aspect of the
design intent.
Enter p8/2.
The expression p8 controls the width of the part.
Choose MB2 to approve the dimension edit.
Choose MB2 again to signify the end of dimension editing

for this feature.
Choose MB2 again to signify the end of positioning editing

for this feature.
Choose MB2 a final time to signify the end of positioning

editing for the model. At this point another feature could
have been selected for editing.
The part should update and the pad is now located in the center of the block.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
15-33
Editing the Model
Step 3 Edit the Block Width using the Object/Action approach.
In the graphic window select the base block feature as shown

in the figure below. You will need to wait for the ellipsis
(+...) to appear, then select with MB1 and use Quick Pick to
step through the multiple candidates. Watch the Status line,
when it reads BLOCK(2), accept the feature with MB2.
Place cursor here and wait for

the ellipsis to appear (+...).
Select Edit Parameters from the Pop-Up window.
Select the p8=2.75 dimension from the graphic window.
Change the value to 5.00 .
Choose MB2 twice to complete the edit.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
Choose the Fit icon.
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
Notice that the pad feature remained in the center of the block.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Activity 3 - Using the Update Tool

In this activity, you will edit a feature that causes a feature to be positioned
completely outside the target body. Using Edit during Update, you will rectify
the problem and continue the modeling process.
Step 1 Edit a Feature's Parameters.
Continue to work with pau_edit_feature_1.
Choose BLOCK(2) and select MB2.
Change the value to 1.75 .
Choose MB2 three times to complete the edit.

ÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉ
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
15-35
Editing the Model
The Edit during Update dialog box appears.
The feature that has caused the failure to occur is shown in the graphic window.
Choose Show Current Model.
The model appears in the graphic window relative to the new

1.75 width value.
Choose Show Failure Area.
The reason for the failure may now be clearly seen; the hole falls outside the
bounds of the body.
Choose the Edit icon in the Edit During Update

window
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
Choose the Edit Position icon.
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
Choose Edit Dimension Value.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Enter p8-1 and choose MB2 four times.
The hole now falls within the solid model, correcting the failure. The model
updates correctly.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
15-37
Editing the Model
Model Navigator
The Model Navigator is a special window that allows investigation of, as well as
actions to be performed on a feature. Holding down the third mouse button on
a feature causes a feature specific popĆup menu to be displayed offering
pertinent editing options.
To access the Model Navigator in UNIX use the Navigator toolbar and to access
the Model Navigator in Windows use the Resource bar. Both, by default, are
located vertically on the right side of the Unigraphics window.
UNIX:
Icon from
Navigator toolbar
Windows:
Icon from
Resource Bar
The options on the popĆup menu may vary depending on what feature is
selected, and what operation may be pending at the time. Also, most of the
options are not available if the Modeling application is not active.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
The following options appear on this popĆup menu for Feature nodes:
Display Dimensions
Show/Hide
Select
Make Current Feature
Edit Parameters
Edit Positioning
Suppress/Unsuppress
Reorder Before
Reorder After
Group
Replace
Rename
Delete
Object Dependency Browser
Information
Properties
The following options appear on the popĆup menu for Work Part nodes:
Expand/Collapse All (with Quick Look listing only)

List Interpart Children
List Interpart Parents
Work Part nodes are not discussed in this text. For more information about
these topics consult the technical documentation.
Display Dimensions
Choosing Display Dimensions causes the feature's parameter values to be

displayed (just as they are with Edit Parameters). The temporary display
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
remains until a Refresh is done. ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
15-39
Editing the Model
Show/Hide
Allows the body or parents for the selected feature to be hidden or displayed.
This function blanks/unblanks the object(s) and their display can be brought
back by using the Show/Hide options or by using the blanking functions found
under the Edit"Blank options in the Menu bar.
The Hide Body option blanks" the solid body that the feature is applied to.
The Hide Parents option is more applicable to swept features. If the Hide
Parents option is used on a swept feature, the system will hide (blank) the
parent curves which generated the swept feature. If the swept feature is derived
by a solid edge(s) then the Hide Parents option will hide (blank) the parent
solid body. This option is not effective in showing or hiding "resulting curves,"
which are produced directly from a curve feature operation, such as with Offset
Curve.
Select
Allows the parents or children of a feature to be selected in the Model

Navigator. This option also allows for all descendants/ancestors to be selected.
For example, if a pad feature is placed on a block feature, the pad is a child of
the block. If a hole is placed on the pad feature, then the hole becomes a direct
child to the pad, however the hole is also a descendant of the block. The
ancestors of the hole are the pad and the block features.
Make Current Feature
Provides a quick and easy method for inserting features into a part. This option
may be used to make an existing feature the current feature of the solid body,
and then add more features at that point in the model hierarchy. If this option
is used on a feature whose time stamp positions it in the middle of the build
hierarchy, making it the current feature, all of the features after it are marked
inactive. As new features are created they are inserted into the build hierarchy
before the inactive features.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
NOTE: If feature creation is not currently applicable, such as
from the Gateway application, the Make Current Feature option is
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
unavailable.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
NOTE: When a pre-V16 part file is loaded, the last feature in that
part is the current feature.
Edit Parameters
Same as Edit Parameters as discussed previously in this lesson. Double clicking

on a feature name in the Model Navigator will bring up the Edit Parameters
dialog box.
Edit Positioning
Same as Edit Positioning as discussed previously in this lesson.
Suppress and Unsuppress Feature
Choosing Suppress causes the feature to be suppressed and an immediate

update to the model to be performed. Suppress works with the checkbox
associated with the feature node. When the feature is suppressed, the check is
removed from the checkbox. When the feature is unsuppressed the check is
displayed in the checkbox. The option on the popĆup menu changes to
Unsuppress, which may be used to unsuppress the feature.
Reorder Before/After
Allows the construction order of the features in the model to be altered by

positioning the selected feature before or after other features in the build
hierarchy. Choose the feature that the selected node is to be reordered relative
to from the Reorder Before or Reorder After cascade menus.
Nodes may also be dragged and dropped in the Model Navigator window to
perform a feature reorder. Multiple features may be selected by holding the
Ctrl key down during selection.
Group
Same as Format"Group Features (see technical documentation for more

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
information). ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
15-41
Editing the Model
This option lets you group features into a special collection called a Feature Set.
Members of a Feature Set can be controlled together during suppress, delete
and move feature operations. Choosing Group causes the Sets of Features
dialog box to appear. The features included in the Feature Set can also be
hidden so they do not show in the Model Navigator and can only be accessed
under the Feature Set Name.
NOTE: If you delete a Feature Set, all of its member features are also
deleted. To delete a Feature Set without deleting its members, first
remove its members.
Replace
The replace option allows a feature's definition to be replaced or redefined"

by another feature. For example, a surface that is used as a trim face could be
replaced for a different surface without having to delete or redefine several
other features. For more information on replace see the technical
documentation.
Rename
Features are named by the system on creation, such as BLOCK(1). The rename
option allows userĆdefined names to be assigned in place of the system assigned
names.
Delete
Same as Edit→Delete as discussed previously in this lesson.
Object Dependency Browser
The Object Dependency Browser allows the parent and child relationships of a
feature to be interrogated.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
Information
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
Provides information about the selected feature in the Information window.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Properties
The properties option provides access to General and Attribute information for
the feature selected. General properties include the feature name, which can be
edited similarly to the Rename function. Attributes can be added to any feature
to include information which could be called out in a specified column of the
Model Navigator. For more information on feature attributes and Model
Navigator columns see the technical documentation.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
15-43
Editing the Model
Activity 4 - Reordering with the Model Navigator

This activity will show how reordering a feature impacts the design of the part.
Step 1 Open part file pau_edit_feature_2 and start the Modeling

application.
Step 2 See how the part was constructed.
Another way of reviewing the construction of a model, is by suppressing all the

features and then unsuppressing each feature one at a time.
Choose the Model Navigator icon from the Navigator

toolbar (UNIX) or from the Resource Bar (Windows) and
size as required.
Windows ONLY: Choose the tack icon in the upper left

hand corner to permanently display the Model Navigator.
Click on the checkmark to the left of BLOCK(0).
The block feature is suppressed as well as all of the other features. This is
because the subsequent features possess a child relationship to the block.
In the Model Navigator, unsuppress each feature by clicking

in the checkbox to restore the display. Start with BLOCK(0)
and work down.
This should afford a better understanding of how the part was constructed.
Step 3 Reorder the Hollow feature.
Select the Hollow feature in the Model Navigator.

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ Place the cursor over the node for HOLLOW(1), press and
15
ÉÉÉ

hold down MB1, drag the feature on top of EXTRUDED(3).
ÉÉÉ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
The hollow feature is reordered after the extruded feature and the graphic
window reflects the edit.
Press and hold down MB1 on HOLLOW(2) and drag the

feature on top of BLEND(5).
Notice the sharp corners on the inside radii.
Press and hold down MB1 on HOLLOW(5) and drag the

feature on top of BLEND(6).
Now there is a radius on the inside corners.
Step 4 Identify and Rename a Feature.
Select the node name BLEND(4) using the first mouse

button.
The corresponding feature highlights in the graphic window.
Since the feature has been identified, it can now be renamed with a description
that is more meaningful to the user.
Place the cursor over the node name BLEND(4), use the
third mouse button popĆup menu to choose Rename.
The Rename dialog box appears.
Enter THROAT_BLEND and press Enter.
The new name is reflected in the Model Navigator. Notice that the time stamp
[(4)] was added.
Close the Model Navigator Window. (Windows users

remember the tack)
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
Step 5 Choose File"Close"All Parts. ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
15-45
Editing the Model
Reattaching a Feature
One of the feature parameters available for editing under Edit Parameters is
Reattach. Reattach allows the feature references of the feature to be redefined.
A feature reference may be an attachment face, a thru face, an edge, etc. Objects
that may have their references redefined include most features (holes, pockets,
grooves, pads, slots, and bosses), and linear instance sets of these features, trim
faces of extruded and revolved features, and userĆdefined features (UDFs).
In the figure below, a slot feature is reattached from the original placement
face to a new face.
Original slot feature
Slot feature is reattached to a

new placement face
Using the Reattach Menu dialog box
The Reattach Menu dialog box only enables the options pertaining to
redefining the selected feature. For example, the model must include a thru
feature for either of the Specify Thru Face options to be enabled, or include a
UDF for the Specify Tool Placement Face option to be enabled.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
When an option icon is chosen, the system highlights the existing references of
the type in question. For example, if the Specify First Thru Face icon is chosen,
the system highlights the current thru face for the selected feature.
Current
positioning
dimensions
Reference
direction type
Use to change
direction of the
normal direction
Use to change
reference direction Specify location
of feature
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
15-47
Editing the Model
Reattach Menu dialog box Options

The following options are available to redefine feature references:
Specify Target Placement Face allows a new attachment

face for the feature being edited to be specified.
Specify Reference Direction allows a new horizontal

reference to be specified for the feature being edited.
Redefine Positioning Dimensions allows new positioning

dimensions to be specified for the feature being edited.
Specify First Thru Face allows the first through/trim face

of the feature being edited to be redefined.
Specify Second Thru Face allows the second through/

trim face of the feature being edited to be redefined.
Specify Tool Placement Face allows the tool face of a

User Defined Feature (UDF) to be redefined.
In addition, while using any of these redefine feature options, the following
options on the Reattach Menu dialog box are available:
Filter allows filtering of selectable object types. The default is All Types. The
following object types are available:
All Types
Face
Datum Plane
Edge
Datum Axis
The above list of filter options is dependent on the specific Reattach option
ÉÉÉ
icon chosen. For example, for Specify Target Placement Face, Specify First Thru
Face, Specify Second Thru Face, and Specify Tool Placement Face, only faces
ÉÉÉ
15 and datum planes are selectable. For Specify Horizontal Reference, faces,
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
edges, datum planes, and datum axes are selectable.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
A list window displays the types of positioning dimensions currently on the

selected feature. If the first mouse button is used to select a dimension in this
list, its available references are highlighted in the graphic window.
DoubleĆclicking with the first mouse button on a dimension in the list allows it
to be redefined.
The Direction Reference options, Horizontal and Vertical, allow the definition
of a new horizontal or vertical feature reference. The default is always set for
the existing reference type.
Reverse Direction allows the feature's reference direction to be reversed.
Reverse Side allows the feature's normal direction to be reversed when

reattaching that feature to a datum plane.
Specify Origin allows quick relocation of the reattached feature by moving it to

a specified origin. This option is useful when reattaching features to datum
planes. Since features are initially placed at the center of a plane, the update
may fail since the plane's center may not be near the feature's actual position.
This option may be used with all features.
Delete Positioning Dimension allows deletion of a selected positioning

dimension. If a feature does not have any positioning dimensions, this option is
grayed out.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
15-49
Editing the Model
Activity 5 - Reattaching a Feature

In this activity, you will move a feature from one face to another.
Step 1 Open the part file pau_reattach_1 and start the Modeling
application.
Step 2 Reattach the extruded feature.
In the graphic window select the rectangular pad and accept

if necessary.
(Status line should read RECTANGULAR_PAD(7))
Select Edit Parameters from the Pop-Up window.
Choose Reattach from the Edit Parameters dialog box.

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ A Reattach dialog box displays icons for the selection steps and other options
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
for reattaching the feature.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
The icon for Specify Target Placement Face is highlighted.
Also, notice that the current placement face for the Rectangular Pad feature is
highlighted in the graphic window.
The Cue Line prompts to select a Target face to define the new placement face
for the feature.
Select the right face of the solid, and accept the selection.
Now the second icon, Specify Reference Direction highlights, the current
horizontal reference vector is displayed in the graphic window, and the cue
prompts you for selection of a new horizontal reference.
Select the lower edge of the face as the horizontal reference,

and accept the selection.
Target Face
Horizontal
Reference
Now the third icon, Redefine Positioning Dimensions, highlights and the Cue
Line prompts you to select a Dimension to Redefine.
Select the vertical positioning dimension (2.500).
Choose the lower front edge of the solid as the target object
as shown below.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
15-51
Editing the Model
Select the bottom outside edge of the pad feature as the tool
edge.
Tool edge
Target object
Select the horizontal positioning dimension (1.000).
Select the right vertical edge of the solid as the Target Object
as shown below.
Select the right outside edge of the pad feature as the tool
edge.
Tool edge
Target Object
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Choose MB2 twice to complete the reattachment of the

feature.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
15-53
Editing the Model
SUMMARY The Edit Features functions in Unigraphics

provides an efficient and robust capability to
change design, form, fit, and function. Because
parametric values can be accessed and edited,
investment of parametric design time is not
wasted when the need for design changes
occur. The good designer will possess good
modeling skills that keep in mind downstream
editing requirements.
This lesson introduced:

Delayed Update on Edit
Suppress a Feature
Unsuppress a Feature
Move a Feature
Delete a Feature
Use the Playback Function
Edit Feature Parameters
Edit Feature Positioning
Edit During Edit
The Model Navigator
Reattach a Feature to a Different Face
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Instance Arrays
Instance Arrays ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
Lesson 16
ÏÏÏ
16
ÏÏÏ
PURPOSE To introduce Instance Arrays.
Create a Rectangular Array.

Create a Circular Array.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
16-1
Instance Arrays
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Instance
ÏÏÏ
16
ÏÏÏ Using Insert"Feature Operation"Instance from the main menu bar,
duplicates existing features, eliminating repetitive efforts in the creation of
models.
Choosing Insert"Feature Operation"Instance yields the following dialog box

which supports Rectangular and Circular Instance Arrays as well as the ability
to Mirror Features or Mirror an entire solid Body.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Instance Arrays
Instance ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
This option allows Instance arrays from an existing feature to be created. An
instance is a shape linked feature, similar to a copy. The Instance not only
ÏÏÏ
16
ÏÏÏ
duplicates the feature but preserves the parameters of the feature.
Since all instances of a feature are associated, the parameters of the feature
may be edited and those changes are reflected in every instance of the feature.
The instance itself is also a parametric feature; that is, the parameters of the
Instance Array itself may be edited.
The following Instance options are available:
Rectangular
Circular
Mirror Body (Not covered in this course)
Mirror Feature (Not covered in this course)
Pattern Face (Not covered in this course)
There are three methods of creating Instance arrays:
General
Simple
Identical
In most cases the General method is the best practice. However, in very
complex models, system performance may be affected. In these cases, using the
Simple method may increase performance and in a worst case scenario the
Identical method may be required.
NOTE: Most Feature Operations may not be instanced.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
16-3
Instance Arrays
ÏÏÏ Rectangular Instance Array

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
16
ÏÏÏ
This function allows the creation of a linear array of instances from the selected
feature(s). These arrays may be in either the XC or YC direction or both.
All rectangular arrays will be created in a plane parallel to the XC Ć YC plane.

The WCS can be redefined while in the process of creating arrays.
The position of the rectangular array will remain relative to the location of the
feature that the array is based on. If the feature position is edited, the array
position will also update.
After the feature(s) to be instanced is selected, the following parameters must

be entered:
Number Along XC: The total number of instances in the XC direction,
including the original feature to be Instanced.
XC Offset: The spacing between the instances in the XC direction.
Number Along YC: The total number of instances in the YC direction,
including the original feature to be Instanced.
YC Offset: The spacing between the instances in the YC direction.
The Offset values can be either positive or negative. The direction will be
relative to the current orientation of the WCS.
The total Number of Instances for both the XC and YC must be a whole
number greater than zero.
Parameter Settings:
Number Along XC = 3
XC Offset = .75 1.00
Number Along YC =4
YC Offset = 1
Hole selected for
Instance
.75
Solid block
EDS Unigraphics NX
Instance Arrays
Circular Instance Array ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
Allows a circular array of instances from selected features to be created.
ÏÏÏ
16
ÏÏÏ
After selecting the feature to be instanced in a circular array, the parameters
for the circular array must be supplied. Parameters include the method for
creating the instance array plus the following values:
Number: The number of instances to be created in the circular array,
including the existing feature.
Angle: The angular spacing between instances, about the reference point.
Once the feature is selected and the parameters specified, a rotation axis must
be selected. The plane in which the circular instance array will be created will
be normal to this rotation axis, regardless of WCS orientation.
A rotation axis may be defined by specifying a Point & Direction (Vector

Constructor dialog box) or by specifying a Datum Axis.
NOTE: Defining a point and direction will not maintain

positional associativity. If the defined point moves, the circular
array will not move with it. Defining the rotation axis by a datum
axis will maintain positional associativity.
Using Point & Direction, after specifying the rotation axis, the following
information must be entered:
Reference Point: Defines the location that the instanced feature will be
rotated about, relative to the rotation axis.
Rotation axis +ZC

Hole selected for
instance array
Reference
point 45
Y
Parameter Settings:
Number =ĄĄĄ8
Angle =Ą45
Z X
Rotation Axis =Ą+ZC
Reference Point = arc center
EDS
All Rights Reserved
16-5
Instance Arrays
ÏÏÏ Activity 1 - Rectangular Instance Array

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
16 In this activity, a rectangular instance array will be created from a hole feature.
ÏÏÏ Design Intent

The finished part will have six holes. There will be two holes in the XC
direction and 3 holes in the YC direction. The figure below illustrates the model
to be used for this activity and an illustration of the finished part.
Before
After
Open pau_array_1, and start the Modeling application.
Save the part as ***_array_1.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Instance Arrays
Step 2 Create a hole feature.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose Hole.
ÏÏÏ
16
ÏÏÏ
Use Simple Hole type.
Select that Planar Placement Face and the Thru Face as

shown.
Select the
outside face as
the Planar
Placement Face.
Select the inside

face as the Thru
Face.
Enter .257 as the diameter of the hole and choose OK.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
16-7
Instance Arrays
ÏÏÏ Position the hole as shown below.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
16
ÏÏÏ
Step 3 Manipulate the WCS.
The WCS must be in the proper orientation in order to create the instance
array.
Choose WCS→Orient.
Choose XĆAxis, YĆAxis.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Instance Arrays
Select the Axes as shown.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
16
ÏÏÏ
X-Axis
Y-Axis
The proper WCS orientation is shown below.
Choose OK.
Step 4 Create a rectangular array of the hole feature.
Choose Instance.
Select Rectangular Array.
Choose the SIMPLE_HOLE(14). The feature may be

selected from the graphics area or from the Instance dialog.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
16-9
Instance Arrays
ÏÏÏ Choose OK.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
16
ÏÏÏ
Enter the Parameters for the Instance as shown below:
Method General
Number Along XC 2
XC Offset 1.25
Number Along YC 3
YC Offset .687
Choose OK.
A temporary display of the instance array will appear in the graphics area.
Choosing Yes will create the instance as it is shown in the graphics area.
Choosing No will return to the Enter Parameters dialog box.
Choose Yes.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Instance Arrays
Activity 2 - Circular Instance Array ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
In this activity, a circular instance array will be created from multiple features.
16
Design Intent ÏÏÏ
The finished part will have four legs that are identical and are to be equally
spaced about center of the cylinder. The figure below illustrates the model to
be used for this activity and an illustration of the finished part.
Step 1 Open pau_array_2, and start the Modeling application.

Save the part as ***_array_2.
Before
After
Step 2 Create the Instance Feature.
Choose Instance.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
16-11
Instance Arrays
ÏÏÏ Choose Circular Array.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
16
ÏÏÏ
Select the following five features from the Instance dialog:
EXTRUDED(5)
BOSS(6)
BOSS(7)
EXTRUDED(9)
SIMPLE_HOLE(13)
NOTE: Multiple features may be selected by pressing MB1,

dragging over their names in the Instance dialog box, and releasing
MB1.
Choose OK to confirm the selections.
Enter the Parameters for the Instance as shown below.
Method General.
Number 3
Angle 120
Choose OK.
The axis of rotation must be selected. Using a Datum Axis maintains positional
associativity.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Instance Arrays

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Select the Datum Axis Method.
ÏÏÏ
16
ÏÏÏ
Select the Datum Axis as shown.
Select this
Datum Axis
A temporary system display previews the arrangement of the instances to be

created.
To speed up the display process, only the first feature selected will be
previewed.
Choose Yes if the temporary display looks correct.
Save the part file.
Step 3 Add a chamfer to an instanced hole feature.
Choose the Chamfer.
Choose the Single Offset option.
Select the circular edge of any one of the instanced holes.

Confirm the selection if necessary and choose OK.
Key in the Offset value of 1.5 and choose OK.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
16-13
Instance Arrays
ÏÏÏ Notice that there is a choice to apply the chamfer only to the selected feature or
ÏÏÏ to apply it to all instances.
ÏÏÏ
16
ÏÏÏ
Choose Chamfer all instances.
Step 4 Edit the Instance array parameters.
Select the first instanced feature from the Feature Selection

dialog box list and choose OK.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Instance Arrays
All options available for editing the selected feature are displayed in the dialog
ÏÏÏ
box that appears. The options in the dialog box may vary depending on which
ÏÏÏ
feature is selected.
ÏÏÏ
16
ÏÏÏ
Choose Instance Array Dialog.
Accept the default Method of General and enter the new

parameters:
Total Number = 4
Angle = 360/4
Radius = 75
EDS
All Rights Reserved
16-15
Instance Arrays
ÏÏÏ Choose OK three times to complete the edit. The part

ÏÏÏ should now have four legs and appear as shown below.
ÏÏÏ
16
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Instance Arrays
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
16
ÏÏÏ
SUMMARY The Instance functionality duplicates existing

features, eliminating repetitive efforts in the
creation of models.
In this lesson you:

Created a Rectangular Instance Array.
Created a Circular Instance Array.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
16-17
Instance Arrays
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
16
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
Additional Projects ÉÉÉ

Appendix A
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
A-1
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ Project 1
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ
Practical Applications of EDS Unigraphics NX

A-2 Unigraphics Student Manual All Rights Reserved
Additional Projects
Project 2 ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
A-3
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ Project 3
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ

Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
A-5
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ Project 4
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ

Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
A-7
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ

Additional Projects
Project 5 ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
A-9
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ Project 6
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ

Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
A-11
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ Project 7
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ

Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
A-13
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ Project 8
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ

Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
A-15
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ Project 9
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ

Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
A-17
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ Project 10
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ

Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
A-19
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ Project 11
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ

Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
A-21
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ Project 12
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ

Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
A-23
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ Project 13
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ

Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
A-25
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ Project 14
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ

Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
A-27
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ Project 15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ

Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
A-29
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ Project 16
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ

Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
A-31
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ Project 17
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ

Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
A-33
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ Project 18
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ

Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
A-35
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ

Point Constructor Options

Appendix B
This appendix describes the various Point Constructor methods that may be
used.
The Point Constructor dialog box provides a standard way to specify points
throughout Unigraphics. It allows the creation of point objects as well as the
determination of locations in threeĆdimensional space.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
ÉÉÉ
Points may be specified in one of two ways: either choose one of the provided,
icons at the top of the dialog box, or directly enter the X-Y-Z coordinates in
the fields provided.
Creating Points vs. Specifying Locations

When you choose the Point icon, the Point Constructor lets you create point
objects. Points appear on the screen as plus signs (+).
When you use the Point Constructor in any other option, you are only
specifying temporary locations. These locations are displayed as asterisks (*).
Choose Refresh to remove the asterisks.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
B-1
Points have many uses in Unigraphics. Points may be used to locate other
objects, such as the title block on a drawing. Points may also be used to
construct curves or surfaces.
Locating positions with the Point Constructor dialog box is also valuable. For
example, the end of a line or the center of a circle may be specified to locate
objects in model space. The positions of the control points of a curve may also
be specified.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
Icon Methods To Specify a Point
ÉÉÉ The top of the Point Constructor dialog box displays icons representing various
methods for specifying a point. As the cursor is passed over these icons, the
icon block displays the name of the method.
The icon methods are described below.
Inferred Point
Depending on where you select when using this option, one of the following
single selection options will be used: cursor location, existing point, end point,
mid point or arc center. This option does not require a selection of the
particular point type for each selection.

B-2 Unigraphics Student Manual All Rights Reserved
Cursor Location
Use this option to construct points anywhere on the screen by positioning the
cross hairs and indicating a location. The location defined lies on the WCS
Work plane.
To locate points quickly and precisely, use a grid (see Preferences→Work Plane
"Show Grid). When Snap to Grid is on, points snap to the nearest grid
position. The grid spacing may be set as desired. The spacing in the
X-direction does not need to be the same as the spacing in the Y-direction.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
For example, if the smallest increment on the part is in eighths of an inch
(.125), then the grid spacing would be set to .125. A point at exactly one inch in
ÉÉÉ
X and two inches in Y could be created by counting over eight grid points in X
and up sixteen in Y and indicating a screen position.
Existing Point
Use this option to specify a location by selecting an existing point.
Remember that the point constructor allows locations in model space to be

specified. In the instance where an existing point is being selected it is generally
a case of using that point to aid in the construction of another object such as a
the endpoint of a line, or the location of an object, such as placement of a
drawing border.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
B-3
End Point
Use this option to specify locations at the end points of existing lines, arcs,
conics, and splines.
Lines
Conics
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
Arcs
ÉÉÉ Splines
When selecting geometry, place the selection ball near the end point you wish
to select. The point is located at the end of the curve nearest to where it was
selected (see below). Closed curves, such as complete circles, have only one
endpoint because the two ends are at the same coordinate location.
Selection
Position

Control Point
Use this option to locate points at the control points of geometric objects. The
control points, which vary for each object type, include: Existing points, End
points of conics, End points and Mid points of open arcs, Center points of
circles or arcs, Mid points and End points of lines, and End points or Knot
points of splines.
Use the cursor to select objects. Since some objects have more than one control
point, place the cross hairs near the control point desired. The system locates
the control point nearest the position where the curve is selected. ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
Open Arcs
ÉÉÉ
Lines
Conics
Circles
Splines
EDS
All Rights Reserved
B-5
Intersection Point
Use this option to locate a position at the intersection of two curves or at the
intersection of a curve and a surface or plane. If the curves intersect more than
once, the system creates the point nearest to where the second curve was
selected.
Two Possible Intersections 1
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
Select second curve
nearest the intersection
ÉÉÉ
2 you want
When the two selected curves are not coplanar with the XC-YC plane, an
apparent intersection occurs and the system creates the point on the first curve
selected. The system calculates an apparent intersection by projecting the curve
parallel to the ZC axis, and the point will be defined on the first object selected
(see below). Projections are always done along the ZC-axis.
Second Curve
ZC
YC
Point
XC
First Curve
Positions may be indicated at the intersection of any two nonĆparallel curves.

Implied intersections may be located even if the objects do not actually touch
(see below).
Intersection point of line and arc
Implied intersection
of two lines

Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center
Use this option to specify a position at the center of an arc or ellipse by

selecting the arc along its circumference.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
ÉÉÉ
In the example below, selecting with the circumference of the large circle within
the selection ball defines the center point of the large circle.
Selection Point
Center
Point
Selecting near the center of the large circle (see below) will not select the
center of the large circle since the selection ball touches the circumference of
the small circle.
Center
Selection
Point
Point
EDS
All Rights Reserved
B-7
Angle on Arc/Ellipse
Use this option to locate a position at an angular location on an arc or an

ellipse.
Position on
105°
Arc
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
ÉÉÉ
The angle value is entered in degrees. The angle is referenced from the positive
XC axis and is measured counterclockwise in the WCS. The angular position on
the arc or ellipse may also be defined on the unconstructed portion (or
extension) of an arc or ellipse (see below).
Position on 225°
Arc

Quadrant Point
Use this option to locate positions at the quarter points of an arc or an ellipse.
Select Here
Quadrant Point is Located ÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉ
B
ÉÉÉ
Points may be located at the starting point of the arc or ellipse and then at
quarterĆdistance intervals along the object. The point located is the quadrant
point nearest to the position selected. The quadrant position may also be
defined on the unconstructed portion (or extension) of an arc (see below).
Select Here
Quadrant Point is Located
EDS
All Rights Reserved
B-9
Choosing a Coordinate System
Choose WCS or Absolute to specify which coordinate system the system

references when locating positions using the Base Point text entry fields. The
WCS (Work Coordinate System) is the default. The WCS may be moved to any
location and placed in any orientation. The absolute coordinate system is a
fixed coordinate system.
ÉÉÉ
Offset
ÉÉÉ
B
ÉÉÉ This option allows the specification of a position in model space offset from a
reference position in model space. The offset location may be specified relative
to the reference position using either the absolute or the work coordinate
system.
Once an offset method has been specified, it remains in effect until another
offset method is selected. The default setting is None (no offset).
Offset allows a position to be specified away from a specified reference, or base

position in one of the five ways discussed below. This is a useful tool if the
desire is to specify many positions where each position is offset from the
previous position, or when the position that is being specified is relative to
another position most easily defined by selecting a preĆexisting point.

In the example below, the need is to specify a quick row of points, offset in the
X direction and Y direction. The first point could be specified, the offset would
be set to rectangular and the values entered, OK could then be chosen a
number of times (7) to offset the remaining points from each previous point.
Each alternating OK specifies the next base position, then the next offset
position based on the values.
Offset 4
Offset 3
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
First Point
Offset 2
ÉÉÉ
Offset 1
Exiting the Point Constructor menu when using an offset requires the return of
the offset setting to NONE. This may be accomplished by choosing the RESET
button, or by manually changing the offset type back. If The NONE setting is
not reset, the Point Constructor continues to offset positions from the last
specified position.
Reset
Use the Reset button to quickly set the X-Y-Z coordinate fields to 0.0, and to
set the Offset option to None.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
B-11
Rectangular Offset
This option allows a position to be offset by entering values that represent the
X, Y, and Z directions relative to the coordinate system specified from a
reference point (see below).
The direction of the offset is determined by the coordinate system selected and
the orientation of that coordinate system.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
The origin of the coordinate system has no effect on the offset.
ÉÉÉ Offset
X = 2.0
Offset
Point
Y = 0.5
Z = 1.5
Reference
Point
X
Coordinate System

Cylindrical Offset
This option allows an offset position to be specified by entering cylindrical

coordinates (see below).
The offset values for Radius, Angle, and DeltaĆZC are defined relative to the
specified coordinate system and applied as illustrated below. The radius and
the angle always lie in the XĆY plane of the coordinate system specified.
A cylindrical offset may reference either the absolute coordinate system or the
work coordinate system. ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
Offset
ÉÉÉ
Radius Radius Offset Point
Angle
Delta-ZC
Distance Along
ZC-axis (Delta - ZC)
ZC
YC
XC
Angle
Reference Point
EDS
All Rights Reserved
B-13
Spherical Offset
This option allows specification of an offset position using spherical

coordinates, two angles and a radius (see below).
Angle 1 always lies in the X-Y plane, and Angle 2 defines the elevation of the
offset point from the X-Y plane. The radius defines the distance between the
base point and the offset point. A spherical offset may reference either the
work coordinate system or the absolute coordinate system.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B Offset
ÉÉÉ
Offset Point
Radius
Angle 1 Radius Angle 2
Angle 2
Z
Y
Reference Angle 1
X Point
Vector Offset
This option allows specification of an offset position by indicating a direction

and entering a distance in that direction (see below). The direction is defined
by selecting a line. The point is offset toward the end of the line that is closest
to where the line was selected.
Offset Point
Entered
Distance
Direction of Offset
Z
Y
Reference
Point Line Selected Here
X
Line Selected to Define Vector

Offset Along Curve
This option allows an offset position to be defined along a curve by a specified

arc length distance or a percentage of the total curve path length (see below).
Note that lines may also be used as the curves" for this offset.
Offset Offset Point

Point
Direction of Offset
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
Reference Point
Direction of Offset
Reference Point
ÉÉÉ
How the curve is selected determines the direction in which the offset will
occur. Select the curve away from the reference position on the side of the
curve you want to specify the position (see below).
Select Here . . .
Reference
Point
Select Here . . .
For this Offset Direction
For this Offset Direction
EDS
All Rights Reserved
B-15
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
ÉÉÉ

Transformations
Transformations
Appendix C
This appendix discusses the fundamentals of transformations. The following

topics are covered.
Transformation procedure
Terminology
Translate
Scale
Rotate about a point
Mirror through a line
Rotate about a line
ÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
There are no activities. C
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
C-1
Transformations
Transformations
The Edit→Transform option allows objects to be translated, rotated, and

scaled. Transformations may be used to create multiple copies of selected
objects, make multiple moves, scales, etc..
NOTE: Views, layouts, drawings, or the current WCS are not

translatable objects. There are separate options from the main
menu bar to deal with these items.
Transformation Procedure
Choose Edit→Transform.
Select the objects for transformation. The Class Selection Subfunction
dialog box may be used to select the objects.
Choose a transformation type from the dialog box shown below.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
C
ÉÉÉ

C-2 Unigraphics Student Manual All Rights Reserved
Transformations
Complete the additional selections and choices from dialog boxes. Then
complete the choices on the dialog box shown below, and choose OK.
Transformation Options Terminology

Destination Layer allows you to select a layer on which to place the transformed ÉÉÉ
objects. Choose one of the following options: ÉÉÉ
Work Places the transformed objects on the current work layer. ÉÉÉ
C
ÉÉÉ
Orig Keeps the transformed objects on their original layer.
Specify Moves the transformed objects to the specified layer.
Trace Status on creates connecting curves between the original objects end
points and their transformed copies. When trace status is off, connecting lines
are not created between the original object and the transformed copies.
Original object
Transformed Object
Trace Curves
Before After
Trace Status may be used with Translate, Scale, Rotate, Mirror, or Reposition
to create closed wireframe shapes. Trace Status is not applicable to solid
bodies, surfaces, or boundary objects. Trace curves are independent of the
Destination Layer setting, and are always created on the current Work layer.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
C-3
Transformations
Subdivisions allows the transformation distance to be divided into a number of

equal parts. The subdivision factor is equal to the number of these parts.
Use Subdivisions to translate, scale via uniform method, or rotate an object. In

translation, the distance is divided by the subdivision factor. In rotation, the
angle of rotation is divided by the subdivision factor. In scale, the subdivision
distance is the nth root of the transformation, where n is equal to the
subdivision factor.
NOTE: Subdivisions only divides the transformation distance into

equal parts. It does not display selected objects at each subdivided
segment.
After the number of subdivisions has been entered, the Transform Type dialog
box redisplays. Multiple Copies may be selected to enter a desired number of
copies.
Move allows transformation of an object from its original location to a new

location. The selection in this option is object based. A feature of a solid body
ÉÉÉ may not be selected for this operation.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
C
ÉÉÉ
When a solid body is moved, its positioning features and their associated
dimensions are moved. All associated datum planes and axes are also moved
with their solid body. All sketch features (when sketched on a face or datum
plane) are moved with the solid body as well.
When a solid body containing swept features is moved, the sweep outlines, or
paths, move as well. Other features or solid bodies sharing those sweep outlines
are also moved.
NOTE: A solid body cannot be moved with the transformation type

set to scale. Use the Scale operation to accomplish this.
Copy allows an object to be duplicated at a new location, while keeping the

original intact in its initial position.
Multiple Copies allows duplication of objects a specified number of times

during certain transform operations.
Undo Last cancels any immediately preceding transform operation. Use Undo
Last after a transformation via Move, Copy, or Multiple Copies. Undo Last
remains available until you choose Reselect Objects.

Transformations
Changes in Transform Type, Destination Layer, Trace Curves, or Subdivisions

made after a transformation, but before it is undone, occur during the next
transformation operation. They will not affect the execution of Undo Last.
Objects originally selected for transformation remain selected at the completion

of the Undo Last, and ready for the next transformation operation.
Move, Copy, or Multiple Copies selected immediately following Undo Last,

regenerates the objects in a state that preceded Undo Last.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
C
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
C-5
Transformations
Translate
Objects may be Translated (moved) to a point, or by a distance of delta.

Translated objects maintain the original orientation.
To a Point allows the selected objects to be translated by indicating a reference

and a destination point.
Delta allows the selected objects to be translated by specifying a new location in

terms of the work (delta XC, delta YC, and delta ZC) coordinates.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
C
ÉÉÉ

Transformations
Scale
This option affects the size of an object and the distance between the object
and its reference point. A nonĆuniform scale method may be specified with the
values relative to the WCS..
Scale allows the selected objects to be proportionately resized. Care must be

exercised in choosing a reference point for the scale operation because the
scale factor is applied to the geometry equally relative to the reference point.
The results of different reference point positions are illustrated below.

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
Reference
Point
C
ÉÉÉ
Reference
Point
Reference
Point
Reference
Point
Scale Factor=1/2
NOTE: A solid body may not be scaled by copying it without losing

its parametric information.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
C-7
Transformations
NonĆUniform Scale allows objects to be resized independently with respect to

the XC, YC, and ZC axes. An example of where this option might be useful is
to incorporate variable shrinkage factors in mold design.
The figure below illustrates an example of NonĆUniform Scale.
ZC ZC
ÉÉÉ YC YC
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
Scale Factors
C XC XC
ÉÉÉ Before XC Scale = .75

YC Scale = .5
ZC Scale = 1.25
After
NOTE: NonĆUniform Scale will not allow a Move operation on a

solid body. Use Copy instead. However, analytic face geometry (for
example, a block feature) cannot be nonĆuniform scaled via Copy.
If you wish to nonĆuniform scale a solid body containing analytic surfaces, first
convert those sheet bodies into bĆsurfaces using the Convert function, then sew
them together into a new solid body valid for nonĆuniform scaling.
With the NonĆUniform Scale method, Undo Last is available even if the
rescaled object had been converted to a different kind of object.

Transformations
NOTE: Once an arc is converted into a spline, it can no longer be

restored to its original object type.(See figure below)
Arc Spline
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
YC
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
YC ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ZC XC Scale Factors XC
ZC
Before After
XC Scale = 1.35
YC Scale = 1.02
ZC Scale = 1.00
When an object is transformed into a different type, some or all of the original
object data may be lost (for example, attributes, view modifications, drafting
objects, dimensions, tool paths, and offset sheet bodies). Subdivisions may not
be used in NonĆUniform Scale.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
C
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
C-9
Transformations
Rotate About a Point
Use this option to move objects around a line parallel to the ZC axis, and
passing through a specified reference point. A positive rotation direction is
counterclockwise. After the reference point for rotation has been selected, a
rotation and angle dialog box displays.
The figure below illustrates Rotation About a Point, with multiple copies.
Original Object Number of Copies: 3

Subdiv Factor: 4
ÉÉÉ
Rotation Angle: 270
ÉÉÉ Reference Point
ÉÉÉ
C
ÉÉÉ
ZC
YC
XC
Line Parallel To ZC

Transformations
Mirror Through a Line
A mirror image of an object may be created on the opposite side of a reference

line. Three options are available for line selection.
The figure below illustrates an example of Mirror Through a Line.
Transformed Object
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
YC
ZC XC
ÉÉÉ
C
ÉÉÉ
Original Object Reference Line
EDS
All Rights Reserved
C-11
Transformations
Rotate About a Line
This option allows objects to be moved around a reference line which is not
necessarily parallel to the ZC axis. Three options are available for line
selection: Two Points, Existing Line, and Point and Vector.
A positive rotation direction is counterclockwise.
The figure below illustrates an example of Rotate About a Line, multiple copies.
Original Hole
Reference
Point
ÉÉÉ Z
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
Y
C
ÉÉÉ
Number Of Copies: 7
Rotation Angle: 315
Reference Point: Arc Center X

Transformations
Using Transformations for Symmetrical Geometry
For swept solids using explicit curves that have common geometrical subsets,
the use of Mirror Through a Line and Mirror Through a Plane can save users
considerable creation time.
Consider the example below, which shows a combination of Offset Curves and
curves Mirrored Through a Line:
Associative Offset
Curves
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
No Associativity ÉÉÉ
C
ÉÉÉ
Parent Curves Mirrored Curves
(Not Mirrored)
TIP Careful consideration of the curves used as parents for the Offset
Curves is necessary. Remember, except for the offset distance, editing
of the Offset Curves is accomplished only by editing the parents. The
Offset Curves are handled as a complete set. Also, note that the circle
and arc at the bottom were not mirrored, but the lines at the top
were.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
C-13
Transformations
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
C
ÉÉÉ

Curve Creation
Curve Creation
Appendix D
PURPOSE To introduce Basic Curves.
OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this appendix, you will be able to:
Create Lines
Create Arcs
Create Circles
Create Fillets
Trim Curves
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
D-1
Curve Creation
Explicit Curves
The intent of this appendix is to teach 2D generator and guide geometry for the
purposes of sweeping through space to create solid bodies.
NOTE: In Unigraphics, a curve is considered to be a point, line, arc,

spline or conic.
The Curve creation options are brought up by choosing Insert→Curve.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ
The Work Coordinate System
When creating curves, the orientation or direction can be based on the WCS.
The term horizontal appearing in any dialog box or Cue line is meant as
parallel to the XCĆaxis, vertical is parallel to the YCĆaxis, and normal is parallel
to the ZCĆaxis, regardless of the work view or perspective on the screen. Any
2D curve, except the 2 curve fillet, will be created on the XC-YC plane or a
plane parallel to it.

D-2 Unigraphics Student Manual All Rights Reserved
Curve Creation
Basic Curves
When the Basic Curves icon is chosen, the Basic Curves dialog box is displayed.
The icons on this dialog box are displayed below.
Circle
Fillet
Edit Curve
Parameters
Line
Arc Trim
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
The portion of the Basic Curves dialog box below the icons is different for each
of the options selected. D
ÏÏÏ
The Basic Curves dialog box is used to create lines, arcs, circles, and fillets.
While creating these curves, there is also quick access to the Trim Curve and
Edit Curve Parameters functions.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
D-3
Curve Creation
The Dialog Bar
The Dialog Bar is a series of text fields that appear at the bottom of the
graphics window when in the Basic Curves function. The text fields in the
Dialog Bar will vary depending on which type of curve is being created and
which options have been selected. For example, the Dialog Bar below is what
will appear when creating lines.
The Dialog Bar
Location Fields Parameter Fields
Location fields - XC, YC, and ZC. These fields track the location of the
cursor, or they can be used to input a coordinate location in the WCS.
Parameter fields - These fields control parameters of the curve, such as
length of a line, or radius of an arc.
To give a text field focus, the <Tab> key may be used or click the first mouse
button in the fields desired. Select once in the field to insert text in the existing
string, or select twice for overstrike mode.
When the XC, YC, or ZC field has focus, and <Enter> is pressed, the
location specified is accepted and an asterisk will appear in the graphics
area indicating that point.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
When a parameter field (such as length, radius, etc. - any field other
than the three mentioned above) has focus and <Enter> is pressed, the
ÏÏÏ
D values in all parameter fields are accepted and applied to the curve being
ÏÏÏ constructed.
As soon as a line, arc, or circle is finished being created, new values may
be entered in the parameter text fields and the newlyĆcreated object will
be updated accordingly (unless String Mode is turned on.).
In Preferences→User Interface the number of decimal places displayed in the

fields may be controlled as well as whether or not the fields track the current
location of the cursor.

Curve Creation
PreĆSelection Highlighting
When the Basic Curves dialog box is active, and the Point Method is Infer, an
object on which the Selection Ball is placed will always be preĆhighlighted,
regardless of the setting of the Preselection option in the Selection Preferences
dialog box. This includes all Control points (see below) of the highlighted
objects. The preselection color is determined by the setting in the Selection
Preferences dialog window.
Control Points
Each type of curve has its own unique set of control points (endpoints and
midpoints). This table shows the control points for some common curve types.
Curve Control Points

Line Endpoints,
midpoint
Arc Endpoints,
midpoint
Complete Circle Center of circle,

Endpoint
TIP The endpoints of a circle are at 0Ăand 360 degrees, at the 3 0'clock ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
position. There are 2 endpoints at the same exact location.
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
D-5
Curve Creation
Inferred Point Selection
In line and arc creation, the position of the cursor or Selection Ball as geometry
is selected is very important.
When the Infer point method is being used, the system infers the following:
Cursor Location (when a control point, arc center, or object is not in the
Selection Ball)
Control points (when inside the Selection Ball)
An entire curve (when an object is selected where a control point is not
encircled)
Status Line Feedback
While Basic Curves are being created, valuable feedback will be given in the
Status line. It will tell what kind of point or object is highlighted. It will also
display the type of line or arc being created, as well as other useful information.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ

Curve Creation
Inferred Selection Chart
Contents of Selection Ball Selected

Geometry Examples
Nothing A screen
position
An existing point The existing

point
An endpoint or midpoint of a The control

line, arc, or partial ellipse point
A line, arc, conic, or spline, but The line, arc,

not one of its control points conic, or
spline or
A complete circle or ellipse, The circle or

(selection ball not over a ellipse
control point)
An arc center of a circle or The center of

ellipse the circle or
ellipse ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
D
A complete circle or ellipse,
(selection ball over the control
point)
The control
point (end
point)
ÏÏÏ
A knot point of a spline The
(splines are covered in the knotĂpoint
Freeform Modeling Course)
EDS
All Rights Reserved
D-7
Curve Creation
General Curve Creation Options

This section discusses some of the options in the center of the Basic Curves
dialog box which apply to many different curve creation situations. The options
include Delta, Point Method, and String Mode. We will discuss Point Method
and String Mode in this appendix.
Point Method
The Point Method option menu, shown below, allows points to be specified
relative to existing geometry by specifying a cursor location or by using the
Point Subfunction. The options on this menu (other than Inferred Point and
Select Face) work similarly to those in the Point Constructor dialog box.
Inferred Point
Cursor Location
Existing Point
End Point
Control Point
Intersection Point
Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center
Quadrant Point
Select Face
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Point Constructor
(See page Appendix B for more information)
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ When using a point method other than Infer, several things change:
The cursor location is no longer tracked in the Dialog Bar.
PreĆselection highlighting reverts to the Selection Preferences dialog box
status.
Control points are no longer highlighted.
NOTE: A Cursor Location, sometimes called Screen Position, is

simply projected onto the XC-YC plane. The ZC value of the point
will be 0.

Curve Creation
The Select Face option allows the selection of a face for use as the limiting
object for a line. When in any other curve creation mode (arc, circle, spline,
etc.) this option is not available. This option can also be used to create a line
normal to a face.
If the Point Constructor method is chosen, the Point Constructor dialog box is
displayed. When Back is chosen from that dialog box, the Basic Curve dialog
box returns.

Control Point
Cursor Location
Intersection Point
Inferred Point
Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Quadrant Point

Center
Angle on Arc/Ellipse
None
Rectangular
Cylindrical
Restores Base
Point values Spherical
to zero and Vector
Offset to none
Along Curve
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
String Mode ÏÏÏ
D
When this option is ON, the end of one object becomes the beginning of the
ÏÏÏ
next. To stop string mode, turn the button OFF. To stop string mode and start it
again with the next object created, choose Break String or press the middle
mouse button.
NOTE: When String Mode is turned on, the entering of new values
in the parameter text fields as soon as a line or arc is finished being
created will not update the previously created curve.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
D-9
Curve Creation
Line Creation Methods
Between Two Points
Simply define the two points (see below). The points may be a combination of
screen positions and control points selected in the graphics area, or values
established by entering numbers in the XC, YC, and ZC fields in the Dialog Bar
and pressing <Enter>.
YC Second point
ZC XC
First point
NOTE: If a screen position is specified as the second point, and the

Angle Increment value is not zero, the line will snap to the
nearest increment of that angle.
Through a Point and Horizontal or Vertical
When the second point of a line is defined using a screen position, and this
selection defines a line that is within the Snap Angle of being vertical or
horizontal from the first point, the line will snap to vertical or horizontal. (The
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Snap Angle is controlled in the Sketch Preferences dialog box.) Snap Angle is
only applicable when using the Inferred point method.
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ YC
Snap angle is set to 3
ZC XC
Second point

3° 3°
First point 3°
3°
Second point

First point

Curve Creation
Through a Point and at an Angle to the XC Axis

Define the start point.
Enter the desired angle in the Angle text field in the Dialog Bar and press
the <Tab> key. A line at this angle or at this angle plus 180 degrees
(depending on where the cursor is relative to the start point) will
rubberĆband in the graphics area. See the illustration below. The value in
the Angle text field will also update to reflect the start/cursor locations.
Establish the length by specifying a screen position, selecting geometry, or
entering a length value in the Dialog Bar.
NOTE: Angles are measured counterĆclockwise from the XC axis.
YC
ZC XC
Cursor location
Angle from XC Axis
Start location
Angle from XC Axis

plus 180 degrees ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ
Start location
Cursor location
EDS
All Rights Reserved
D-11
Curve Creation
Through a Point and Parallel, Perpendicular, or at an

Angle to an Existing Line
Define the start point of the new line.
Select the existing line, being careful not to select one of its control points.
NOTE: The first two steps may be completed in either order.
Move the cursor around. Depending on where the cursor is, the parallel,
perpendicular, or angled line (see below) may be previewed. The Status line
shows which mode is being previewed.
Line at an angle
Parallel line
Defined point
Perpendicular line
Selected line
If it is desired to create a line at an angle to the selected line, enter the

desired value in the Angle text field in the Dialog Bar and press tab.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ When the line is displayed, establish the length by: specifying a screen
ÏÏÏ
D position, selecting geometry, or immediately after the line is created,
ÏÏÏ entering a new value in the Dialog Bar.

Curve Creation
Parallel to An Existing Line at a Distance
Parallel at Distance From - This option affects line creation when a series of
parallel lines are being created. When this option is set to Original, each new
line is created at the specified distance from the line that was originally
selected. When it is set to New, each new line is created at the specified
distance from the last line created.
Make sure String Mode is Toggled to Off.

Select a line.
Enter the Offset Distance in the Dialog Bar.
Choose Apply. The new line is offset from the line selected and equal in
length. The direction of the offset is dependent on how the original line
was selected.
The offset line is

created on the side
where the center of the
selection ball is when
Selected line the original line is
selected.
Offset
distance
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
New line
ÏÏÏ
D
If Apply is continually chosen, additional parallel lines will be created. The ÏÏÏ
Offset Distance value may be changed at any time.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
D-13
Curve Creation
Through a Point and Tangent or Perpendicular to a

Curve
Define the start point of the new line.
Select the existing curve, being careful not to select one of its control
points.
NOTE: The curve may be selected first, then the point may be
defined, if a tangent line is being created. If a perpendicular line is
being created, the point must be defined first.
The line rubberĆbands tangentially to the selected curve.
There are times that the rubberĆbanding line is on the wrong side of
the curve. Move the cursor inside, then outside the curve until the
line snaps to the other side.
When the desired line is displayed, select the highlighted geometry.
The example below shows two examples of creating a line through a point and
tangent or perpendicular to an arc or circle. (Notice that the dashed line shows
the line that would be created with the dashed cursor in that position, or by
selecting the object in that position.) The same is true for the solid line and
cursor.
Defined point
(the endpoint of the arc)
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Tangent line
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ
Tangent line
Perpendicular line
Defined point
Perpendicular line

Curve Creation
Tangent to a Curve and Tangent or Perpendicular to

Another Curve
Select the first curve, being careful not to select one of its control points.
The line rubberĆbands tangentially or perpendicularly to the selected curve,

depending on the cursor position.
Select the second curve, again being careful not to select one of its control
points.
When the desired line is displayed, select the highlighted geometry.
The illustration below shows the creation of 2 lines; one is tangent to a circle
and the other is perpendicular to a circle.
Tangent line
Second curve
Perpendicular line
First curve
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
D-15
Curve Creation
Tangent to a Curve and Parallel, Perpendicular, or at

an Angle to an Existing Line
Select the curve, being careful not to select one of its control points.
Select the line, again being careful not to select one of its control points.
The rubberĆbanding line will be shown parallel, perpendicular, or at an angle

to, the selected line.
When the desired line is displayed, establish the length by specifying a

screen position or selecting geometry. A specific length may also be
established immediately after the line is created by entering the value in
the Dialog Bar.
NOTE: If selecting geometry to specify the length of the line would

result in the line type being changed, press the middle mouse
button to choose Lock Mode, then select the limiting geometry.
Second
object
First object
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Select the curve and line as
D shown
ÏÏÏ
The parallel, perpendicular, and angled lines will
appear individually as the cursor is moved
around

Curve Creation
Line Creation Chart
Line between two points Select two points
Line through a point and Define the first point

Y
horizontal, vertical, or at an Define second point within
angle to the WCS 1 X the Snap Angle setting or
Enter the desired angle,
press <Tab>, and define
second point.
Line through a point and Define a point

1
parallel, perpendicular, or Select a line
at an angle to a line 2 Select limiting point/object
[Can also select line,
then point]
2
1
Line through a point and 2 Select a point

tangent or normal to a curve 1 Select a curve
Select limiting point/object
(if necessary)
Line tangent or perpendicular Select two curves

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
to two curves
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ
2
Line tangent to a curve and Select two curves
parallel or perpendicular to 1 Select limiting point/object
a line
A bisector line Select two lines
EDS
All Rights Reserved
D-17
Curve Creation
Activity 1 - Creating Lines

In this activity lines will be created using the methods previously discussed.
Create the lines as described in the steps only. Additional curves will be created
in subsequent activities to further increase understanding.
Step 1 Open part file pau_curves_1 and start the Modeling

application.
Note the location and orientation of the WCS.
Step 2 Save the part file as ***_curves_1.
Step 3 Choose Insert"Curve"Basic Curves.
Step 4 Create Lines Between Two Cursor Locations.
Choose the Line icon if not already selected.
The snap angle is set to the default of 3°. Therefore, when cursor locations are
specified within 3° of vertical or horizontal, the line will snap to a truly vertical
or horizontal orientation.
Toggle String Mode to Off.
Create a horizontal and vertical line by clicking at two

ÏÏÏ

different screen positions each time as shown:
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ
First selections Second selections
here here
TIP If a start position was erroneously selected, choosing the icon again
will reset the line creation process. There is no need to cancel out of
the Basic Curve dialog box.

Curve Creation
Create a diagonal line as illustrated below.
Select here
Select here
Notice that the line remains highlighted.
Double click in the Length text box on the Dialog Bar in

overstrike mode and enter 4, then press Enter.
The line is edited to that length.
Tab to the Angle text box on the Dialog Bar, enter 45, and
press Enter.
The line is edited to that angle.
Step 5 Create Lines From Endpoints or Midpoints of One Line

to Another.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
D
Turn Fit All before Displaying to On and choose OK.
ÏÏÏ
Choose Refresh (third mouse button).
EDS
All Rights Reserved
D-19
Curve Creation
Select the two lines at their midpoints as shown. A line will

be created point to point regardless of the snap angle.
Select this
line here
Select this
line here
Before After
Select the same two lines at their endpoints on the right. A

line will be created point to point regardless of snap angle.
Select this
line here
Select this
line here
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Before After
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ Step 6 Create a Line Through a Point and Parallel to Another
Line.
Select the bottom diagonal line with the cross hairs on the
endpoint as shown below. The endpoint highlights before
selection.
Select the base line at the top as shown, avoiding control

points. (The order does not matter - the line could have
been selected before the endpoint.)

Curve Creation
A line appears rubberĆbanding from the first point at 90° angles from the base
line, relative to the cursor position.
Select this line

as a base line
Select this
endpoint
Move the cursor to the right so the rubberĆband image is

parallel to the base line and select the middle mouse button
to lock in the construction mode of parallel.
A trim point or object now needs to be selected.
Choose the line created on the right, avoiding its control

points. This line and the line being created define the
intersection point to which the line being created is trimmed.
Choosing this line causes the new

line to be trimmed to a point that the
two lines have in common
(intersection point).
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ
Step 7 Create a Line Parallel to an Existing Line at a Distance.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
D-21
Curve Creation
Select the line as illustrated below (avoid the line's control

points).
In the Dialog Bar, key in an Offset Distance of 2 and press

Enter.
A line the same length as the existing line is created.
Notice that the line was created on the side of the base line that the selection
ball was on at the time of line selection.
Select third mouse button→Cancel.
Choose third mouse button→Undo.
The last line created is removed.
Step 8 Create a Line Through a Point at a Specified Angle.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ This line will be started at the WCS origin and its angle defined relative to the
ÏÏÏ
D WCS.
ÏÏÏ Insert→Curve→Basic Curves.
Put focus in the XC text box located in the Dialog Bar.
Enter 0 (zero) and press the Tab key.
In the YC text box, key in 0 (zero) and press the Tab key.
In the ZC text box, key in 0 (zero) and press Enter.

Curve Creation
Double click in the Angle text box of the Dialog Bar, type
200, and press the Tab key to lock in that value.
Moving the cursor around displays the intended

rubberĆbanded line (or a line at 20° if the cursor is in the
upper right area).
Position the cursor in the lower left to display the 200° line.
Instead of selecting a trim line as in Step 6, select a screen

position.
A theoretical trim line was projected off of the current

cursor position and perpendicular to the line created,
defining the endpoint of the line.
200°
Theoretical trim line ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
D
Step 9 Create a Line Through a Point and Tangent to an
Existing Arc/Circle.
ÏÏÏ
Ensure that Unbounded is Off.
Select the left endpoint of the horizontal line.
Select on the right side of the arc, not on a control point.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
D-23
Curve Creation
As you do this, the Status line will indicate Tangent.
Step 10 Create a Line at an Angle from a Line and Tangent to a

Curve.
To create a line at a specific angle from a base line and tangent to an existing
curve, both objects must be coplanar.
The angle is measured counterclockwise from the base line.
Select the last line created avoiding its control points. This
defines the base line.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ In the Dialog Bar, double click in the Angle text box and key
ÏÏÏ
D in 20. Press Tab to lock in the angle value.
ÏÏÏ Select the circle on the upper left side.
Move the selection ball around until the status line reads
Angle, then use the middle mouse button to select Lock
Mode.
Select the horizontal line away from its control points.

Curve Creation
A line is created tangent to the arc, at an angle of 20° from the base curve and
trimmed to the horizontal line.
20°
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
D-25
Curve Creation
Creating Arcs and Circles
Arcs and circles are created with different icons and minor differences in
functionality. Both provide immediate display feedback and rely on the simple
definition of arc center, size, and start and end points.
As a matter of definition, circle means a complete circle, and an arc is a portion

of a circle.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ

Curve Creation
Creating Arcs
When creating arcs, there are several things to keep in mind:
Arcs have four control points: two endpoints, a midpoint, and the arc
center.
If an arc is chosen such that one of its four control points lies within the
Selection Ball, its control point will be selected.
If an arc is chosen with none of its control points within the Selection Ball,
the arc itself will be selected, inferring tangency or a trim location.
Creation Method
There are two methods for creating arcs:
Start, End, Point on Arc
With this method, an arc may be created that passes through three points,
or which passes through two points and is tangent to a selected object.
Center, Start, End
With this method, the center point, then the start and endpoints of the
arc are defined, which can be adjusted by entering angle values in the
Dialog Bar.
Dialog Bar Fields

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
D
Radius Diameter Start Angle End Angle ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
D-27
Curve Creation
Creating Circles
Circle creation simply requires the definition of a center location and a size.
That information can be defined by numerical entry or selections from the
screen.
Center Point, Point on Circle

Define a point. This becomes the center of the circle.
Define a second point. The circumference of the circle passes through
this point.
A value may be entered in the Dialog Bar to establish an exact radius or

diameter.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Second point First point
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ

Curve Creation
Activity 2 - Creating Arcs and Circles

In this activity, different methods will be used to create arcs and circles.
Continue working with the ***_curves_1 file.
Step 1 Create an Arc through three points.
Three points will be used to create an arc. The arc will start at the first point,
end at the second, and pass through the third.
Choose Insert→Curve→Basic Curves.
Choose the Arc icon.
Turn String Mode Off.
Choose the Start, End, Point on Arc Creation Method (if

necessary).
Create an arc by selecting the screen positions in order as

shown:
Third selection First selection

(for arc size) (for start point)
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ
Second selection
(for end point)
EDS
All Rights Reserved
D-29
Curve Creation
Zoom out, if necessary, to see the entire arc.
Step 2 Create an Arc through two points and tangent to another

arc.
Select the ends of the 45° line, as shown below.
Select the arc just created. Do not select on a control point.
An arc is created that is tangent to the first arc created.
Third selection
(for arc size)
First selection
(for start point)
Second selection
(for end point)
Step 3 Create an Arc by defining the size and end angles.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Choose the Center, Start, End method.
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ Double click in the XC text box on the Dialog Bar and enter
0, press Tab, in the YC text box enter 0, press Enter
Select the upper right endpoint of the 45° line again.
An arc displays in preview and the Cue Line prompts for an

end point or object.

Curve Creation
Select the right endpoint of the horizontal line as shown:
First selection
(for start point)
Second selection
(for end point)
Choose Fit.
The arc is created starting at the diagonal line endpoint and ending at a point
that is in line with the arc center and the end of the horizontal line endpoint.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
D-31
Curve Creation
Arc/Circle Creation Chart
Start point, end point, 2 3 Define first point

point on arc Define second point
1 Define third point
Start point, end point, 3 Define first point

2
tangent object Define second point
1 Select tangent object
Start point, tangent object, Define start point

end point 1
Select tangent object
3
2
Define end point
Arc center, start point, Define first point

end point 2 Define second point
3
Define third point
1
Circle center, point on circle 2 Define first point

Define second point
ÏÏÏ
1
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ Circle center, tangent object
2
Define point
1

Curve Creation
Fillets
Fillets are arcs that have tangent relationships with one or more curves. They
are editable as fillets, meaning the tangent relationships will be maintained as
the fillet radius or arc center is changed.
This section contains a brief explanation of Fillet creation functionality. At the

end of this section, you will find a summary of Fillet creation methods. There
are three Fillet creation methods: Simple, 2 Curve, and
3 Curve, the latter two methods allow manual trimming options.
When the Fillet icon is chosen on the Basic Curves dialog box, the Curve Fillet
dialog box is displayed, as shown below:
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
D-33
Curve Creation
Procedure
Choose the type of fillet desired.
Indicate the desired trim methods for the objects (two and three curve
only).
Enter the radius of the fillet.
Select the objects.
Specify the approximate center of the fillet (two and three curve only).
When creating 2 and 3ĆCurve Fillets, trim options for each of the selected
curves may be specified. If no trimming options are selected, none of the curves
are trimmed. Select from the following trim options:
Trim First Curve

Trim/Delete Second Curve
Trim Third Curve
The Delete Second Curve and Trim Third Curve options are applicable to the
3ĆCurve Fillet only.
When creating 2 and 3ĆCurve Fillets the approximate center must be indicated;
this is accomplished by using the cursor or the Point Constructor. Using the
cursor location method in Point Constructor selects a position in the XĆY plane
of the WCS.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
If a fillet is created other than desired, Undo may be selected to delete the fillet
and restore the selected curves.
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ

Curve Creation
Simple Fillet
Simple Fillet creates a fillet between two coplanar nonĆparallel lines. The size
of the fillet is determined by entering a value for the radius first. The lines are
automatically trimmed to the points of tangency.
NOTE: The trim options and Point Constructor are not available.
The fillet that is created is directly related to where the lines were selected. The
Selection Ball must be positioned in such a manner as to include both lines. If
the Selection Ball contains only one line, an error message displays.
Crosshairs
L1 L1
Selected quadrant
L2 L2
BEFORE AFTER
As both lines are selected, the crosshairs determine which fillet is created; it
indicates the center of the arc. Position the crosshairs in the quadrant formed
by the lines to define the desired fillet center. Each line extends or trims to
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
theĂarc. ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ
Before
After
EDS
All Rights Reserved
D-35
Curve Creation
2 Curve Fillet
The 2 Curve Fillet constructs a fillet between two curves, including points, lines,
circles, conics or splines. A two curve fillet is generated in the counterclockwise
direction from the first curve to the second.
Curve 1 Curve 2
Approximate fillet
center
Curve 2 Curve 1
If the two selected curves are in different planes, the fillet plane is the plane
containing the tangent of the first curve. The plane is normal to the vectors that
are normal to both tangents and is totally independent of the WCS.
(See below.)
Curve 1 Fillet plane
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Fillet
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ
Vectors
normal to
both
tangents
Curve 2

Curve Creation
3 Curve Fillet
This option creates a fillet between three curves, which can be any combination
of points, lines, arcs, conics, and splines. The Radius entry box is not available
because it is determined by the geometry selected.
A three curve fillet is a circular arc generated in a counterclockwise direction

from the first curve to the third curve. The system constructs the fillet in such a
manner that the center of the arc is equidistant to all three curves. The three
curves do not have to lie in the same plane.
Curve 1 Curve 3
Curve 2
Before After
The system trims curves, based on the selected options, to the tangent point of
the fillet.
If any one of the curves selected is an arc, the system prompts for additional
information to create the fillet:
Tangent Outside
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
D

Fillet Within Circle
Circle Within Fillet.
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
D-37
Curve Creation
Curve 1
Curve 1
Before After Fillet
Curve 2
Curve 3
Curve 3
Tangent Outside
Curve 1
Curve 1
Fillet
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Curve 2
ÏÏÏ
D Curve 3 Curve 3
ÏÏÏ Before After
Fillet Within Circle

Curve Creation
Curve 1 Curve 1
Curve 2 Fillet
Curve 3
Curve 3
Before After
Circle Within Fillet
The Point Constructor selections may be used to create a cliff edge fillet, where
the fillet is contiguous with a selected curve, but not tangent to it.
1
2

1
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
D-39
Curve Creation
Fillet Creation Methods Chart
Note: Numbered steps indicate this is not the

only way the arc/circle can be created.
Simple fillet Select both lines

(lines only) simultaneously (both must
intersect the selection ball)
2 curve fillet Select first object

Select second object
2 If the objects extend beyond
3 their intersection point, you
1
must also specify a quadrant
for the center of the fillet.
3 curve fillet Select first object

Select second object
3 Select third object
2
1
To edit a fillet, use the Edit "Curve"Fillet option.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
This concludes discussion of the creation functions found on the Basic Curves
dialog box.
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ

Curve Creation
Activity 3 - Creating Fillets
Step 1 Create a Simple Fillet.
Open part file pau_fillet_1 and select the Modeling

application.
Choose Insert"Curve"Basic Curves.
Choose the Fillet icon.
Choose the Simple Fillet icon.
Remember, only two lines are used to create a Simple Fillet.
Enter a radius of .75.
Practice placing fillets in 4 different line configurations.
In Area #1, select the fillet lines in each of the four corners
as shown below. Keep both lines inside the Selection Ball
when selecting. Cursor placement is critical.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ
Before After
To restore the lines to their original state, choose Undo (using the third mouse
button).
Step 2 Create a 2 Curve Fillet (Trimming Only One Curve).
For this step create a fillet with two curves, but trim just one of the curves.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
D-41
Curve Creation
Choose the 2 Curve Fillet icon.
Define which object will be trimmed. In this case trim the line but not the arc.
(See below.)
Ensure that Trim First Curve is turned on.
Choose the Trim Second Curve button to turn the option off.
Ensure that the system retained .75 for the radius.
In area #2, select the yellow line (first object), then select
the arc (second object).
Indicate the approximate center of the fillet as shown below.
Select second
Indicate here
Select first
Before After
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
D Step 3 Create a 2 Curve Fillet (and Use a Point for One of the
ÏÏÏ Curves).
Notice that the fillet process is modal, that more fillets may be created without
reselecting any icons.
Enter 1.5 for the radius.
In area 2, select the cyan line.
Choose Point Constructor.

Curve Creation
Select the endpoint at the left end of the white line.
Indicate here
Select point
Select first
Before After
Choose Back to return to the Create Fillet dialog box.
Indicate the approximate center of the fillet as shown above.
Step 4 Create a 3 Curve Fillet.
Trim the first and third curves and delete the second.
Choose the 3 Curve Fillet icon.
Ensure that Trim First Curve is turned on.
Choose the Delete Second Curve button to turn it on.
Ensure that Trim Third Curve is turned on.
Select the 3 curves in a counterclockwise order as shown. ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
D
Select first ÏÏÏ
Select second
Select third
Indicate here
Before After
EDS
All Rights Reserved
D-43
Curve Creation
Indicate the approximate center of the fillet as shown above.
Step 5 Close all part files and do not save.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ

Curve Creation
Editing Curves
The options on the Edit Curve option allows the modifications of existing
curves. To display the dialog box, choose Insert→Curve→Basic Curves to
display the Basic Curves dialog box, then choose the Edit Curve Parameters
icon.
Edit
Curve
Parameters
Trim
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
D-45
Curve Creation
Edit Curve Parameters
When this icon is active and a curve is selected, the edit mode for that type of
curve appears.
The following types of curve edits are discussed in this section:
Editing a Line
Editing an Arc or Circle
Editing a Line
A line may be edited by changing its endpoints or its parameters (length and
angle).
To change a line's endpoint:
Select the line end to be modified. The line now rubberĆbands from the
fixed end.
Specify a new position using any of the Point Method options on the
dialog box.
A line may also be Stretched to move its endpoint.
To change a line's parameters:

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Select the line, avoiding its control points.
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ Enter new values for the length and/or angle in the Dialog Bar, then press
<Enter>.
The direction that the line is extended is dependent on which side of the
center control point selected.

Curve Creation
Editing an Arc or Circle
The two methods used to edit an arc or circle are Parameters and Dragging.
The arc's or circle's parameters may be changed by entering new values in the
Dialog Bar, or changing them by dragging to a new location.
Moving an Arc or Circle to a New Location
An arc or circle may be moved to a new location, regardless of the editing mode
that is active, as follows:
Select the center of the arc or circle.

Drag the arc or circle to a new location, or enter a new XC, YC, ZC
location in the Dialog Bar.
Using Parameters Mode
To change an arc or circle using Parameters mode:
Select the arc or circle, avoiding its control points.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Enter new values in the radius, diameter, start angle, and/or end angle
D
ÏÏÏ
fields in the Dialog Bar and press <Enter>.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
D-47
Curve Creation
Using Dragging Mode
There are two ways to change an arc or circle using Dragging mode:
To change the radius of the arc or circle, select it, avoiding its control
points, and drag it. When it is the size desired, press the first mouse
button.
Other geometry may also be selected to control the size of the arc. For example,
a line may be selected to make the arc tangent to it, or the endpoint of another
arc may be selected to make the selected arc pass through it.
To change the start or end angle of the arc or circle, select it at the
desired endpoint and drag it. When the angle is correct, press the first
mouse button.
Other geometry may also be selected to control the start and/or end angles of
the arc. A line may be selected to stop the arc at its intersection with the line, or
an endpoint of another object may be selected, and that endpoint will be
projected onto the arc to determine its start angle.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ

Curve Creation
Trim
When a curve is trimmed, it is trimmed to its intersection with one or two

bounding objects. A bounding object can be a curve, face, point, plane, or view
point.
Caution must be taken when selecting the curve to trim. The portion of the
curve being trimmed determines which end is trimmed. The segment of the
object that is selected is always removed or extended (see below). If there are
multiple intersection points, select near the desired intersection, the system will
prompt for the selection of the desired intersection point to be used as the
bounding point.
Bounding Arc Bounding Arc
Intersection Intersection
Point Point
The left part of the line is trimmed

If the line is selected here
BEFORE TRIM AFTER TRIM
One bounding object must be specified, and not more than two, when trimming
a curve. Once the bounding objects have been specified, multiple curves may be
specified and they will all be trimmed to the bounding objects.
Procedure ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Select the bounding objects. ÏÏÏ
D
Define the type of trim to perform. ÏÏÏ
Select the curve to trim.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
D-49
Curve Creation
Activity 4 - Trimming Curves
Step 1 Trim Curves to One Bounding Object.
Open the part file pau_editcurve_1.
Select the Modeling application.
Choose Insert"Curve"Basic Curves.
Choose the Trim icon.
Step 2 Trim the Three lines to an Arc.
Select the arc as the first bounding object.
LINE1
LINE2
Select the arc as the bounding object
LINE3
Click MB2. In this case, it is not necessary to have a second

bounding object, so the selection may be skipped by clicking
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
MB2.
ÏÏÏ
D Select LINE1 as shown below as the curve to trim.
ÏÏÏ LINE1
Select the first line
to be trimmed
LINE2
LINE3

Curve Creation
The bounding curves don't change, so continue trimming.
Select the lower end of the second line.
LINE1
LINE2
LINE3
The second line is trimmed to the defined bounding line.
Select the lower end of the third line.
LINE1
LINE2
LINE3
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
The system will trim LINE3 by the combination of the side of the midpoint of
LINE3 and the side of the bounding curve. D
ÏÏÏ
Step 3 Close the part.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
D-51
Curve Creation
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ

WCS Options
WCS Options
Appendix E
This appendix describes additional WCS manipulation options.
WCS Origin: Allows the location of the WCS to be altered using the Point
Constructor, while the rotation of the axes remains unchanged.
Defining Points for Location
To determine the location of the WCS, Primitives or any other geometry, the
definition of specific points in space is necessary, and is a common function in
any CAE system. Unigraphics offers a standard dialog box that provides
multiple point methods to define location. Using the Point Constructor dialog
box, you can define origin points, start points, endpoints, etc. based on existing
geometry or coordinate values.

Cursor Location Control Point
Intersection Point
Inferred Point
Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Point on Surface

Center
Angle on
Arc/Ellipse Point on Curve/Edge
Quadrant Point
None
Rectangular
Cylindrical
Restores Base Spherical
Point values Vector
to zero and
Along Curve
ÉÉÉ
Offset to none
ÉÉÉ
E
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
E-1
WCS Options
NOTE: For more information on Point types, see Appendix B.
Endpoint selected as
new WCS origin
Before After
Rotate WCS: Allows the rotation of the WCS to be altered, while the location
of the axes remains unchanged. The top line of the following menu could be
read Rotate about ZC, XC to YC".
The figure below illustrates an example of Rotate about ZC: XC to YC
Before After
About the ZC axis,
from the XC axis
toward the YC axis 90
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
E
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
E-2 Unigraphics Student Manual All Rights Reserved
Hot Keys
Hot Keys ÉÉÉ

Appendix F
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
F
ÉÉÉ
This appendix describes the various short cuts via Hot Keys
Hot Key Function Hot Key Function

CtrlĆA Assembly Navigator CtrlĆN File, New
CtrlĆB Edit, Blank CtrlĆO File, Open
CtrlĆC Copy CtrlĆP File, Plot
CtrlĆD Delete CtrlĆQ
CtrlĆE Tools, Expression CtrlĆR View, Operation, Rotate (full
menu)
CtrlĆF Fit View CtrlĆS File, Save
CtrlĆG Grip Execute CtrlĆT Edit, Transform
CtrlĆH CtrlĆU Execute User Function
CtrlĆI Information, Object CtrlĆV Paste
CtrlĆJ Edit, Object Display CtrlĆW Application, Gateway
CtrlĆK CtrlĆX Cut
CtrlĆL Format, Layer Settings CtrlĆY
CtrlĆM Application, Modeling CtrlĆZ Edit, Undo
EDS
All Rights Reserved
F-1
Hot Keys
ÉÉÉ CtrlĆShiftĆA File, Save As CtrlĆShiftĆN Format, Layout, New

ÉÉÉ CtrlĆShiftĆB Edit, Blank, Reverse Blank CtrlĆShiftĆO Format, Layout, Open
ÉÉÉ
F
ÉÉÉ CtrlĆShiftĆC
All
View, Curvature Graph CtrlĆShiftĆP Tools, Macro, Playback
CtrlĆShiftĆD CtrlĆShiftĆQ Quick Shaded Image
CtrlĆShiftĆE CtrlĆShiftĆR Tools, Macro, Record
CtrlĆShiftĆF Format, Layout, Fit All CtrlĆShiftĆS Toolsm Macro, Step
Views
CtrlĆShiftĆG Debug Grip CtrlĆShiftĆT Preferences, Selection
CtrlĆShiftĆH High Quality Image CtrlĆShiftĆU Edit, Blank, Unblank All
Of Part
CtrlĆShiftĆI CtrlĆShiftĆV Format, Visible In View
CtrlĆShiftĆJ Preferences, Object CtrlĆShiftĆW
CtrlĆShiftĆK Edit, Blank, Unblank SeĆ CtrlĆShiftĆX
lected
CtrlĆShiftĆL CtrlĆShiftĆY
CtrlĆShiftĆM Model Navigator CtrlĆShiftĆZ View, Operation, Zoom
(full menu)
AltĆTab Toggles Application CtrlĆAltĆB Tools, Boundary

AltĆF4 Closes Active Window CtrlĆAltĆC Tools, CLSF
F1 Help on Context CtrlĆAltĆM Application ManufacturĆ
ing
F3 View Current Dialog CtrlĆAltĆN Tools, Unisim
F4 Information Window CtrlĆAltĆW Application Assemblies
F5 Refresh CtrlĆAltĆX Tools, Lathe Cross-SecĆ
tion
F6 Quick Zoom
F7 Quick Rotate

F-2 Unigraphics Student Manual All Rights Reserved
Glossary
Glossary
ABS - Absolute coordinate system.
Absolute Coordinate System - Coordinate system in which all geometry is

located from a fixed or absolute zero point.
active view - One of up to 49 views per layout in which you can directly work.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
GL
angle - In Unigraphics, an angle measured on the XĆY plane of a coordinate

ÉÉÉ
system is positive if the direction that it is swept is counterclockwise as viewed
from the positive Z axis side of the XĆY plane. An angle swept in the opposite
direction is said to be negative.
arc - An incomplete circle; sometimes used interchangeably with the term

circle."
ASCII - American Standard Code for Information Interchange. It is a set of

8Ćbit binary numbers representing the alphabet, punctuation, numerals, and
other special symbols used in text representation and communications protocol.
aspect ratio - The ratio of length to height which represents the change in size
of a symbol from its original.
assembly - A collection of piece parts and subĆassemblies representing a

product. In Unigraphics, an assembly is a part file which contains components.
assembly part - A Unigraphics part file which is a userĆdefined, structured

combination of subĆassemblies, components and/or objects.
associativity - The ability to tie together (link) separate pieces of information

to aid in automating the design, drafting, and manufacture of parts in
Unigraphics.
attributes - Pieces of information that can be associated with Unigraphics

geometry and parts such as assigning a name to an object.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
GL-1
Glossary
block font - A Unigraphics character font which is the default font used for
creating text in drafting objects and dimensions.
body - Class of objects containing sheets and solids (see solid body and sheet
body).
bottomĆup modeling - Modeling technique where component parts are

designed and edited in isolation of their usage within some higher level
assembly. All assemblies using the component are automatically updated when
opened to reflect the geometric edits made at the piece part level.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
GL boundary - A set of geometric objects that describes the containment of a part
ÉÉÉ from a vantage point.
CAD/CAM - Computer Aided Design/Computer Aided Manufacturing.
category, layer - A name assigned to a layer, or group of layers. A category, if

descriptive of the type of data found on the layers to which it is assigned, will
assist the user in identifying and managing data in a part file.
chaining - A method of selecting a sequence of curves which are joined

endĆtoĆend.
circle - A complete and closed arc, sometimes used interchangeably with the
term arc."
component - A collection of objects, similar to a group, in an assembly part. A

component may be a subĆassembly consisting of other, lower level components.
component part - The part file or master" pointed to by a component within

an assembly. The actual geometry is stored in the component part and
referenced, not copied, by the assembly. A separate Unigraphics part file that
the system associates with a component object in the assembly part.
cone direction - Defines the cone direction using the Vector Subfunction.
cone origin - Defines the base origin using the Point Subfunction.
half angle - The half vertex angle defines the angle formed by the axis of the
cone and its side.

GL-2 Unigraphics Student Manual All Rights Reserved
Glossary
constraints - Refer to the methods you can use to refine and limit your sketch.
The methods of constraining a sketch are geometric and dimensional.
construction points - Points used to create a spline. Construction points may

be used as poles (control vertices), defining points, or data points. See POLES,
DEFINING POINTS, and DATA POINTS.
control point - Represents a specific location on an existing object. A line has

three control points: both end points and the midpoint of the line. The control
point for a closed circle is its center, while the control points for an open arc are
its end and midpoints. A spline has a control point at each knot point. A control
point is a position on existing geometry. Any of the following points: 1. Existing
Points 2. Endpoints of conics 3. Endpoints and midpoints of open arcs 4. Center
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
GL
points of circles 5. Midpoints and endpoints of lines 6. Endpoints of splines. ÉÉÉ
convert curve - A method of creating a bĆcurve in which curves (lines, arcs,
conics or splines) may be selected for conversion into a bĆcurve.
Coordinate System - A system of axes used in specifying positions (CSYS).
counterclockwise - The rightĆhand rule determines the counterĆ clockwise

direction. If the thumb is aligned with the ZC axis and pointing in the positive
direction, counterclockwise is defined as the direction the fingers would move
from the positive XC axis to the positive YC axis.
current layout - The layout currently displayed on the screen. Layout data is
kept in an intermediate storage area until it is saved.
curve - A curve in Unigraphics is any line, arc, conic, spline or bĆcurve. A

geometric object; this may refer to a line, an arc, a conic, or a spline.
defaults - Assumed values when they are not specifically defined.
defining points - Spline construction points. Splines created using defining

points are forced to pass through the points. These points are guaranteed to be
on the spline.
degreeĆofĆfreedom arrows - ArrowĆlike indicators that show areas that require

more information to fully constrain a sketch.
design in context - The ability to directly edit component geometry as it is

displayed in the assembly. Geometry from other components can be selected to
aid in the modeling. Also referred to as edit in place.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
GL-3
Glossary
dimensional constraint - This is a scalar value or expression which limits the

measure of some geometric object such as the length of a line, the radius of an
arc, or the distance between two points.
directory - A hierarchical file organization structure which contains a list of

filenames together with information for locating those files.
displayed part - The part currently displayed in the graphics window.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
GL
edit in place - See design in context.
ÉÉÉ emphasize work part - A color coding option which helps distinguish geometry
in the work part from geometry in other parts within the same assembly.
endpoint - An endpoint of a curve or an existing point.
expression - An arithmetic or conditional statement that has a value.

Expressions are used to control dimensions and the relationships between
dimensions of a model.
face - A region on the outside of a body enclosed by edges.
feature - An allĆencompassing term which refers to all solids, bodies, and

primitives.
file - A group or unit of logically related data which is labeled or named" and
associated with a specified space. In Unigraphics, parts, and patterns are a few
types of files.
filtering - See object filtering.
font box - A rectangle or box" composed of dashed line objects. The font box
defines the size, width and spacing of characters belonging to a particular font.
font, character - A set of characters designed at a certain size, width and

spacing.
font, line - Various styles of lines and curves, such as solid, dashed, etc.

Glossary
free form feature - A body of zero thickness. (see body and sheet body)
generator curve - A contiguous set of curves, either open or closed, that can be
swept or revolved to create a body.
geometric constraint - A relationship between one or more geometric objects

that forces a limitation. For example, two lines that are perpendicular or
parallel specifies a geometric constraint.
grid - A rectangular array of implied points used to accurately align locations

which are entered by using the screen position" option. ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
GL
guide curve - A set of contiguous curves that define a path for a sweep
operation.
ÉÉÉ
virtual intersection - Intersection formed by extending two line segments that
do not touch to the position that they cross. The line segments must be
nonĆparallel and coplanar.
inflection - A point on a spline where the curve changes from concave to

convex, or vice versa.
interactive step - An individual menu in a sequence of menus used in

performing a Unigraphics function.
isometric view (TfrĆISO) - Isometric view orientation - one where equal

distances along the coordinate axes are also equal to the view plane. One of the
axes is vertical.
knot points - The defining points of a spline. Points along a BĆspline,

representing the endpoints of each spline segment.
layer - A layer is a partition of a part. Layers are analogous to the transparent

material used by conventional designers. For example, the user may create all
geometry on one layer, all text and dimensions on a second, and tool paths on a
third.
layout - A collection of viewports or window areas, in which views are

displayed. The standard layouts in Unigraphics include one, two, four or six
viewports.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
GL-5
Glossary
layouts - Standard layouts are available to the user. These include:

L1 - Single View,
L2 - Two Views,
L3 - Two Views,
L4 - Four Views,
L6 - Six Views.
Information window - The window used in listing operations, such as Info.
loaded part - Any part currently opened and in memory. Parts are loaded
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
GL
explicitly using the File→Open option and implicitly when they are used in an
assembly being opened.
ÉÉÉ menu - A list of options from which the user makes a selection.
model space - The coordinate system of a newly created part. This is also
referred to as the absolute coordinate system." Any other coordinate system
may be thought of as a rotation and/or translation of the absolute coordinate
system.
name, expression - - The name of an expression is the single variable on the

left hand side of the expression. All expression names must be unique in a part
file. Each expression can have only one name. See expression.
objects - All geometry within the Unigraphics environment.
offset face - A Unigraphics surface type created by projecting (offsetting)

points along all the normals of a selected surface at a specified distance to
create a true" offset.
options - A number of various alternatives (functions, modes, parameters, etc.)

from among which the user can choose.
origin - The point X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 0 for any particular coordinate system.
parametric design - Concept used to define and control the relationships

between the features of a model. Concept where the features of the model are
defined by parameters.
part - A Unigraphics file containing a .prt extension. It may be a piece part

containing model geometry, a subĆassembly, or a topĆlevel assembly.

Glossary
part or model - A collection of Unigraphics objects which together may

represent some object or structure.
partially loaded part - A component part which, for performance reasons, has
not been fully loaded. Only those portions of the component part necessary to
render the higher level assembly are initially loaded (the reference set).
point set - A distribution of points on a curve between two bounding points on

that curve.
Point Subfunction Menu - A list of options (methods) by which positions can

be specified in Unigraphics. ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
GL
readĆonly part - A part for which the user does not have write access privilege. ÉÉÉ
real time dynamics - Produces smooth pan, zoom, and rotation of a part,
though placing great demand on the CPU.
Refresh - A function which causes the system to refresh the display list on the
viewing screen. This removes temporary display items and fills in holes left by
Blank or Delete.
rightĆhand rule, conventional - The rightĆhand rule is used to determine the

orientation of a coordinate system. If the origin of the coordinate system is in
the palm of the right fist, with the back of the hand lying on a table, the
outward extension of the index finger corresponds to the positive Y axis, the
upward extension of the middle finger corresponds to the positive Z axis, and
the outward extension of the thumb corresponds to the positive X axis.
rightĆhand rule for rotation - The rightĆhand rule for rotation is used to
associate vectors with directions of rotation. When the thumb is extended and
aligned with a given vector, the curled fingers determine the associated
direction of rotation. Conversely, when the curled fingers are held so as to
indicate a given direction of rotation, the extended thumb determines the
associated vector.
screen cursor (cursor) - A marker on the screen which the user moves around
using some position indicator device. Used for indicating positions, selecting
objects, etc. Takes the form of a fullĆscreen cross.
sheet - A object consisting of one or more faces not enclosing a volume. A

body of zeroĆthickness. Also called sheet body.)
EDS
All Rights Reserved
GL-7
Glossary
sketch - A collection of geometric objects that closely approximates the outline

of a particular design. You refine your sketch with dimensional and geometric
constraints until you achieve a precise representation of your design. The
sketch can then be extruded or revolved to obtain a 3D object or feature.
Sketch Coordinate System (SCS) - The SCS is a coordinate system which

corresponds to the plane of the sketch. When a sketch is created the WCS is
changed to the SCS of the new sketch.
solid body - An enclosed volume. A type of body (see Body).
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
GL
spline - A smooth freeĆform curve.
ÉÉÉ stored layout - The last saved version of a layout.
stored view - The last saved version of a view.
string - A contiguous series of lines and/or arcs connected at their end points.
subĆassembly - A part which both contains components and is itself used as a

component in higherĆlevel assemblies.
surface - The underlying geometry used to define a face on a sheet body. A

surface is always a sheet but a sheet is not necessarily a surface (see sheet
body). The underlying geometry used to define the shape of a face on a sheet.
system - The Unigraphics System.
temporary part - An empty part which is optionally created for any component
parts which cannot be found in the process of opening an assembly.
topĆdown modeling - Modeling technique where component parts can be

created and edited while working at the assembly level. Geometric changes
made at the assembly level are automatically reflected in the individual
component part when saved.
trim - To shorten or extend a curve.
trimetric view (TfrĆTri) - A viewing orientation which provides you with an

excellent view of the principal axes. In Unigraphics II, the trimetric view has the
ZĆaxis vertical. The measure along the XĆaxis is 7/8 of the measure along Z, and
the measure along the YĆaxis is 3/4 of the measure along Z.

Glossary
Unigraphics - A computer based turnkey graphics system for computerĆaided

design, drafting, and manufacturing, produced by UGS.
units - The unit of measure in which you may work when constructing in
Unigraphics. Upon log on, you may define the unit of measure as inches or
millimeters.
upgraded component - A component which was originally created preĆV10 but

has been opened in V10 and upgraded to remove the duplicate geometry.
version - A term which identifies the state of a part with respect to a series of
modifications that have been made to the part since its creation.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
GL
view - A particular display of the model. View parameters include view

ÉÉÉ
orientation matrix; center; scale; X,Y and Z clipping bounds; perspective
vector; drawing reference point and scale. Eight standard views are available to
the user: Top, Front, Right, Left, Bottom, Back, TfrĆISO (topĆfrontĆright
isometric), and TfrĆTri (topĆfrontĆright trimetric).
view dependent edit - A mode in which the user can edit a part in the current
work view only.
view dependent modifications - Modifications to the display of geometry in a

particular view. These include erase from view and modify color, font and
width.
view dependent geometry - Geometry created within a particular view. It will

only be displayed in that view.
WCS - Work Coordinate System.
WCS, work plane - The WCS (Work Coordinate System) is the coordinate
system singled out by the user for use in construction, verification, etc. The
coordinates of the WCS are called work coordinates and are denoted by XC,
YC, ZC. The XCĆYC plane is called the work plane.
Work Coordinate System - See WCS.
work layer - The layer on which geometry is being constructed. You may create
objects on only one layer at a time.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
GL-9
Glossary
work part - The part in which you create and edit geometry. The work part can
be your displayed part or any component part which is contained in your
displayed assembly part. When displaying a piece part, the work part is always
the same as the displayed part.
work view - The view in which work is being performed. When the creation
mode is view dependent, any construction and view dependent editing that is
performed will occur only in the current work view.
XC axis - XĆaxis of the work coordinate system.

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
GL
ÉÉÉ YC axis - YĆaxis of the work coordinate system.
ZC axis - ZĆaxis of the work coordinate system.

Index
Index
A Body, GL-2
Boolean Operations, 14-6
ABS, 2-3, GL-1 Intersect, 14-9
Absolute Coordinate System, GL-1 Subtract, 14-9
Unite, 14-8
Active View, GL-1
Boss, 3-33
Activities
Blend Solid Edges, 9-6, 9-12 Bottom-Up Modeling, GL-2
Chamfer Edges, 6-13 Bottom-Up modeling, 8-5
Circular Array, 16-11 Boundary, GL-2
Datum Plane - Dual Constraints, 11-27
Exit Unigraphics, 1-41 Break String, during curve creation, D-9
Form Feature Boss Creation, 3-34
Hollow Solid, 5-5, 5-7
Manipulating the Work Coordinate System, 2-10 C
Opening an Existing Part File, 1-16
Save Part As, 1-39 Cartesian, 2-2
Angle, GL-1 Category, Layer, GL-2
Annotation Editor Chaining, GL-2

ÉÉÉ
editing text, 10-52 Chamfer, 6-10
ÉÉÉ
placing the text, 10-50
tool bar, 10-49
Circle, D-28, GL-2
creation method, center point, point on circle,
D-28
ÉÉÉ
IN
ÉÉÉ
Apparent intersection point, B-6
edit, D-47
Arc, GL-1
dialog bar fields, D-27 Circular Array, 16-5
edit, D-47 Class selection subfunction
ASCII, GL-1 filter methods, 1-37
color, 1-37
Aspect Ratio, GL-1 features, 1-37
Assemblies, GL-1 type, 1-37
bottom-up , 8-6 name, 1-37
designing in context, 8-5 up one level, 1-38
Work Part, 8-16 Close, 1-41
Assembly, definition of, 8-2 Part File, 1-41
Associativity, GL-1 Component, GL-2
Part, GL-2
Attribute, GL-1
Component Object, definition of, 8-3
Automatic Centerline, 10-20
Component Part, definition of, 8-4
Automatic Update, 10-17
Components, add existing part , 8-12
Cone
B Direction, GL-2
Origin, GL-2
Blend, 6-3 Constraints, GL-3
Block, 2-18 Geometric, 13-59, 13-64, 13-69, 13-76
EDS Practical Applications of IN-1

All Rights Reserved Unigraphics Student Manual
Index
geometric Designing in Context, 8-5

displaying, 13-73 Destination layer, C-3
removing, 13-73 original, C-3
Construction Points, GL-3 specify, C-3
work, C-3
Control Point, GL-3
Dialog bar
Control points, D-5 during arc creation, D-27
Convert, Curves to BĆCurves, GL-3 in curve creation, D-4
Coordinate Systems, GL-3 Dimension Constraints, GL-4
Absolute, 2-2 Dimension Local Settings, 10-33
Cartesian, 2-2
moving of WCS, 2-4 Dimensions, 13-61
Sketch, GL-8 creating dimensions, 10-29
Work, 2-2 local settings, 10-33
reorienting of, 2-16, 2-24 appended text controls, 10-34
arrow line display, 10-40
Copy, transform, C-4 extension line display, 10-40
Counterclockwise, GL-3 leader direction options, 10-41
placement options, 10-39
Create precision options, 10-35
Expressions, 4-3 text justification options, 10-42
Part, 1-9
Direction, Cone, GL-2
Create Centerline, 10-10
Directory, GL-4
Creating Dimensions, 10-29
ÉÉÉ Displayed Part, 1-15, 8-13, GL-4
ÉÉÉ
Creating Utility Symbols, 10-19
Double Offset Chamfer, 6-12
ÉÉÉ
IN Current Layout, GL-3
Drafting Application, uses of, 10-2
ÉÉÉ
Cursor, GL-7 Drawing Operations
Curve, GL-3 modifying a drawing, 10-3
edit, D-45 removing drawing views , 10-10
trim, D-49 Drawings
Curve parameters, edit, curve, D-46 adding a view, 10-7
setting the view display preferences, 10-14
Curves, basic, D-3 automatic update, 10-17
Cylinder, 2-27 hidden line removal, 10-15
silhouettes, 10-17
smooth edges, 10-16, 10-17
D uses of the drafting application, 10-2
Dual Constraints, 12-4
Datum Axis, 12-2
Datum Plane, 11-3
Dual Constraints, 12-4 E
Defaults, GL-3 Edge Blends, 6-4
Defining Points, 2-4, GL-3 Edit
DegreeĆofĆfreedom Arrows, 13-59, GL-3 Expressions, 4-3
Feature, 15-2, 15-5
Delayed Update, 15-3 transform, C-2
Delete, Feature, 15-9 Edit - Undo, 1-26
Delete positioning dimension, 15-30 Edit curve, line, D-46
Design in Context, GL-3 Edit curve parameters, curve, D-46
IN-2 Unigraphics Student Manual EDS
Unigraphics NX
All Rights Reserved
Index
Edit dimension value, positioning dimension, Filter Box, 1-18

feature, 15-30 Filter methods, 1-37
Edit in Place, GL-4 color, 1-37
type, 1-37
Edit Parameters, 15-27
Move Feature, 15-7 Filtering, GL-4
Editing Features, 15-2, 15-5 Font
Box, GL-4
Emphasize Work Part, GL-4 Character, GL-4
Endpoint, GL-4 Line, GL-4
Expression Editor, 4-4 Form Features, types of, 3-2
Expressions, GL-4 Free Form Feature, GL-5
Creating and Editing, 4-3
Names, GL-6
G
Generator Curve, GL-5
F Geometric Constraint, GL-5
Face, GL-4 Grid, GL-5
Feature Creation Guide Curve, GL-5
Block, 2-18
Boolean Operations, 14-6
Boss, 3-33
H
Chamfer, 6-10
ÉÉÉ
Half Angle, GL-2
Cylinder, 2-27
ÉÉÉ
Hidden Line Removal, 10-15
Datum Axis, 12-2
ÉÉÉ
Hole, 3-14
Hole, 3-14 IN
Hollow Solid, 5-3
ÉÉÉ
Hollow Feature, 5-3
Instance, 16-3 Wall Thickness, 5-3
Pad, 3-38
Pocket, 3-30
Primitives, 2-17 I
Slot, 3-21
Subtract, 14-9 Implementation of Design Standards, class
Unite, 14-8 standards, -3
Implied intersection point, B-6
Features, GL-4
Edit, 15-2, 15-5 Infer, point method, D-6
Hole, 3-14 Inflection, GL-5
Intersect, 14-9 Instance, 16-2, 16-3
unsuppress, 15-6 Circular Array, 16-5
File, GL-4 Rectangular Array, 16-4
close, 1-41 Intersect, 14-9
Close Part, 1-41
New, 1-9 Intersection point
apparent, B-6
Open, 1-17
implied, B-6
Quit, 1-42
Save Part As, 1-39 Introduction, -1
terminology, -6
Fillet
create, two curve fillet, D-36
feature, create
simple fillet, D-35
K
three curve fillet, D-37 Knot Points, GL-5

Index
L rectangular, B-12
spherical, B-14
Layer, GL-5 vector, B-14
Offset Angle, Chamfer, 6-12
Layout, GL-5, GL-6
Offset Surface, GL-6
List information, Model Navigation Tool, 15-43
Open, Part File, 1-17
Listing Window, GL-6 Origin, Cone, GL-2
Loaded Part, GL-6
Locking a Constraint, 13-23 P
Pad, 3-38
M Parametric Design, GL-6
Part, GL-6, GL-7
MB1, 1-24 Partially Loaded Part, GL-7
MB2, 1-24 Parts
fully loaded, 8-8
MB3, 1-24
partially loaded, 8-8
Menu, GL-6 unloaded, 8-9
Message, Part File Saved, 1-40 Pocket, 3-30
Rectangular, 3-30, 3-38
Millimeters, 1-9
Point Set, GL-7
Mirror through a line, transform, C-11
Point Subfunction, GL-7
ÉÉÉ
Model, GL-7 Point subfunction
ÉÉÉ Model Navigation Tool, popĆup menu options, List angle on arc/ellipse, B-8
ÉÉÉ
Information, 15-43 arc/ellipse center, B-7
IN control point, B-5
ÉÉÉ
Model Space, 2-2, GL-6
copying a point to work layer, B-3
Modeling Operations, 5-2, 6-2 cursor location, B-2, B-3
Modifying a Drawing, 10-3 end point, B-4
existing point, B-3
Move intersection point, B-6
Feature, 15-7 offset, B-10
transform, C-4 along curve, B-15
Multiple copies, transform, C-4 cylindrical, B-13
rectangular, B-12
spherical, B-14
vector, B-14
N quadrant point, B-9
reset, B-11
NonĆuniform scale, transform, C-8 using screen position with a grid, B-3
Notes and Labels Pre-selection highlighting, during basic curve
editing text, 10-52 creation, D-5
placing the text, 10-50 Primitives, 15-1
creating text with a leader, 10-51
Procedures
Body of Revolution, Trim to Face, 14-37
Toolbox-Curve, Fillets, D-41
O Toolbox-Curve, Line, D-10
Toolbox-Curve, Trim Curve, D-50
Object, GL-6
Offset
along curve, B-15
Q
cylindrical, B-13 Quit Unigraphics, 1-42
Unigraphics NX
All Rights Reserved
Index
R Smooth Edges, 10-16, 10-17

Snap Angle, 13-23
ReadĆOnly Part, GL-7 Snap angle, D-10
Real Time Dynamics, GL-7 Solid Body, GL-8
Rectangular Specify, destination layer, C-3
Pocket, 3-30, 3-38
Slot, 3-22 Spline, GL-8
Reference Feature Stored Layout, GL-8

Datum Axis, 12-2 Stored View, GL-8
Datum Plane, 11-3 String, GL-8
types of, 11-2
SubĆassembly, GL-8
Refresh, GL-7
Sub-assembly, definition of, 8-2
Removing Drawing Views , 10-10
Subdivisions, transform, C-4
Reposition, 8-18
rotate about a line, 8-23 Subtract, 14-9
rotate about a point, 8-22 Surface, GL-8
translate, 8-21, 8-22 Symbols, creating utility symbols, 10-19
Respecify Parameters, 15-27 associativity of utility symbols, 10-20
deleting a utility symbol, 10-20
Right Hand Rule, 2-2, GL-7
System, GL-8
Rotate, the WCS, 2-11
ÉÉÉ
Rotate about a line
reposition, 8-23 T
transform, C-12
ÉÉÉ
Rotate about a point
reposition, 8-22
Target Solid, 14-7
Temporary Part, GL-8 ÉÉÉ
IN
ÉÉÉ
transform, C-10 TfrĆISO, GL-5
Rotation, GL-7 TfrĆTri, GL-8
Three curve fillet, create, D-37
S Tool Solid, 14-7

Top-Down Modeling, GL-8
Save Part As, 1-39
Top-Down modeling, 8-5
Scale, transform, C-7
Trace status, transform, C-3
SCS, GL-8
Transform
Selection Toolbar, 1-27, 8-13, 8-16, 15-15 copy, C-4
Sheet, GL-7 destination layer, C-3
edit, C-2
Silhouettes, 10-17 mirror through a line, C-11
Simple fillet, create, D-35 move, C-4
multiple copies, C-4
Single Offset Chamfer, 6-11 nonĆuniform scale, C-8
Sketch, GL-8 rotate about a line, C-12
constraining of, 13-61 rotate about a point, C-10
Coordinate System, GL-8 scale, C-7
subdivisions, C-4
Sketch Curve Creation, 13-22
trace status, C-3
Slot, 3-21 translate, C-6
Rectangular, 3-22 delta, C-6

Index
to a point, C-6 View, GL-9

undo last, C-4 Isometric, GL-5
Translate Trimetric, GL-8
reposition, 8-21, 8-22 Work, GL-10
transform, C-6
Trim, GL-8
W
Trim curve, D-49
Two curve fillet, create, D-36 WAVE, definition of, 3-8
WCS, 2-3, 3-3, GL-9
Dynamics, 2-10
U Origin, 4-5
WCS Dynamics, 2-4
Undo, 1-26
Work, destination layer, transform, C-3
Undo last, transform, C-4
Work Layer, GL-9
Unigraphics, GL-9
Work Part, 1-15, 8-16, GL-10
Unite, 14-8
Units, GL-9
Inches, 1-9
Millimeters, 1-9
X
Unsuppress feature, 15-6 XCĆAxis, GL-10
Update, 15-3
ÉÉÉ edit during update, 15-10

Y
ÉÉÉ Upgrade, Component, GL-9
ÉÉÉ
IN
ÉÉÉ V
YCĆAxis, GL-10
Vectors, Defining of, 2-26

Z
Version, GL-9 ZCĆAxis, GL-10
Unigraphics NX
All Rights Reserved
Reference Chart Tear Outs
These tear out reference charts are provided for your convenience.
EDS Practical Applications of


Student Profile
Practical Applications of Unigraphics
Name Date
Employer
U.S. citizen? Yes / No
When is your planned departure time?________________am/pm
Please answer the following questions as honestly as you can. We are concerned about providing training that
meets your needs. If you have any additional comments please write them on the back of this form.
1. Job title:
2. Current responsibilities:
3. How long have you held these responsibilities? Years ______ Months ______
4. How long have you been working with CAD/CAM/CAE systems? Years ______
5. What other CAD/CAM/CAE systems are you familiar with?
6. Are you currently using Unigraphics? _______ Version _______ Hours per week?
7. What is the function of your CAD/CAM/CAE system (documentation, modeling, analysis,
translation interface, etc.)?
8. What do you model in your Unigraphics part files (castings, assemblies, floor plans, etc.)?
9. Please list other completed CAD/CAM/CAE courses and the provider including Unigraphics CBT
and CAST:
Course Provider
10. Please check the box that best describes your current skill level in the various Unigraphics
disciplines listed below.
none novice intermediate advanced future use

Wireframe Modeling
Solid Modeling
Parametric Modeling
Drafting
Assemblies
Manufacturing

Additional Comments

Course Agenda
Day 1 Monday Morning

Introduction & Overview
Lesson 1. Getting Started
Lesson 2. Introduction to Solid Modeling
Afternoon
Lesson 3. Form Features
Lesson 4. Expressions
Lesson 5. Face Operations
Lesson 6. Edge Operations
Workbook Section 1 Project Description & Rear Differential Modeling
Day 2 Tuesday Morning

Lesson 7. Model Construction Query
Lesson 8. Introduction to Assemblies
Workbook Section 2 Rear Differential Assembly
Lesson 9. Master Model
Afternoon
Lesson 10. Intro to Drafting
Workbook Section 3 Rear Differential Drafting
Day 3 Wednesday Morning

Lesson 11. Datum Planes
Lesson 12. Datum Axes
Workbook Section 4 Rear Axle Modeling, Assembly, and Drafting
Afternoon
Lesson 13. Sketching
Day 4 Thursday Morning

Lesson 14. Swept Features & Boolean Operations
Workbook Section 5 Power Pack Sketching
Afternoon
Workbook Section 6 Left Pinion Modeling, Assembly, and Drafting
Workbook Section 7 Rear Drive Gear Modeling

Day 5 Friday Morning
Lesson 15. Editing the Model
Workbook Section 8 Part and Assembly Editing
Lesson 16. Instance Arrays
Afternoon
Workbook Section 9 Rear Drive Gear Completion
Workbook Section 10 Assembly Completion

Class Layers and Categories
The following layer and category standards will be followed in this class.
Model Geometry

Solid Geometry 1-20 SOLIDS
InterĆpart Modeling 15-20 LINKED_OBJECTS
Sketch Geometry 21-40 SKETCHES
Curve Geometry 41-60 CURVES
Reference Geometry 61-80 DATUMS
Sheet Bodies 81-100 SHEETS
Drafting Objects

Drawing Borders 101-110 FORMATS
Engineering Disciplines

Mechanism Tools 121-130 MECH
Finite Element Meshes 131-150 CAE
and Engr. Tools
Manufacturing 151-180 MFG
Quality Tools 181-190 QA


Line, Arc, and Circle Creation Methods
Line Creation
Note: When numbered picks are shown, this is
usually not the only way the line may be created.
Line between two points Select two points
Line through a point and Define the first point

Y
horizontal, vertical, or at an Define second point within
angle to the WCS 1 X the Snap Angle setting or
Enter the desired angle
and press <Tab>.
Line through a point and Define a point

1
parallel, perpendicular, or Select a line
at an angle to a line 2 Select limiting point/object
[May also select line,
then point]
2
1
Line through a point and 2 Select a point

tangent or normal to a curve 1 Select a curve
Select limiting point/object
(if necessary)
Line tangent or perpendicular Select two curves

to two curves
2
Line tangent to a curve and Select two curves
parallel or perpendicular to 1 Select limiting point/object
a line
A bisector line Select two lines

Arc and Circle Creation
Note: When numbered picks are shown, this is usually
not the only way the arc or circle can be created.
Start point, end point, 2 3 Define first point
point on arc Define second point
1 Define third point
Start point, end point, 3 Define first point

2
tangent object Define second point
1 Select tangent object
Start point, tangent object, Define start point

end point 1
3
2
Define end point
Arc center, start point, Define first point

end point 2 Define second point
3
Define third point
1
Circle center, point on circle 2 Define first point

Define second point
1
Circle center, tangent object Define point

2
1

Hot Key Chart
Hot Key Function Hot Key Function

CtrlĆA Assembly Navigator CtrlĆN File, New
CtrlĆB Edit, Blank CtrlĆO File, Open
CtrlĆC Copy CtrlĆP File, Plot
CtrlĆD Delete CtrlĆQ
CtrlĆE Tools, Expression CtrlĆR View, Operation, Rotate (full
menu)
CtrlĆF Fit View CtrlĆS File, Save
CtrlĆG Grip Execute CtrlĆT Edit, Transform
CtrlĆH CtrlĆU Execute User Function
CtrlĆI Information, Object CtrlĆV Paste
CtrlĆJ Edit, Object Display CtrlĆW Application, Gateway
CtrlĆK CtrlĆX Cut
CtrlĆL Format, Layer Settings CtrlĆY
CtrlĆM Application, Modeling CtrlĆZ Edit, Undo

CtrlĆShiftĆA File, Save As CtrlĆShiftĆN Format, Layout, New
CtrlĆShiftĆB Edit, Blank, Reverse Blank CtrlĆShiftĆO Format, Layout, Open
All
CtrlĆShiftĆC View, Curvature Graph CtrlĆShiftĆP Tools, Macro, Playback
CtrlĆShiftĆD CtrlĆShiftĆQ Quick Shaded Image
CtrlĆShiftĆE CtrlĆShiftĆR Tools, Macro, Record
CtrlĆShiftĆF Format, Layout, Fit All CtrlĆShiftĆS Toolsm Macro, Step
Views
CtrlĆShiftĆG Debug Grip CtrlĆShiftĆT Preferences, Selection
CtrlĆShiftĆH High Quality Image CtrlĆShiftĆU Edit, Blank, Unblank All
Of Part
CtrlĆShiftĆI CtrlĆShiftĆV Format, Visible In View
CtrlĆShiftĆJ Preferences, Object CtrlĆShiftĆW
CtrlĆShiftĆK Edit, Blank, Unblank SeĆ CtrlĆShiftĆX
lected
CtrlĆShiftĆL CtrlĆShiftĆY
CtrlĆShiftĆM Model Navigator CtrlĆShiftĆZ View, Operation, Zoom
(full menu)
AltĆTab Toggles Application CtrlĆAltĆB Tools, Boundary

AltĆF4 Closes Active Window CtrlĆAltĆC Tools, CLSF
F1 Help on Context CtrlĆAltĆM Application ManufacturĆ
ing
F3 View Current Dialog CtrlĆAltĆN Tools, Unisim
F4 Information Window CtrlĆAltĆW Application Assemblies
F5 Refresh CtrlĆAltĆX Tools, Lathe Cross-SecĆ
tion
F6 Quick Zoom
F7 Quick Rotate

Training Course Evaluation
Name (Optional) Date
Instructor Location Unigraphics NX
Please give your honest opinion about the training you have received during this class. Provide additional
comments on the reverse side of this evaluation form.
Please check the box if you would like your comments, regarding the training you just received, featured in our
training publications. We will contact you if more information is needed.
Hotel Accommodations (if applicable) Hotel name
What was your overall impression of this hotel? Poor 2 3 4 5 6 7
Facilities - How would you rate the training facilities? Poor 2 3 4 5 6 7
Instruction - How would you rate the instruction? Poor 2 3 4 5 6 7
Was the instructor knowledgeable of the subject? Poor 2 3 4 5 6 7

Comments
1. Were the course objectives clearly defined and were they met? Yes No
Please explain:
2. Were concepts effectively communicated so that you understand how to apply the software? Yes
No Please explain:
3. How well prepared do you now feel to use the functions covered in this course in your day to day
activities? Please explain:
4. Were the student activities effective in learning Unigraphics? Yes No

Please explain:
over

5. Was the workbook activity effective in reinforcing the concepts taught? Yes No
Please explain:
6. What additional topics related to parametric design would you like to see covered in this course?
Please explain:
7. Do you have any other suggestions on how the course could be improved? Yes No
Please explain:
8. In order to continually improve our courseware a post class survey is conducted; would you be
willing to participate in this survey. (If you checked this box, make sure that your name is on this sheet.)
Course - What was your overall impression? Poor 2 3 4 5 6 7

Additional Comments


Unigraphics NX Student Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Unigraphics NX Student Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

UNIGRAPHICS

2002 Electronic Data Systems Corporation. All rights reserved.

Restricted Rights Legend

Warranties and Liabilities

EDS, the EDS logo, UNIGRAPHICS SOLUTIONS, UNIGRAPHICS, GRIP, PARASOLID,

Practical Application of Unigraphics Student Manual Publication History:

Version 15.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . February 1999

Drafting Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34

Introduction to Solid Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

ii Practical Applications of EDS Unigraphics NX

Inspect the Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Introduction to Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

iv Practical Applications of EDS Unigraphics NX

Dragging along an axis of the coordinate system . . . . . . . . 8-20

Introduction to Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Precision Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

vi Practical Applications of EDS Unigraphics NX

User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3

Quick Trim and Quick Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-40

Swept Features and Boolean Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

viii Practical Applications of EDS Unigraphics NX

Extrusion Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4

Editing the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

Deleting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9

Instance Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

x Practical Applications of EDS Unigraphics NX

Activity 2 - Circular Instance Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11

Point Constructor Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Offset Along Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15

Curve Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

xii Practical Applications of EDS Unigraphics NX

Dialog Bar Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-27

WCS Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1

Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1

(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)

xiv Practical Applications of EDS Unigraphics NX

This course is suited for designers, engineers, manufacturing engineers,

Apply the standards used in class.

There are no prerequisites for this class.

How to Use This Manual

Step 1 Open part file pau_topic_1.

From the menu bar, select File

Double-click on the parts sub-directory.

Select the file pau_topic_1 and choose OK.

Classroom System Information

Student Login: Username:

About Part File Naming

In order to facilitate the identification of design models without requiring the

part name revision

identifier configuration extension

Class Part File Naming

This course utilizes the following filenaming standard:

underscore unique identifier number

course identifier underscore delimiter extension

Expression Name Intended Use

These expressions could be entered by the user in each file or could be a

The following colors are preset to indicate different object types:

Object Valid colors

TIP Once a seed part is established, it should be writeĆprotected to avoid

Getting Started ÉÉÉ

PURPOSE This lesson is a fundamental introduction to the Unigraphics

Select xwi" to enable

Key in _new_1, where represent your initials. This

Ensure the directory is set to your home" directory. This